Connect-Tek USB-2 Specifications

Connect-Tek USB-2 Specifications
xx
ZZZ
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000
Series Oscilloscopes
Programmer Manual
*P077073800*
077-0738-00
xx
ZZZ
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000
Series Oscilloscopes
Programmer Manual
Revision A
www.tektronix.com
077-0738-00
Copyright © Tektronix. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries
or suppliers, and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication
supersedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
Contacting Tektronix
Tektronix, Inc.
14150 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA
For product information, sales, service, and technical support:
In North America, call 1-800-833-9200.
Worldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area.
Table of Contents
Getting Started ....................................................................................................
Setting Up Remote Communications Hardware .........................................................
Connecting via Ethernet................................................................................
Connecting via USB ....................................................................................
Connecting via GPIB ...................................................................................
Setting Up Remote Communications Software ..........................................................
Using TekVISA .........................................................................................
Using Tektronix e*Scope Software ..................................................................
Documentation ...............................................................................................
Command Syntax.................................................................................................
Command and Query Structure ............................................................................
Clearing the oscilloscope ...................................................................................
Command Entry..............................................................................................
Constructed Mnemonics ....................................................................................
Argument Types..............................................................................................
Command Groups ..............................................................................................
Acquisition Command Group ............................................................................
Alias Command Group....................................................................................
Bus Command Group .....................................................................................
Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group ..........................................................
Cursor Command Group ..................................................................................
Display Command Group.................................................................................
Ethernet Command Group ................................................................................
File System Command Group ............................................................................
FilterVu Command Group ................................................................................
Hard Copy Command Group .............................................................................
Horizontal Command Group .............................................................................
Mark Command Group....................................................................................
Math Command Group....................................................................................
Measurement Command Group ..........................................................................
Miscellaneous Command Group .........................................................................
PictBridge Command Group .............................................................................
Save and Recall Command Group .......................................................................
Search Command Group ..................................................................................
Status and Error Command Group .......................................................................
Trigger Command Group .................................................................................
Vertical Command Group.................................................................................
Waveform Transfer Command Group ...................................................................
Zoom Command Group ...................................................................................
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-9
2-1
2-1
2-4
2-4
2-6
2-7
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-23
2-25
2-26
2-29
2-30
2-31
2-33
2-37
2-38
2-47
2-50
2-57
i
Table of Contents
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ....................................................................
Status and Events .................................................................................................
Registers ......................................................................................................
Queues ........................................................................................................
Event Handling Sequence...................................................................................
Synchronization Methods ...................................................................................
Messages....................................................................................................
Appendix A: Character Set .....................................................................................
Appendix B: Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instruments...........
Appendix C: Reserved Words ..................................................................................
Appendix D: Application Module-enabled Commands .....................................................
Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence Examples..........................................
Example 1: Single Threshold Edge Search ..............................................................
Example 2: Single Threshold Edge Trigger .............................................................
Example 3: Dual Threshold Runt Search ................................................................
Example 4: Single Threshold Logic Search on Three Waveforms....................................
Index
ii
2-59
3-1
3-1
3-4
3-5
3-7
3-12
A-1
B-1
C-1
D-1
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-2
E-2
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Getting Started
This manual explains the use of commands for remotely controlling your
oscilloscope. With this information, you can write computer programs to
perform functions, such as setting the front-panel controls, taking measurements,
performing statistical calculations, and exporting data for use in other programs.
This manual describes commands for the following models:
Table 1-1:
Model
Bandwidth
Number
of Analog
Channels
MSO2024B,
MSO2024
200 MHz
4
1 GS/s
1 M pts.
5,000
MSO2022B
200 MHz
2
1 GS/s
1 M pts.
5,000
MSO2014B,
MSO2014
100 MHz
4
1 GS/s
1 M pts.
5,000
MSO2012B,
MSO2012
100 MHz
2
1 GS/s
1 M pts.
5,000
MSO2004B
70 MHz
4
1 GS/s
1 M pts.
5,000
MSO2002B
70 MHz
2
1 GS/s
1 M pts.
5,000
DPO2024B,
DPO2024
200 MHz
4
1 GS/s
1 M pts.
5,000
DPO2022B
200 MHz
2
1 GS/s
1 M pts.
5,000
DPO2014B,
DPO2014
100 MHz
4
1 GS/s
1 M pts.
5,000
DPO2012B,
DPO2012
100 MHz
2
1 GS/s
1 M pts.
5,000
DPO2004B
70 MHz
4
1 GS/s
1 M pts.
5,000
DPO2002B
70 MHz
2
1 GS/s
1 M pts.
5,000
New in the Programmer
Manual
Sample Rate
Record Length,
all ch.
Wfm. Capture
Rate
The following major changes were made to this version of the programmer
manual (077-0738-00):
Added 6 new oscilloscope models:
MSO2002B – 70 MHz, 2 channel
MSO2004B – 70 MHz, 4 channel
MSO2022B – 200 MHz, 2 channel
DPO2002B – 70 MHz, 2 channel
DPO2004B – 70 MHz, 4 channel
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
1-1
Getting Started
DPO2022B – 200 MHz, 2 channel
Setting Up Remote Communications Hardware
You can remotely communicate between your oscilloscope and PC via Ethernet,
USB, or GPIB cables.
NOTE. In order to communicate via an Ethernet cable, you need to install an
optional DPO2CONN Connectivity Module into the back of the instrument. This
module includes both Ethernet and VGA video monitor ports.
Connecting via Ethernet
If your PC is connected to a local area network, you can use an Ethernet cable to
connect your oscilloscope to the same network, and then use software to remotely
control the oscilloscope via the PC. First, you’ll need to acquire an optional
DPO2CONN Connectivity Module, which provides Ethernet and video out ports
for your oscilloscope (search on www.tektronix.com). Then, simply plug one end
of the Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port (RJ-45 connector), and the other end
into your network connection.
NOTE. You can connect an MSO/DPO2000B oscilloscope only to a 10/100
Base-T local area network.
1-2
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Getting Started
To view or change the Ethernet settings on your oscilloscope, do the following:
1. On the front panel, push Utility.
2. Push Utility Page.
3. Select I/O with the Multipurpose knob.
4. Push Ethernet Network Settings.
5. If you are on a DHCP Ethernet network and using a through cable, on the
side menu set DHCP/BOOTP to On.
6. If you are using a cross-over cable, set DHCP/BOOTP to Off, and set a
hard-coded TCPIP address.
Connecting via USB
You can connect your oscilloscope directly to a PC by using a high-speed USB
cable, and then use software to remotely control the oscilloscope via the PC.
Simply plug one end of the cable into the USB 2.0 high-speed device port on
the rear panel of your oscilloscope, and the other end into a USB port on your
computer.
This port requires that the cable connected from the port to the host computer
meets the USB 2.0 specification for high speed connections. Typically, such
cables should be 3 feet or shorter in length, but this is determined by the quality of
the cable and, with higher quality cables, this length can be extended. (It is also
dependent upon the drive capability of the host USB port to which the instrument
is connected.) The use of high quality short cables is recommended to avoid USB
connection problems.
Once the USB cable is connected, the system automatically configures itself. To
verify that the USB is enabled:
1. On the front panel, push Utility.
2. Push Utility Page.
3. Select I/O with the Multipurpose knob.
4. Push USB, and verify that USB is enabled.
5. If USB is not enabled, push Enabled on the side menu.
After connection, the host, with appropriate software, can list the oscilloscope as a
USB device with the following parameters: (See Table 1-2.)
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
1-3
Getting Started
Table 1-2: USB Device Parameters
Parameter
Connecting via GPIB
Value
Manufacturer ID
0x0699 (decimal 1689)
Product ID
0x399 DPO2002B
0x39A MSO2002B
0x39B DPO2004B
0x39C MSO2004B
0x39D DPO2012B
0x39E MSO2012B
0x39F DPO2014B
0x3A0 MSO2014B
0x3A1 DPO2022B
0x3A2 MSO2022B
0x3A3 DPO2024B
0x3A4 MSO2024B
0x0372 DPO2012
0x0373 DPO2014
0x0374 DPO2024
0x0376 MSO2012
0x0377 MSO2014
0x0378 MSO2024
Serial number
Serial number
Manufacturer description
“Tektronix”
Interface description
“USBTMC-USB488”
(decimal 921)
(decimal 922)
(decimal 923)
(decimal 924)
(decimal 925)
(decimal 926)
(decimal 927)
(decimal 928)
(decimal 929)
(decimal 930)
(decimal 931)
(decimal 932)
The oscilloscope has a USB 2.0 high-speed device port to control the oscilloscope
through USBTMC or GPIB with a TEK-USB-488 Adapter. The USBTMC
protocol allows USB devices to communicate using IEEE488 style messages.
This lets you run your GPIB software applications on USB hardware.
To use GPIB, start by connecting an appropriate USB cable to the USB 2.0
high-speed device port on the rear panel of your oscilloscope. Connect the other
end to the TEK-USB-488 Adapter host port. Then connect a GPIB cable from the
TEK-USB-488 Adapter to your PC.
Supply power to the Adapter in either of these two ways:
1-4
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Getting Started
1. Use the optional 5 VDC power adapter connected to the 5 VDC power input
on the Adapter.
2. Use an appropriate USB cable connected to a powered USB host port on your
PC and the Device port on the TEK-USB-488 Adapter.
Before setting up the oscilloscope for remote communication using the electronic
(physical) GPIB interface, you should familiarize yourself with the following
GPIB requirements:
A unique device address must be assigned to each device on the bus. No two
devices can share the same device address.
No more than 15 devices can be connected to any one line.
Only one device should be connected for every 6 feet (2 meters) of cable used.
No more than 65 feet (20 meters) of cable should be used to connect devices
to a bus.
At least two-thirds of the devices on the network should be powered on while
using the network.
Connect the devices on the network in a star or linear configuration. Do not
use loop or parallel configurations.
To function correctly, your oscilloscope must have a unique device address. The
default setting for the GPIB configuration is GPIB Address 1.
To change the GPIB address settings, do the following:
1. On the front panel, push Utility.
2. Push Utility Page.
3. Select I/O with the Multipurpose knob.
4. Push GPIB.
5. Enter the GPIB address on the side menu, using the multipurpose knob. This
will set the GPIB address on an attached TEK-USB-488 Adapter
The oscilloscope is now set up for bidirectional communication with your PC.
Setting Up Remote Communications Software
Connect your oscilloscope directly to a computer to let the PC analyze your data,
collect screen images, or to control the oscilloscope using a program of your own
creation. You can connect using TekVISA drivers, or connect directly from any
computer’s web browser using Tektronix e*Scope Web-enabled tools.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
1-5
Getting Started
NOTE. The CD that your oscilloscope shipped with contains additional tools for
efficient connectivity between your oscilloscope and your computer. These include
toolbars that speed connectivity with Microsoft Excel and Word.
Using TekVISA
TekVISA lets you use your MS-Windows computer to acquire data from your
oscilloscope for use in an analysis package that runs on your PC, such as Microsoft
Excel, National Instruments LabVIEW, Tektronix OpenChoice Desktop software,
or your own custom software. You can use a common communications connection,
such as USB, Ethernet, or GPIB, to connect the computer to the oscilloscope.
The TekVISA drivers are automatically installed by installing the OpenChoice
Desktop software that came with your instrument’s CD. You can also download
the OpenChoice Desktop software from www.tektronix.com\downloads.
NOTE. TekVISA cannot run if any other version of VISA drivers is installed.
To set up communications between your oscilloscope and a computer running
TekVISA drivers:
1-6
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Getting Started
1. Install the Tektronix OpenChoice Desktop software package, either from the
CD that came with your instrument or from the Tektronix website. This will
automatically install the TekVISA drivers.
2. Connect the oscilloscope to your computer with the appropriate USB, Ethernet
or GPIB cable. Cycle the power on the oscilloscope.
3. Push Utility.
4. Push Utility Page.
5. Turn multipurpose knob a and select I/O.
6. If you are using USB, the system sets itself up automatically for you, if USB is
enabled. Check USB on the lower menu to be sure that USB is enabled. If it is
not enabled, push USB. Then push Connect to Computer on the side menu.
7. To use Ethernet, push Ethernet Network Settings on the lower menu. Use
the side menu buttons to adjust your network settings, as needed. For more
information, see the e*Scope setup information below.
8. If you are using GPIB, push GPIB. Enter the GPIB address on the side menu,
using multipurpose knob a. This will set the GPIB address on an attached
TEK-USB-488 Adapter.
9. Run the application software on your computer.
Using Tektronix e*Scope
Software
Your oscilloscope contains a pre-installed remote control software package by
Tektronix called e*Scope. You can use this to “talk” to a networked PC’s web
browser so that you can view and control the oscilloscope wherever it is on your
network.
First, you’ll need to acquire an optional DPO2CONN Connectivity Module,
which provides Ethernet and video out ports for your oscilloscope (search on
www.tektronix.com).
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
1-7
Getting Started
To set up e*Scope communications between your oscilloscope and a networked
computer:
1. With the DPO2CONN Connectivity Module installed, connect an Ethernet
cable from the back of the oscilloscope to the same network as your computer.
2. Power up your oscilloscope and test the network connection:
a. Push the Utility button, and then push Utility Page on the bottom menu.
b. Turn multipurpose knob a to select I/O, and then push Ethernet Network
Settings on the bottom menu.
c. Push Test Connection on the side menu. The button should say OK.
3. Next, find your oscilloscope’s IP address:
a. Push Change Instrument Settings on the side menu to display the
network parameters configured on your oscilloscope.
b. Note down the Instrument IP address.
1-8
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Getting Started
4. On the menu bar of your PC’s web browser, type in the oscilloscope’s
Instrument IP address and press Enter.
5. You should now see the e*Scope screen on your PC and an image of your
oscilloscope’s display. You may use the menu items at the top to control your
oscilloscope from your PC’s browser.
Documentation
The following documents are available for download on the Manuals Finder
Web site at www.tektronix.com:
MSO/DPO2000B Series User Manual. Information about installing and
operating the oscilloscope.
MSO/DPO2000B Series Technical Reference. Oscilloscope specifications and
a performance verification procedure.
TekVISA Programmer Manual. Description of TekVISA, the Tektronix
implementation of the VISA Application Programming Interface (API). TekVISA
is industry-compliant software for writing interoperable oscilloscope drivers in a
variety of Application Development Environments (ADEs).
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
1-9
Getting Started
1-10
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Syntax
You can control the operations and functions of the oscilloscope through the
Ethernet port or the USB 2.0 device port using commands and queries. The
related topics listed below describe the syntax of these commands and queries.
The topics also describe the conventions that the oscilloscope uses to process
them. See the Command Groups topic in the table of contents for a listing of the
commands by command group, or use the index to locate a specific command.
Backus-Naur Form
Notation
This documentation describes the commands and queries using Backus-Naur
Form (BNF) notation. Refer to the following table for the symbols that are used.
Table 2-1: Symbols for Backus-Naur Form
Symbol
<>
Meaning
=
Is defined as
|
Exclusive OR
Defined element
{}
Group; one element is required
[]
.. .
Optional; can be omitted
()
Comment
Previous element(s) may be repeated
Command and Query Structure
Commands consist of set commands and query commands (usually called
commands and queries). Commands modify oscilloscope settings or tell the
oscilloscope to perform a specific action. Queries cause the oscilloscope to return
data and status information.
Most commands have both a set form and a query form. The query form of the
command differs from the set form by its question mark at the end. For example,
the set command ACQuire:MODe has a query form ACQuire:MODe?. Not all
commands have both a set and a query form. Some commands have set only and
some have query only.
Messages
A command message is a command or query name followed by any information
the oscilloscope needs to execute the command or query. Command messages
may contain five element types, defined in the following table.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-1
Command Syntax
Table 2-2: Command Message Elements
Commands
Symbol
Meaning
<Header>
This is the basic command name. If the header ends with a question
mark, the command is a query. The header may begin with a colon
(:) character. If the command is concatenated with other commands,
the beginning colon is required. Never use the beginning colon with
command headers beginning with a star (*).
<Mnemonic>
This is a header subfunction. Some command headers have only one
mnemonic. If a command header has multiple mnemonics, a colon (:)
character always separates them from each other.
<Argument>
This is a quantity, quality, restriction, or limit associated with the header.
Some commands have no arguments while others have multiple
arguments. A <space> separates arguments from the header. A
<comma> separates arguments from each other.
<Comma>
A single comma is used between arguments of multiple-argument
commands. Optionally, there may be white space characters before
and after the comma.
<Space>
A white space character is used between a command header and the
related argument. Optionally, a white space may consist of multiple
white space characters.
Commands cause the oscilloscope to perform a specific function or change one of
the settings. Commands have the structure:
[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument>[<Comma> <Argument>]...]
A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged in a hierarchical
or tree structure. The first mnemonic is the base or root of the tree and each
subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch off the previous one. Commands at a
higher level in the tree may affect those at a lower level. The leading colon (:)
always returns you to the base of the command tree.
2-2
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Syntax
Queries
Queries cause the oscilloscope to return status or setting information. Queries
have the structure:
[:]<Header>
[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument> [<Coma><Argument>]...]
You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless
otherwise noted. These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics
below the specified branch or level.
Headers
Use the HEADer command to control whether the oscilloscope returns headers as
part of the query response. If header is on, the query response returns command
headers, then formats itself as a valid set command. When header is off, the
response includes only the values. This may make it easier to parse and extract the
information from the response. The table below shows the difference in responses.
Table 2-3: Comparison of Header Off and Header On Responses
Query
Header Off
Header On
TIME?
14:30:00
:TIME “14:30:00”
ACQuire:NUMAVg?
100
:ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 100
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-3
Command Syntax
Clearing the oscilloscope
You can clear the Output Queue and reset the oscilloscope to accept a new
command or query by using the selected Device Clear (DCL) function.
Command Entry
The following rules apply when entering commands:
You can enter commands in upper or lower case.
You can precede any command with white space characters. White space
characters include any combination of the ASCII control characters 00 through
09 and 0B through 20 hexadecimal (0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal).
The oscilloscope ignores commands consisting of any combination of white
space characters and line feeds.
Abbreviating
You can abbreviate many oscilloscope commands. Each command in this
documentation shows the minimum acceptable abbreviations in capitals. For
example, you can enter the command ACQuire:NUMAvg simply as ACQ:NUMA
or acq:numa.
Abbreviation rules may change over time as new oscilloscope models are
introduced. Thus, for the most robust code, use the full spelling.
If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included as part
of query responses, you can further control whether the returned headers are
abbreviated or are full-length with the VERBose command.
Concatenating
2-4
You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a
semicolon (;). The oscilloscope executes concatenated commands in the order
received.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Syntax
When concatenating commands and queries, you must follow these rules:
1. Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by the beginning
colon on all commands except the first one. For example, the commands
TRIGger:MODe NORMal and ACQuire:NUMAVg 8, can be concatenated
into the following single command:
TRIGger:MODe NORMal;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 8
2. If concatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemonic,
you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate the beginning colon.
For example, you can concatenate the commands ACQuire:MODe AVErage
and ACQuire:NUMAVg 8 into a single command:
ACQuire:MODe AVErage; NUMAVg 8
The longer version works equally well:
ACQuire:MODe AVErage;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 8
3. Never precede a star (*) command with a colon:
ACQuire:STATE 1;*OPC
Any commands that follow will be processed as if the star command was
not there so the commands, ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;*OPC;NUMAVg 8
will set the acquisition mode to envelope and set the number of acquisitions
for averaging to 8.
4. When you concatenate queries, the responses to all the queries are
concatenated into a single response message.
5. Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message. For
example,
ACQuire:MODe SAMple;NUMAVg?;STATE?
is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to sample. The message then
queries the number of acquisitions for averaging and the acquisition state.
Concatenated commands and queries are executed in the order received.
Here are some invalid concatenations:
HORizontal:SCAle 400E-9;ACQuire:NUMAVg 8 (no colon before
ACQuire)
DISPlay:GRAticule FULL;:*TRG (colon before a star (*) command)
MATH:HORizontal:SCAle 1.0e-1;HORizontal:POSition 5.0el
(levels of the mnemonics are different; either remove the second use of
HORizontal: or place :MATH in front of HORizontal:POSition)
Terminating
This documentation uses <EOM> (End of Message) to represent a message
terminator.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-5
Command Syntax
Table 2-4: End of Message Terminator
Symbol
Meaning
<EOM>
Message terminator
The end-of-message terminator must be the END message (EOI asserted
concurrently with the last data byte). The last data byte may be an ASCII line
feed (LF) character.
This oscilloscope does not support ASCII LF only message termination. The
oscilloscope always terminates outgoing messages with LF and EOI.
Constructed Mnemonics
Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics. For example, a
channel mnemonic can be CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4. You use these mnemonics
in the command just as you do any other mnemonic. For example, there is a
CH1:POSition command, and there is also a CH2:POSition command. In the
command descriptions, this list of choices is abbreviated as CH<x>.
Cursor Position
Mnemonics
When cursors are displayed, commands may specify which cursor of the pair to
use.
Table 2-5: Channel Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
CH<x>
A channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 4.
Table 2-6: Cursor Mnemonics
Math Specifier Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
CURSOR<x>
A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.
POSITION<x>
A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.
HPOS<x>
A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.
Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in
the header.
Table 2-7: Math Specifier Mnemonics
2-6
Symbol
Meaning
Math<x>
A math waveform specifier; <x> is 1.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Syntax
Measurement Specifier
Mnemonics
Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in the
header. Up to four automated measurements may be displayed.
Table 2-8: Measurement Specifier Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
MEAS<x>
A measurement specifier; <x> is 1 through 4.
Channel Mnemonics
Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header.
Reference Waveform
Mnemonics
Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the
header.
Table 2-9: Reference Waveform Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
REF<x>
A reference waveform specifier; <x> 1 or 2. The MSO/DPO2000B and
MSO/DPO2000 series provides only two REF waveforms regardless of
whether the instrument is a 2 or 4 channel model.
Argument Types
Numeric
Many oscilloscope commands require numeric arguments. The syntax shows
the format that the oscilloscope returns in response to a query. This is also the
preferred format when sending the command to the oscilloscope though any of
the formats will be accepted. This documentation represents these arguments as
described below.
Table 2-10: Numeric Arguments
Symbol
Meaning
<NR1>
Signed integer value
<NR2>
Floating point value without an exponent
<NR3>
Floating point value with an exponent
<bin>
Digital data in binary format
Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting, by either
rounding or truncating,, when an invalid number is input, unless otherwise noted
in the command description.
Quoted String
Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string, which is
simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by a single quote (') or double quote
("). The following is an example of a quoted string: "This is a quoted
string". This documentation represents these arguments as follows:
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-7
Command Syntax
Table 2-11: Quoted String Argument
Symbol
Meaning
<QString>
Quoted string of ASCII text
A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7-bit ASCII character
set. Follow these rules when you use quoted strings:
1. Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string. For
example: "this is a valid string".
2. You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow the
previous rule. For example: "this is an 'acceptable' string".
3. You can include a quote character within a string by repeating the quote. For
example: "here is a "" mark".
4. Strings can have upper or lower case characters.
5. If you use a GPIB network, you cannot terminate a quoted string with the
END message before the closing delimiter.
6. A carriage return or line feed embedded in a quoted string does not terminate
the string. The return is treated as another character in the string.
7. The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is 1000
characters.
Here are some invalid strings:
"Invalid string argument' (quotes are not of the same type)
"test<EOI>" (termination character is embedded in the string)
Block
Several oscilloscope commands use a block argument form, as defined in the
table below.
Table 2-12: Block Argument
Symbol
Meaning
<NZDig>
A nonzero digit character in the range of 1–9
<Dig>
A digit character, in the range of 0–9
<DChar>
A character with the hexadecimal equivalent of 00 through FF (0
through 255 decimal)
<Block>
A block of data bytes defined as: <Block> ::=
{#<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...] |#0[<DChar>...]<terminator>}
<NZDig> specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow. Taken together,
the <NZDig> and <Dig> elements form a decimal integer that specifies how
many <DChar> elements follow.
2-8
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Syntax
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-9
Command Syntax
2-10
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
This manual lists the MSO/DPO2000B and MSO/DPO2000 series IEEE488.2
commands in two ways. First, it presents them by functional groups. Then, it lists
them alphabetically. The functional group list starts below. The alphabetical
list provides detail on each command. (See page 2-59, Commands Listed in
Alphabetical Order.)
Acquisition Command Group
Use the commands in the Acquisition Command Group to set up the modes and
functions that control how the oscilloscope acquires signals input to the channels,
and processes them into waveforms.
Using the commands in this group, you can do the following:
Start and stop acquisitions.
Control whether each waveform is simply acquired, averaged over successive
acquisitions of that waveform.
Set the controls or conditions that start and stop acquisitions.
Control acquisition of channel waveforms.
Set acquisition parameters.
Table 2-13: Acquisition Commands
Command
Description
ACQuire?
Returns acquisition parameters
ACQuire:MAXSamplerate?
Returns the maximum real-time sample rate
ACQuire:MODe
Sets or returns the acquisition mode
ACQuire:NUMACq?
Returns number of acquisitions that have
occurred
ACQuire:NUMAVg
Sets or returns the number of acquisitions for
an averaged waveform
ACQuire:STATE
Starts or stops the acquisition system
ACQuire:STOPAfter
Sets or returns whether the acquisition is
continuous or single sequence
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-11
Command Groups
Alias Command Group
Use the Alias commands to define new commands as a sequence of standard
commands. You may find this useful when repeatedly using the same commands
to perform certain tasks like setting up measurements.
Aliases are similar to macros but do not include the capability to substitute
parameters into alias bodies. The alias mechanism obeys the following rules:
The alias name must consist of a valid IEEE488.2 message unit, which may
not appear in a message preceded by a colon, comma, or a command or query
program header.
The alias name may not appear in a message followed by a colon, comma,
or question mark.
An alias name must be distinct from any keyword or keyword short form.
An alias name cannot be redefined without first being deleted using one of
the alias deletion functions.
Alias names do not appear in response messages.
Table 2-14: Alias Commands
2-12
Command
Description
ALIas
Sets or returns the alias state
ALIas:CATalog?
Returns a list of the currently defined alias
labels
ALIas:DEFine
Assigns a sequence of program messages
to an alias label
ALIas:DELEte
Removes a specified alias
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
Deletes all existing aliases
ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe]
Removes a specified alias
ALIas[:STATE]
Sets or returns the alias state
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Bus Command Group
Use the Bus commands when working with serial bus measurements.
Install the DPO2EMBD application module when working with I2C or SPI
bus signals.
Install the DPO2AUTO module when working with CAN or LIN bus signals.
Install the DPO2COMP module when working with RS232 bus signals.
Table 2-15: Bus Commands
Commands
Description
BUS
Returns the parameters for each bus
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate
Sets or returns the bit rate for the CAN bus
BUS:B<x>:CAN:PRObe
Sets or returns the probing method used to
probe the CAN bus
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint
Sets or returns the sample point (in %) to
sample during each bit period
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce
Sets or returns the CAN data source
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMAt
Sets the display format for the numerical
information in the specified bus waveform
BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:RWINClude
Sets and returns whether the read/write bit is
included in the address
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the I2C SCLK source
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:DATA|:SDATA}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the I2C SDATA source
BUS:B<x>:LABel
Sets or returns the waveform label for the
specified bus
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate
Sets or returns the bit rate for LIN
BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat
Sets or returns the LIN ID format
BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLARity
Sets or returns the LIN polarity
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint
Sets or returns the sample point (in %) at
which to sample during each bit period
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce
Sets or returns the LIN data source
BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard
Sets or returns the LIN standard
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>:SOUrce
Sets or returns the parallel bit <x> source
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:EDGE
Sets or returns the parallel clock edge for
bus <x>
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:ISCLOCKed
Sets or returns whether the parallel bus is
clocked
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:SOUrce
Sets or returns the parallel bus<x> clock
source
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:WIDth
Sets or returns the number of bits used for
the width of the parallel bus <x>
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-13
Command Groups
Table 2-15: Bus Commands (cont.)
2-14
Commands
Description
BUS:B<x>:POSition
Sets or returns the position of the specified
bus waveform
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate
Sets or returns the RS232 bit rate for the
specified bus
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits
Sets or returns the number of bits for the
data frame
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter
Sets or returns the RS232 delimiting value
for a packet on the specified bus
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode
Sets or returns the display mode for the
specified bus display and event table
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity
Sets or returns parity for RS232 data
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity
Sets or returns the RS232C polarity for the
specified bus
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:SOUrce
Sets or returns the RS232 RX source
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:SOUrce
Sets or returns the RS232 TX Source
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:POLARity
Sets or returns the SPI SCLK polarity
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the SPI SCLK source
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:POLARity
Sets or returns the SPI MISO polarity
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the SPI MISO source
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:
POLARity
Sets or returns the SPI MOSI polarity
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the SPI MOSI source
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:POLARity
Sets or returns the SPI SS polarity
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the SPI SS source
BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder
Sets or returns the bit order for the specified
SPI bus
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA:SIZe
Sets or returns the number of bits per word
for the specified SPI bus
BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING
Sets or returns the type of SPI framing
BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime
Sets or returns the SPI bus idle time in
seconds for the specified SPI bus
BUS:B<x>:STATE
Turns the specified bus on and off
BUS:B<x>:TYPE
Sets or returns the specified bus type
BUS:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the lower threshold for each
channel
BUS:THReshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the threshold for a channel
BUS:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the upper threshold for each
channel
BUS:THReshold:D<x>
Sets or returns the threshold for digital
channel
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-15: Bus Commands (cont.)
Commands
Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS?
Returns the serial search type
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:CONDition
Sets or returns the search condition for a LIN
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue
Sets or returns the binary data string
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
in bytes
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string used
for a LIN search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE
Sets or returns the error type used for a LIN
Search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
Sets or returns the binary address string
used for LIN search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:RS232C:CONDition
Sets or returns the trigger condition for a
RS232 trigger
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
for a RS232 RX trigger
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string for a
RX RS232 trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition
Sets or returns the trigger condition for LIN
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be
used for LIN trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
in bytes to be used for LIN trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE
Sets or returns the error type
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
Sets or returns the binary address string
used for LIN trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:
SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
for a RX RS232 trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:
VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string for a
RX RS232 trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:
SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
to be used for a TX RS232 Trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:
VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be
used for a TX RS232 trigger
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-15
Command Groups
Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group
The Calibration and Diagnostic commands provide information about the current
state of oscilloscope calibration. They also initiate internal signal path calibration
(SPC) or execute diagnostic tests. Commands that are specific to factory
calibration are not described in this manual. They are described in the Service
manual, available for download at www.tektronix.com.
Table 2-16: Calibration and Diagnostic Commands
2-16
Command
Description
*CAL?
Instructs the oscilloscope to perform
self-calibration and returns the oscilloscope
self calibration status
CALibrate:FACtory
Provides the controls for starting and
stopping the factory calibration process
CALibrate:FACtory:STATus?
Returns the factory calibration status value
saved in nonvolatile memory
CALibrate:INTERNal
Starts a signal path compensation
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt
Starts the internal signal path calibration
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?
Returns the current status of the internal
signal path calibration
CALibrate:RESults?
Returns the status of all calibration
subsystems without performing an SPC
operation
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory?
Returns the status of internal and factory
calibration
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Returns the results of the last SPC operation
CALibrate:TEMPerature?
Returns 0 as MSO/DPO2000/B series
does not support recording of oscilloscope
temperature
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion
Sets the self-test loop option
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes
Sets the self-test loop option to run N times
DIAg:LOOP:STOP
Stops the self-test at the end of the current
loop
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?
Returns the pass/fail status from the last
self-test sequence execution
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?
Returns the internal results log from the last
self-test sequence execution
DIAg:SELect:<function>
Selects one of the available self-test areas
DIAg:STATE
Sets the oscilloscope operating state
DIAg:SELect
Runs self tests on the specified system
subsystem
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Cursor Command Group
Use the commands in the Cursor Command Group to control the cursor display
and readout. You can use these commands to control the setups for cursor 1 and
cursor 2, such as cursor position.
You can also use the commands to select one of the following cursor functions:
Off. Turns off the display of all cursors.
Waveform Cursors. Consists of two cursors. Waveform cursors enable you to
conveniently measure waveform amplitude and time.
Screen Cursors. Consists of two pairs of independent horizontal and vertical
cursors. You can use these cursors to indicate an arbitrary position within
the waveform display area.
Table 2-17: Cursor Commands
Command
Description
CURSor?
Returns cursor settings
CURSor:FUNCtion
Sets or returns the cursor type
CURSor:HBArs?
Returns hbar cursor settings
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
Returns hbars cursors vertical difference
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
Sets or returns the hbar cursor<x> vertical
position
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
Returns hbar cursor units
CURSor:HBArs:USE
Sets the horizontal bar cursor measurement
scale
CURSor:MODe
Sets or returns whether cursors move in
unison or separately
CURSor:VBArs?
Sets or returns the position of vertical bar
cursors
CURSor:VBArs:ALTERNATE<x>?
Returns the alternate readout for the
waveform (Vbar) cursors
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
Returns the difference between vbar cursors
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>?
Returns the horizontal value of the specified
vertical bar ticks
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
Sets or returns the vbar cursor<x> horizontal
position
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
Sets or returns the units for vbar cursors
CURSor:VBArs:USE
Sets the vertical bar cursor measurement
scale
CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa?
Returns the vertical difference between the
two vertical bar cursor ticks
CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:DELta?
Returns the difference between the cursors
X radius and the cursor Y radius
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-17
Command Groups
Table 2-17: Cursor Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:POSITION<x>?
Returns the polar radius of the specified
cursor
CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:UNIts?
Returns the polar radius units
CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:DELta?
Returns the XY cursor polar coordinate delta
CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:POSITION<x>?
Returns the cursor X or cursor Y polar
coordinate
CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:UNIts?
Returns the cursor polar coordinate units
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:DELta?
Returns the difference between the cursors
X position and cursor Y position
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:POSITION<x>?
Returns the position of the X or Y cursor used
to calculate the X × Y cursor measurement
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:UNIts?
Returns the XY cursor product units
CURSor:XY:RATIO:DELta?
Returns the ratio of the difference between
the cursor X position and cursor Y position
CURSor:XY:RATIO:POSITION<x>?
Returns the X or Y position for the specified
cursor
CURSor:XY:RATIO:UNIts?
Returns the X and Y cursor units for the ratio
measurement
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:DELta?
Returns the cursor X delta value in
rectangular coordinates
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:POSITION<x>
Sets or returns the cursor X rectangular
coordinates
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:UNIts?
Returns the Cursor X rectangular units
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:DELta?
Returns The cursor Y delta value in
rectangular coordinates
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:POSITION<x>>
Sets or returns the cursor Y rectangular
coordinates
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:UNIts?
Returns the cursor Y rectangular units
Display Command Group
Use the commands in the Display Command Group to change the graticule style,
the displayed intensities, and to set the characteristics of the waveform display.
Use these commands to set the style that best displays your waveforms and
graticule display properties. Note that the mode you choose globally affects all
displayed waveforms.
2-18
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-18: Display Commands
Command
Description
DISplay?
Returns current display settings
DISplay:CLOCk
Sets or returns the display of the date/time
stamp
DISplay:DIGital:HEIght
Sets or returns the height of the digital
display and the number of waveforms that
you can display
DISplay:FORMat
Sets or returns the display format
DISplay:GRAticule
Sets or returns the type of graticule that is
displayed
DISplay:INTENSITy?
Returns all display intensity settings
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight
Sets or returns the backlight intensity for the
display
DISplay:INTENSITy:GRAticule
Sets or returns the graticule intensity for the
display
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform
Sets or returns the intensity of the waveforms
DISplay:PERSistence
Sets or returns display persistence setting
MESSage:BOX
Sets or returns the size and position of the
message window
MESSage:CLEAR
Removes the message text from the
message window
MESSage:SHOW
Clears the contents of the message window
MESSage:STATE
Controls the display of the message window
Ethernet Command Group
Use the commands in the Ethernet Command Group to set up the Ethernet remote
interface.
Table 2-19: Ethernet Commands
Command
Description
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp
Sets or returns the network initialization
search for a DHCP/BOOTP server
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress
Sets or returns the network Domain Name
Server (Dns) IP address
ETHERnet:DOMAINname
Sets or returns the network domain name
ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress?
Returns the Ethernet address value assigned
to the oscilloscope
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress
Sets or returns the remote interface gateway
IP address
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-19
Command Groups
Table 2-19: Ethernet Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
ETHERnet:HTTPPort
Sets or returns the remote interface HTTP
port value
ETHERnet:IPADDress
Sets or returns the IP address assigned to
the oscilloscope
ETHERnet:NAME
Sets or returns the network name assigned
to the oscilloscope
ETHERnet:PASSWord
Sets or returns the Ethernet access password
ETHERnet:PING
Causes the oscilloscope to ping the gateway
IP address
ETHERnet:PING:STATUS?
Returns the results from pinging the gateway
IP address
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask
Sets or returns the remote interface subnet
mask value
File System Command Group
Use the commands in the File System Command Group to access USB media.
You can use the commands to do the following:
List the contents of a directory
Create, rename and delete directories
Create, read, rename, or delete a file
Format media
When using these commands, keep the following points in mind:
File arguments are always enclosed within double quotes:
"E:/MYDIR/TEK00001.SET"
File names follow the non-case sensitive, MSDOS format:
[DRIVE:][\PATH\]filename
File names for commands and queries are not case sensitive. Save commands
translate all file names to uppercase for storage
For Example: SAVE:WAVEFORM CH1,"ch1.isf" results in Ch1 being saved
to a file named CH1.ISF.
RECALL:WAVEFORM "Ch1.isf",REF1 would recall the waveform from the
file CH1.ISF to the REF1 internal waveform storage location.
Path separators may be either forward slashes (/) or back slashes (\)
The file and directory names have no more than eight characters as the base
name, and no more than three characters as the extension as in 8.3 format
2-20
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
NOTE. Using back slash as a path separator may produce some unexpected
results, depending on how your application treats escaped characters. Many
applications recognize the sequence of back slash followed by an alphabetic
character as an escaped character, and, as such, interpret that alphabetic
character as a control character. For example, the sequence "\n" may be
interpreted as a newline character; "\t" may be interpreted as a tab character. To
ensure that this interpretation does not occur, you can use double back slashes.
For example, "E:\\testfile.txt".
Table 2-20: File System Commands
Command
Description
FILESystem
Returns the file system state
FILESystem:CWD
Sets or returns the current working directory
for FILESystem commands.
FILESystem:DELEte
Deletes a named file or directory
FILESystem:DIR?
Returns a list of directory contents
FILESystem:FORMat
Formats a named drive
FILESystem:FREESpace?
Returns the number of bytes of free space
on the current drive
FILESystem:MKDir
Creates a new directory
FILESystem:READFile
Writes the contents of the specified file to the
specified interface
FILESystem:REName
Assigns a new name to an existing file
FILESystem:RMDir
Deletes a named directory
FILESystem:WRITEFile
Writes the specified block data to the
oscilloscope current working directory
FilterVu Command Group
Use the commands in the FilterVu Command Group to set up the FilterVu feature.
FilterVu provides a variable low pass filter to block unwanted noise while still
displaying high frequency events. The oscilloscope does this by superimposing a
filtered foreground waveform over a glitch capture background waveform.
Table 2-21: FilterVuCommands
Command
Description
DISplay:GLITch
Controls the display of the glitch capture
waveform
DISplay:INTENSITy:GLITch
Sets the glitch intensity on the display
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-21
Command Groups
Table 2-21: FilterVuCommands (cont.)
Command
Description
FILTERVu:FREQuency
Sets or queries the FilterVu frequency
FILTERVu:FREQuency:AVAILable?
Returns a comma separated list of filter
frequencies available based on the current
instrument settings
For more information, refer to Appendix B: Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B
and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instruments. (See page B-1.)
Hard Copy Command Group
Use the commands in the Hard Copy Command Group to make hard copies.
Table 2-22: Hard Copy Commands
2-22
Command
Description
HARDCopy
Sends a copy of the screen display to the
selected printer
HARDCopy:INKSaver
Changes hard copy output to print color
traces and graticule on a white background
HARDCopy:PREVIEW
Previews the current screen contents with
the InkSaver palette applied
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Horizontal Command Group
Use the commands in the Horizontal Command Group to control the oscilloscope
time bases. You can set the time-per-division of the main time base. You can also
use the Horizontal commands to set the scale, horizontal position, and reference
of the time base.
Table 2-23: Horizontal Commands
Command
Description
HORizontal?
Returns settings for the horizontal commands
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?
Returns the record length
HORizontal:DELay:MODe
Sets or returns the horizontal delay mode
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe
Sets or returns the horizontal delay time
HORizontal:DIGital:RECOrdlength:MAIN?
Returns the record length of the main digital
acquisition
HORizontal:DIGital:SAMPLERate:MAIN?
Returns the sample rate of the main digital
acquisition
HORizontal:POSition
Sets or returns the horizontal position
HORizontal:PREViewstate?
Returns whether or not the acquisition
system is in the preview state
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
Sets the horizontal record length to the
number of data points in each frame
Or returns the current horizontal record
length
HORizontal:RESOlution
Sets or returns the horizontal record length
to the number of data points in each frame
HORizontal:SAMPLERate
Sets or returns the current horizontal sample
rate
HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the time base horizontal scale
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition
Sets the horizontal position when delay
mode is OFF
Mark Command Group
Use the commands in the Mark Command Group to identify areas of the acquired
waveform that warrant further investigation.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-23
Command Groups
Table 2-24: Mark Commands
2-24
Command
Description
MARK
Move to the next or previous mark on the
waveform or returns all learnable settings
from the mark commands
MARK:CREATE
Creates a mark on a particular waveform or
all waveforms in a column
MARK:DELEte
Deletes a mark on a particular waveform, all
waveforms in a column, or all marks
MARK:FREE?
Returns how many marks are free to be used
MARK:SELected:END?
Returns the end of the selected mark, in
terms of 0 to 100% of the waveform
MARK:SELected:FOCUS?
Returns the focus of the selected mark, in
terms of 0 to 100% of the waveform
MARK:SELected:MARKSINCOLumn?
Returns how many marks are in the current
zoom pixel column
MARK:SELected:OWNer?
Returns the owner of the selected mark
MARK:SELected:SOURCE?
Returns the source waveform of the selected
mark
MARK:SELected:STARt?
Returns the start of the selected mark, in
terms of 0 to 100% of the waveform
MARK:SELected:STATe?
Returns the on or off state of the selected
mark
MARK:SELected:ZOOm:POSition?
Returns the position of the selected mark, in
terms of 0 to 100% of the upper window
MARK:TOTal?
Returns how many marks are used
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Math Command Group
Use the commands in the Math Command Group to create and define a math
waveform. Use the available math functions to define your math waveform.
The math waveform you create depends on sources listed in the math expression.
If you change these sources, the math waveform you previously defined will be
affected.
Math expressions can be simple without any mathematical computations. For
example: CH1, which specifies that a waveform shows the signal source of
Channel 1.
The acquisition of a live waveform can stop for several reasons: You can turn
off the channel, stop the waveform, or stop the trigger. When you turn off the
channel, math continues and data is acquired but is not displayed. When you
stop either the waveform or the trigger, the math calculation stops, and the last
math calculation performed is displayed.
When a live waveform update or reference waveform is altered, math waveforms
containing those waveforms as sources are also updated to reflect the changes.
Remember that sources must exist, but do not need to be displayed, to be used in
and to update math waveforms.
Table 2-25: Math Commands
Command
Description
MATH[1]?
Returns the definition of the math waveform
MATH[1]:DEFine
Sets or returns the current math function as
a text string
MATH[1]:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or returns the math horizontal display
position for FFT or (non-live) math reference
waveforms
MATH[1]:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the math horizontal display
scale for FFT or for Dual Math waveforms
MATH[1]:HORizontal:UNIts
Returns the math waveform horizontal unit
value
MATH[1]:LABel
Sets or queries the waveform label for the
math waveform
MATH[1]:SPECTral:GATing:INDICators
Enables or disables the display of indicators
that show the portion of the source waveform
record used to compute the math FFT
waveform
MATH[1]:SPECTral:GATing:INDICators:
END?
Returns the ending point in the source
waveform record used for computing the FFT
MATH[1]:SPECTral:GATing:INDICators:
STARt?
Returns the starting point in the source
waveform record used for computing the FFT
MATH[1]:SPECTral:MAG
Sets or returns the units of spectral
magnification in the math string
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-25
Command Groups
Table 2-25: Math Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
MATH[1]:SPECTral:NYQUISTFreq?
Returns the Nyquist frequency of the FFT
math waveform
MATH[1]:SPECTral:WINdow
Sets or returns the window function for math
waveform spectral input data
MATH[1]:TYPe
Sets or returns the math waveform mode
type
MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition
Sets or returns the vertical position of the
currently selected math type
MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or returns the vertical scale of the
currently selected math type
MATH[1]:VERTical:UNIts?
Returns the math waveform vertical units
Measurement Command Group
Use the commands in the Measurement Command Group to control the automated
measurement system.
Up to four automated measurements can be displayed on the screen. In the
commands, these measurement readouts are named MEAS<x>, where <x> is the
measurement number.
In addition to the four displayed measurements, the measurement commands let
you specify an additional measurement, IMMed. The immediate measurement
has no front-panel equivalent. Immediate measurements are never displayed.
Because they are computed only when needed, immediate measurements slow the
waveform update rate less than displayed measurements.
Whether you use displayed or immediate measurements, use the VALue query to
obtain measurement results.
Measurement commands can set and query measurement parameters. You
can assign some parameters, such as waveform sources, differently for each
measurement. Other parameters, such as reference levels, have only one value,
which applies to all measurements.
Table 2-26: Measurement Commands
2-26
Command
Description
MEASUrement?
Returns all measurement parameters
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot
Removes the measurement snapshot display
MEASUrement:GATing
Sets or returns the measurement gating
MEASUrement:IMMed?
Returns all immediate measurement setup
parameters
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-26: Measurement Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
Returns information about the immediate
delay measurement
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIRection
Sets or returns the search direction to use for
immediate delay measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE<x>
Sets or returns the slope of the edge used for
immediate delay “from” and “to” waveform
measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce1
Sets or returns the “from” source for all single
channel immediate measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce2
Sets or returns the source to measure “to” for
phase or delay immediate measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
Sets or returns the type of the immediate
measurement
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
Returns the units of the immediate
measurement
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
Returns the value of the immediate
measurement
MEASUrement:INDICators?
Returns all measurement indicator
parameters
MEASUrement:INDICators:HORZ<x>?
Returns the position of the specified
horizontal measurement indicator
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMHORZ?
Returns the number of horizontal
measurement indicators currently being
displayed
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMVERT?
Returns the number of vertical measurement
indicators currently being displayed
MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE
Sets or returns the state of visible
measurement indicators
MEASUrement:INDICators:VERT<x>?
Returns the value of the specified vertical
measurement indicator
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
Returns all measurement parameters
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?
Returns the number of values accumulated
since the last statistical reset
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
Returns the delay measurement parameters
for the specified measurement
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIRection
Sets or returns the search direction to use for
delay measurements
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>
Sets or returns the slope of the edge to
use for delay “from” and “to” waveform
measurements
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?
Returns the maximum value found since the
last statistical reset
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-27
Command Groups
Table 2-26: Measurement Commands (cont.)
2-28
Command
Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?
Returns the mean value accumulated since
the last statistical reset
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?
Returns the minimum value found since the
last statistical reset
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
Sets or returns the channel from which
measurements are taken
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
Sets or returns the channel to which
measurements are sent
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE
Sets or returns whether the specified
measurement slot is computed and
displayed
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?
Returns the standard deviation of values
accumulated since the last statistical reset
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Sets or returns the measurement<x> type
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?
Returns measurement<x> units
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
Returns the value of measurement<x>
MEASUrement:METHod
Sets or returns the method used for
calculating reference levels
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
Returns the current reference level
parameters
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
Sets or returns the top reference level for
rise time
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
Sets or returns the low reference level for
rise time
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID
Sets or returns the mid reference level for
measurements
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
Sets or returns the mid reference level for
delay "to" measurements
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Sets or returns the method for assigning high
and low reference levels
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
Sets or returns the top reference percent
level for rise time
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
Sets or returns the low reference percent
level for rise time
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID
Sets or returns the mid reference percent
level for waveform measurements
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
Sets or returns the mid reference percent
level for second waveform measurements
MEASUrement:SNAPShot
Displays the measurement snapshot list
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>
Sets or returns the source for the current
single channel measurement
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-26: Measurement Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>
Sets or returns the source for the specified
measurement.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID<x>
Sets or returns the mid reference level for
the specified channel in absolute volts
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x>
Sets or returns the mid reference level for
the specified channel in percent
Miscellaneous Command Group
Use the commands in the Miscellaneous Command Group to perform actions that
do not fit into other categories.
Several commands and queries are common to all 488.2-1987 devices. The
488.2-1987 standard defines these commands. The common commands begin
with an asterisk (*) character.
Table 2-27: Miscellaneous Commands
Command
Description
AUTOSet
Sets the vertical, horizontal and trigger
controls to provide a stable display of the
selected waveform
CLEARMenu
Clears the current menu from the display
DATE
Sets or returns the date displayed by the
oscilloscope
*DDT
Sets or returns the commands that will be
executed by the group execute trigger
FPAnel:PRESS
Simulates the action of pressing a specified
front-panel button
FPAnel:TURN
Duplicates the action of turning a specified
front-panel control knob
GPIBUsb:ID?
Returns the identification string of the
connected adaptor module and firmware
version
HEADer
Sets or returns the Response Header Enable
State
ID?
Returns identifying information about the
oscilloscope and its firmware
*IDN?
Returns the same information as the ID?
command except the data is formatted
according to Tektronix Codes & Formats
LANGuage
Sets or returns the user interface display
language
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-29
Command Groups
Table 2-27: Miscellaneous Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
LOCk
Sets or returns the front panel lock state
*LRN?
Returns a listing of oscilloscope settings
MESSage
Sets or queries message parameters
NEWpass
Changes the password for user protected
data
PASSWord
Enables the *PUD and NEWpass set
commands
REM
Specifies a comment, which is ignored by
the oscilloscope
SET?
Returns a listing of oscilloscope settings
TEKSecure
Initializes both waveform and setup
memories
TIME
Sets or returns the time displayed by the
oscilloscope
TOTaluptime?
Returns the total number of hours that the
oscilloscope has been turned on since the
nonvolatile memory was last programmed
*TRG
Performs the group execute trigger (GET)
*TST?
Tests the interface and returns the status
UNLock
Unlocks front panel
USBTMC
Returns the USBTMC information
USBTMC:PRODUCTID:DECimal?
Returns the product ID in decimal format
USBTMC:PRODUCTID:HEXadecimal?
Returns the product ID in hexadecimal format
USBTMC:SERIALnumber?
Returns the instrument serial number
USBTMC:VENDORID:DECimal?
Returns the vendor ID in decimal format
USBTMC:VENDORID:HEXadecimal?
Returns the vendor ID in hexadecimal format
VERBose
Sets or returns the verbose state
PictBridge Command Group
Use the commands in the PictBridge to store the printer settings.
Table 2-28: PictBridge Commands
2-30
Command
Description
PICTBridge:DATEPrint
Enables or disables printing the date on the
print output
PICTBridge:DEFault
Sets the arguments for all PictBridge
commands to their default values
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-28: PictBridge Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
PICTBridge:IDPrint
Enables or disables printing the oscilloscope
model and serial number on the print output
PICTBridge:IMAGESize
Sets or returns the image print size
PICTBridge:PAPERSize
Sets the output print paper size
PICTBridge:PAPERType
Sets or returns the paper type
PICTBridge:PRINTQual
Sets or returns the output print quality
USBDevice:CONFigure
Enables or disables the rear USB port for
use with Pictbridge printers
Save and Recall Command Group
Use the commands in the Save and Recall Command Group to store and retrieve
internal waveforms and settings. When you save a setup, you save all the settings
of the oscilloscope. When you recall a setup, the oscilloscope restores itself to the
state it was in when you originally saved the setting.
Table 2-29: Save and Recall Commands
Command
Description
FACtory
Resets the oscilloscope to factory default
settings
*RCL
Recalls saved oscilloscope settings
RECAll:SETUp
Recalls saved oscilloscope settings
RECAll:WAVEform
Recalls a stored waveform to a reference
location
REF<x>:SCAle
Sets or returns the vertical scale for the
channel specified by <x>, where x is the
reference channel number
*SAV
Stores the state of the oscilloscope to a
specified memory location
SAVe:ASSIgn:TYPe
Sets or returns the assignment of the data
to be saved
SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS<x>
Saves event table data from bus<x> to a
specified file and location
SAVe:IMAGe
Saves a capture of the screen image into the
specified file
SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat
Sets or returns the file format to use for
saving screen images when the file type
cannot be determined from the given file
name or when screen images are captured
by using the front panel
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-31
Command Groups
Table 2-29: Save and Recall Commands (cont.)
2-32
Command
Description
SAVe:IMAGe:LAYout
Sets or returns the layout to use for saved
screen images
SAVe:SETUp
Saves the state of the oscilloscope to a
specified memory location or file
SAVe:WAVEform
Saves a waveform to one of four reference
memory locations or a file
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
Sets or returns the format for saved
waveforms
SAVe:WAVEform:GATIng
Specifies whether save waveform operations
should save the entire waveform or a
specified portion of the waveform
SAVe:WAVEform:SPREADSheet:
RESOlution
Specifies whether to save the full (LRL) or
reduced (thumb) resolution waveform to a
CSV file.
SETUP<x>:DATE?
Returns the date when the specified
oscilloscope setup was saved
SETUP<x>:LABEL
Sets or returns the specified oscilloscope
setup label
SETUP<x>:TIME?
Returns the time when the specified
oscilloscope setup was saved
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Search Command Group
Use the commands in the Search Commands Group to seek out information in
waveform records.
Search Commands
Command
Description
SEARCH?
Returns all search-related settings
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy
Copies the search criteria to the trigger, or
the trigger criteria to the search.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:STATE
Sets the search state to on or off
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL?
Returns the total number of matches for
search <x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN:CONDition
Sets or returns the search condition for CAN
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
Sets or returns the CAN search condition to
be valid on a READ, WRITE or either
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
in bytes to be used for CAN search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be
used for CAN search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
Sets or returns the CAN Frame Type to be
used
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe
Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode to
standard or extended format
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue
Sets or returns the binary address string to
be used for CAN search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:CONDition
Sets or returns the search condition for a LIN
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue
Sets or returns the binary data string
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
in bytes
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string used
for a LIN search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE
Sets or returns the error type used for a LIN
Search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
Sets or returns the binary address string
used for LIN search
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-33
Command Groups
Search Commands (cont.)
2-34
Command
Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
Sets or returns the I2C address mode to 7
or 10-bit
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
Sets or returns the I2C address type to I2C
special addresses
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
Sets or returns the binary address string to
be used for I2C search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:CONDition
Sets or returns the search condition for I2C
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
Sets or returns the I2C search condition to
be valid on a READ, WRITE or either
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
in bytes to be used for I2C search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be
used for I2C search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:PARallel:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be
used for a parallel trigger search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:RS232C:CONDition
Sets or returns the trigger condition for a
RS232 trigger
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
for a RS232 trigger, if the trigger condition
is RX
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string for a
RS232 trigger, if the condition involves RX
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
to be used for a RS232 Trigger, if the Trigger
condition is TX
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be
used for a RS232 trigger, if the condition
involves RX
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:SPI:CONDition
Sets or returns the search condition for SPI
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MISO|:IN}:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be
used for SPI search if the search condition is
MISO or MISOMOSI.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string for an
SPI search if the search condition is MISO or
MISOMOSI
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
in bytes to be used for SPI search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SOUrce
Sets or returns the bus for a serial search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:
SLOpe
Sets or returns the slope for an edge search
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Search Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:
SOUrce
Sets or returns the source waveform for an
edge search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel
Sets or returns the level for an edge search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
CH<x>
Sets or returns the level for an edge search
of the specified channel
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
MATH
Sets or returns the math waveform level for
edge search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
REF<x>
Sets or returns the reference waveform level
for edge search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
FUNCtion
Sets or returns the logic operator for the logic
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:CH<x>
Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for
the logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets or returns whether the clock edge is rise
or fall for a logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns the clock source definition for
logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:MATH
Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for
the logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:REF<x>
Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for
the logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:INPut:CH<x>
Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for
the logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:D<x>
Sets or returns the waveform logic criteria for
a trigger search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:INPut:MATH
Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for
the logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:INPut:D<x>
Sets or returns the logic criteria for a logic
pattern search to determine where to place
a mark
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:INPut:REF<x>
Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for
the logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:WHEn
Sets or returns the condition for generating a
logic pattern search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
Sets or returns the maximum time that the
selected pattern may be true
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
Sets or returns the minimum time that the
selected pattern may be true
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the channel threshold level
for an logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:MATH
Sets or returns the math waveform threshold
level for logic search
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-35
Command Groups
Search Commands (cont.)
2-36
Command
Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:REF<x>
Sets or returns the reference waveform
threshold level for logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the lower waveform threshold
level for all channel waveform searches
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:MATH
Sets or returns the lower waveform threshold
level for all math waveform searches
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:REF<x>
Sets or returns the lower waveform threshold
level for all reference waveform searches
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity for a pulse search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source waveform for a
pulse search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:WHEn
Sets or returns the condition for generating
a pulse width search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:WIDth
Sets or returns the pulse width setting for a
pulse width search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity setting for a runt
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
SOUrce
Sets or returns the source setting for a runt
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
WHEn
Sets or returns the condition setting for a runt
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
WIDth
Sets or returns the width setting for a runt
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets or returns the clock slope setting for a
setup/hold search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns the clock source setting for
an setup/hold search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
Sets or returns the clock threshold setting for
an setup/hold search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
Sets or returns the data source setting for
an setup/hold search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:DATa:THReshold
Sets or returns the data threshold setting for
an setup/hold search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:THReshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the trigger search setup and
hold lower threshold to determine where to
place a mark. Ch<x> is the channel number
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:THReshold{:MATH|:MATH1}
Sets or returns the trigger search setup and
hold lower threshold to determine where to
place a mark
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Search Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:THReshold:REF<x>
Sets or returns the trigger search setup and
hold lower threshold to determine where
to place a mark. Ref<x> is the reference
waveform number
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:HOLDTime
Sets or returns the hold time setting for an
setup/hold search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:SETTime
Sets or returns the setup time setting for an
setup/hold search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:
TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime
Sets or returns the transition time setting for
an transition search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:
TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity setting for an
transition search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:
TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source setting for an
transition search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:
TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn
Sets or returns the condition setting for an
transition search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe
Sets or returns the trigger type setting for a
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the waveform upper threshold
level for all channel waveform searches
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
UPPerthreshold:MATH
Sets or returns the waveform upper threshold
level for all math waveform searches
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
UPPerthreshold:REF<x>
Sets or returns the waveform upper threshold
level for all reference waveform searches
Status and Error Command Group
Use the commands in the Status and Error Command Group to determine the
status of the oscilloscope and control events.
Several commands and queries used with the oscilloscope are common to all
IEEE488.2 compliant devices. The IEEE Std 488.2-1987 defines these commands
and queries. The common commands begin with an asterisk (*) character.
Table 2-30: Status and Error Commands
Command
Description
ALLEv?
Returns all events and their messages
BUSY?
Returns oscilloscope status
*CLS
Clears status
DESE
Sets or returns the bits in the Device Event
Status Enable Register
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-37
Command Groups
Table 2-30: Status and Error Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
*ESE
Sets or returns the bits in the Event Status
Enable Register
*ESR?
Returns the contents of the Standard Event
Status Register
EVENT?
Returns event code from the event queue
EVMsg?
Returns event code, message from the event
queue
EVQty?
Return number of events in the event queue
*OPC
Generates the operation complete message
in the standard event status register when all
pending operations are finished
Or returns "1" when all current operations
are finished
*PSC
Sets or returns the power on status flag
*PUD
Sets or returns a string of protected user data
*RST
Resets the oscilloscope to factory default
settings
*SRE
Sets or returns the bits in the Service
Request Enable Register
*STB?
Returns the contents of the Status Byte
Register
*WAI
Prevents the oscilloscope from executing
further commands until all pending
operations finish
Trigger Command Group
Use the commands in the Trigger Command Group to control all aspects of
triggering for the oscilloscope. There is one trigger: A. You can perform edge,
pulse width, logic, video, runt, transition (rise/fall time), setup & hold and bus
triggering using the A trigger.
Example command sequences that show different triggers and searches are
available. (See page E-1, Search and Trigger Command Sequence Examples.).
Edge Trigger
Edge triggering lets you display a waveform at or near the point where the signal
passes through a voltage level of your choosing.
To set up an edge trigger, set the A trigger type to EDGe using the command
TRIGger:A:TYPe. Then use the commands TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling,
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe, and TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce You can
2-38
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
set the threshold voltage levels using TRIGger:A:LEVel:AUXin,
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>, or TRIGger:A:LEVel:D<x>.
Logic Trigger
Logic triggering lets you logically combine the signals on one or more channels;
the oscilloscope then triggers when it detects a certain combination of signal
levels (set using one of the TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut commands as well as
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion).
To set up a logic trigger, first set the trigger type to LOGIc using the command
TRIGger:A:TYPe, and then use the command TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss to
select LOGIC.
You can perform logic triggering using a clock (by setting TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce to one of the channels), so that the oscilloscope triggers
when the specified logical combination of data channels is true during a
transition on the clock channel. The specified data sources cannot include the
waveform specified as the clock source. (Use TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:D<x>, etc.)
You can also perform logic triggering without using a clock (by
setting TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce to NONE), so that the
oscilloscope triggers when the specified logical pattern of data channels
is met. (Use the commands TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn and
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:DELTatime.)
Setup and Hold Trigger
A setup and hold trigger occurs when a logic data input changes state inside of the
setup or hold time relative to a clock edge.
To set up a setup/hold trigger, first set the trigger type to LOGIc using the command
TRIGger:A:TYPe, and then use the command TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
to select SETHold. Then use TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce,
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
and related commands.
Pulse width Trigger
A pulse width trigger occurs whenever the oscilloscope detects a pulse that is less
than, greater than, equal to, or not equal to a specified time. Additionally, it can
occur when the pulse width is within, or outside of a specified range. You can
trigger on either positive or negative pulses.
To set up a pulse width trigger, first set the trigger type to PULSe using
the command TRIGger:A:TYPe. Then select WIDth using the command
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss. Then use TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce,
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn, TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth and related
commands. You can set the threshold voltage levels using TRIGger:A:LEVel:
AUXin, TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>, or TRIGger:A:LEVel:D<x>.
Runt Trigger
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-39
Command Groups
Runt triggering lets you trigger on a pulse amplitude that crosses one threshold
but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first.
To set up a runt trigger, first set the trigger type to PULSe using the
command TRIGger:A:TYPe. Then select RUNt using the command
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss. Then use TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce,
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth, TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn, TRIGger:A:
UPPerthreshold:CH<x> and related commands. You can set the threshold
voltage levels using TRIGger:A:LEVel:AUXin, TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>, or
TRIGger:A:LEVel:D<x>.
Transition Trigger
Transition triggering (also called rise/fall time, and once known as slew rate)
causes a trigger on pulse edges that traverse between two thresholds at a rate faster
than or slower than the specified time.
To set up a transition trigger, first set the trigger type to PULSe using the command
TRIGger:A:TYPe. Then select TRANsition using the command TRIGger:
A:PULse:CLAss. Then use TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce,
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime and related commands.
You can set the threshold voltage levels using TRIGger:A:LEVel:AUXin,
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>, or TRIGger:A:LEVel:D<x>.
Bus Trigger
Bus triggering can be performed if you have one or more appropriate application
modules installed (see below for application module list).
To set up a bus trigger, set the A trigger type to BUS using the command
TRIGger:A:TYPe. Specify which bus (1-4) to trigger on using
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce. Set the bus type (i.e., parallel, I2C, etc. using the
command TRIGger:A:BUS. Then set the appropriate trigger criteria according to
bus type (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition, etc.)
Video Trigger
To set up a video trigger, set the A trigger type to VIDeo using the
command TRIGger:A:TYPe. Then use TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce,
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard,, and related commands.
Serial bus application
modules
A table is available that lists all commands enabled by each application module
(See page D-1, Application Module-enabled Commands.)
For I2C or SPI buses, install the DPO2EMBD application module.
For RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, or UART buses, install the DPO2COMP
module.
For CAN or LIN buses, install the DPO2AUTO module.
2-40
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-31: Trigger Commands
Command
Description
TRIGger
Forces a trigger event to
occur
TRIGger:FREQuency?
Returns the available trigger
frequency in hertz.
TRIGger:A
Sets A trigger level to 50%
or returns current A trigger
parameters
TRIGger:A:BUS
Sets or returns the serial
trigger type
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
Sets or returns the CAN
condition
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
Sets or returns the CAN
trigger condition to be valid
on a READ, WRITE, or either
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
Sets or returns the CAN data
qualifier
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of
the data string in bytes to be
used for CAN trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary
data string to be used for
CAN trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
Sets or returns the CAN
trigger frame type
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe
Sets or returns the CAN
addressing mode
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue
Sets or returns the binary
address string used for the
CAN trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition
Sets or returns the trigger
condition for LIN
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue
Sets or returns the binary
data string to be used for LIN
trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
Sets or returns the LIN data
qualifier
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of
the data string in bytes to be
used for LIN trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary
data string
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE
Sets or returns the error type
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-41
Command Groups
Table 2-31: Trigger Commands (cont.)
2-42
Command
Description
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
Sets or returns the binary
address string used for LIN
trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
Sets or returns the I2C
address mode to 7 or 10-bit
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
Sets or returns the I2C
address type to USER
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
Sets or returns the binary
address string used for the
I2C trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
Sets or returns the trigger
condition for I2C trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
Sets or returns the I2C
trigger condition valid on a
READ, WRITE, or either
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of
the data string in bytes to be
used for I2C trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary
data string used for I2C
triggering
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:VALue
Sets or returns the binary
data string to be used for a
parallel trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition
Sets or returns the condition
for a RS232C trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of
the data string in Bytes for a
RX RS232 Trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary
data string for a RX RS232
trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length
of the data string for a TX
RS232 trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary
data string for a RS232
trigger if the trigger condition
involves TX
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition
Sets or returns the trigger
condition for SPI triggering
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:IN|:MISO}:VALue
Sets or returns the binary
data string to be used for SPI
trigger
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-31: Trigger Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:MOSI}:VALue
Sets or returns the binary
data string used for the SPI
trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of
the data string in bytes to be
used for SPI trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source
for a bus trigger
TRIGger:A:EDGE?
Returns the source, coupling
and source for the A edge
trigger
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
Sets or returns the type
of coupling for the A edge
trigger
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
Sets or returns the slope for
the A edge trigger
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source
for the A edge trigger
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?
Returns the A trigger holdoff
parameters
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
Sets or returns the A trigger
holdoff time
TRIGger:A:LEVel
Sets or returns the trigger
level for the A trigger
TRIGger:A:LEVel:AUXin
Sets or returns the trigger
level for the AUXIN port
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>
Specifies or returns the
trigger level for the specified
trigger channel
TRIGger:A:LEVel:D<x>
Sets or returns the trigger
level for the specified digital
channel <x>, where x is the
channel number
TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
Returns all A trigger logic
settings
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
Sets or returns the type of A
trigger logic
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
Sets or returns the logical
combination of the input
channels for the A logic
trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
Returns the logic input
values for all channels
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-43
Command Groups
Table 2-31: Trigger Commands (cont.)
2-44
Command
Description
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
Specifies or returns the
logic setting for the specified
channel
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:D<x>
Sets or returns the logic
pattern for a trigger on digital
channel <x>, where x is the
channel number
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets the polarity of the clock
channel.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns the channel
to use as the clock source
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?
Returns the conditions for
generating an A logic pattern
trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:DELTatime
Sets or returns the pattern
trigger delta time value
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:D<x>
Sets or returns the A logic
trigger input for the specified
digital channel <x>, where x
is the channel number.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
Sets or returns the pattern
logic condition on which to
trigger the oscilloscope
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
Sets or returns the maximum
time that the selected pattern
may be true and still generate
an A logic pattern trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
Sets or returns the minimum
time that the selected pattern
may be true and still generate
an A logic pattern trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:(CH<x>|D<x>)
Sets or queries the logic
trigger threshold voltage for
the specified channel
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the lower
threshold for the channel
selected
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold{:EXT|:AUX}
Sets or returns the lower
threshold for the Auxiliary
input.
TRIGger:A:MODe
Sets or returns the A trigger
mode
TRIGger:A:PULse?
Returns the A pulse trigger
parameters
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-31: Trigger Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
Sets or returns the type of
pulse on which to trigger
TRIGger:A:PULSEWIDth?
Returns the trigger A pulse
width parameters
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity
for the A pulse width trigger
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source
for the pulse width trigger
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
Sets or returns the criteria for
width specification of pulse
width trigger events
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
Sets or returns the width
setting for the pulse width
trigger
TRIGger:A:RUNT?
Returns the current A
runt pulse trigger logic
parameters
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity
for the A pulse runt trigger
TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source
for the A pulse trigger
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
Sets or returns the type
of pulse width the trigger
checks for when it uncovers
a runt
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth
Sets or returns the minimum
width for A pulse runt trigger
TRIGger:A:SETHold?
Returns settings for setup
and hold violation triggering
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk?
Returns clock edge polarity,
voltage threshold and source
input for setup/hold triggering
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets or returns the clock
edge polarity for setup and
hold triggering
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns the clock
source for the A logic trigger
setup and hold input
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
Sets or returns the clock
voltage threshold for setup
and hold trigger
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-45
Command Groups
Table 2-31: Trigger Commands (cont.)
2-46
Command
Description
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa?
Returns the voltage
threshold and data source
for the setup/hold trigger
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
Sets or returns the data
source for the setup and hold
trigger
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
Sets or returns the data
voltage threshold for setup
and hold trigger
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime
Sets or returns the hold
time for the setup and hold
violation triggering
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime
Sets or returns the setup
time for setup and hold
violation triggering
TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:CH<x>
Sets or queries the threshold
for the channel
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets the upper threshold for
the channel selected
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}?
Returns the delta time,
polarity, and both upper and
lower threshold limits for the
transition time trigger
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime
Sets or returns the delta
time used in calculating the
transition value
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity
for the A pulse transition
trigger
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source
for transition trigger
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn
Sets or returns the
relationship of delta time
to transitioning signal
TRIGger:A:TYPe
Sets or returns the type of A
trigger
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?
Returns the video
parameters for the A trigger
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLDoff:FIELD
Sets or returns the video
trigger holdoff
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE
Sets or returns the video
line number on which the
oscilloscope triggers
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-31: Trigger Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity of
the A video trigger
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce
Sets or returns the polarity of
the video trigger
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard
Sets or returns the video
standard
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}
Sets or returns the video
field trigger
TRIGger:EXTernal?
Returns external trigger
parameters
TRIGger:EXTernal:PRObe
Sets or returns the
attenuation factor value of
the external probe connector
TRIGger:EXTernal:YUNIts?
Returns the external trigger
vertical (Y) units value
TRIGger:STATE?
Returns the current state of
the triggering system
Vertical Command Group
Use the commands in the Vertical Command Group to control the vertical setup of
all live (channel) waveforms for acquisition and to display of channel, reference,
and math waveforms.
Table 2-32: Vertical Commands
Command
Description
AUXin?
Returns auxiliary input parameters
AUXin:PRObe
Returns all information concerning the probe
attached to auxiliary input
AUXin:PRObe:AUTOZero
Sets the TekVPI probe attached to the
auxiliary input to autozero
AUXin:PRObe:COMMAND
Sets the state of the specified probe control
AUXin:PRObe:DEGAUss
Starts a degauss/autozero cycle on a TekVPI
current probe attached to the auxiliary input
AUXin:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE?
Returns the degauss state of the TekVPI
current probe attached to the auxiliary input
AUXin:PRObe:FORCEDRange
Sets or returns the range of the TekVPI probe
attached to the auxiliary input
AUXin:PRObe:GAIN
Sets or returns the gain factor of the probe
that is attached to the auxiliary input
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-47
Command Groups
Table 2-32: Vertical Commands (cont.)
2-48
Command
Description
AUXin:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
Returns the serial number of the probe that
is attached to the auxiliary input
AUXin:PRObe:ID:TYPE?
Returns the type of probe that is attached to
the auxiliary input
AUXin:PRObe:RESistance?
Returns the resistance of the probe that is
attached to the Auxiliary input
AUXin:PRObe:SIGnal
Sets or returns the input bypass setting on
VPI probes that support input bypass
AUXin:PRObe:UNIts?
Returns the units of measure of the probe
that is attached to the auxiliary input
CH<x>?
Returns vertical parameters for the specified
channel
CH<x>:BANdwidth
Sets or returns the bandwidth of the specified
channel
CH<x>:COUPling
Sets or returns the coupling setting for the
specified channel
CH<x>:DESKew
Sets or returns the deskew time for the
specified channel
CH<x>:IMPedance
Sets or returns channel <x> input impedance
CH<x>:INVert
Sets or returns the invert function for the
specified channel
CH<x>:LABel
Sets or returns the waveform label for
channel <x>
CH<x>:OFFSet
Sets or returns the channel offset
CH<x>:POSition
Sets or returns the channel vertical position
CH<x>:PRObe?
Returns the gain, resistance, units, and ID
of the probe that is attached to the specified
channel
CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero
Sets the TekVPI probe attached to the
specified channel input to autozero
CH<x>:PRObe:COMMAND
Sets the state of the specified probe control
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss
Starts a degauss/autozero cycle on a TekVPI
current probe attached to the specified
channel input
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE?
Returns the state of the probe degauss
CH<x>:PRObe:FORCEDRange
Sets or returns the range on a TekVPI probe
attached to the specified channel
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN
Sets or returns the gain factor of the probe
that is attached to the specified channel
CH<x>:PRObe:ID?
Returns the type and serial number of
the probe that is attached to the specified
channel
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-32: Vertical Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
Returns the serial number of the probe that
is attached to the specified channel
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPE?
Returns the type of probe that is attached to
the specified channel
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?
Returns the resistance of the probe that is
attached to the specified channel
CH<x>:PRObe:SIGnal
Sets or returns the input bypass setting of
channel <x>TekVPI probe
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?
Returns the units of measure of the probe
that is attached to the specified channel
CH<x>:SCAle
Sets or returns the vertical scale of the
specified channel
CH<x>:TERmination
Sets or returns channel input termination
CH<x>:VOLts
Sets or returns the vertical sensitivity for
channel <x>
CH<x>:YUNits
Sets or returns the units for the specified
channel to a custom string
REF<x>?
Returns reference waveform data for channel
<x>
REF<x>:DATE?
Returns the date that a reference waveform
was stored
REF<x>:HORizontal:DELay:TIMe
Sets or returns the horizontal position of the
specified reference waveform in percent of
the waveform that is displayed to the right of
the center vertical graticule
REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the horizontal scale for a
reference waveform
REF<x>:LABel
Sets or returns the specified reference
waveform label
REF<x>:POSition
Sets or returns the vertical position for
channel <x>, where x is the reference
channel number
REF<x>:TIMe?
Returns the time that a reference waveform
was stored
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
Sets or returns the vertical position of the
specified reference waveform
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or returns the reference waveform
vertical scale in vertical units/div
SELect
Returns information on which waveforms are
on or off and which waveform is selected.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-49
Command Groups
Table 2-32: Vertical Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
SELect:BUS<x>
Turns on or off the specified bus waveform
or returns whether the specified bus channel
is on or off
SELect:CH<x>
Turns on or off the specified waveform or
returns whether the specified channel is on
or off
SELect:D<x>
Turns on the display of the digital channel
<x> and resets the acquisition. <x > is the
channel number
SELect:CONTROl
Sets or returns the waveform that is selected
as the implied recipient of channel-related
commands
SELect:MATH[1]
Turns on or off the math waveform or returns
whether the math waveform is on or off
SELect:REF<x>
Turns on or off the specified reference
waveform or returns whether the specified
reference waveform is on or off
Waveform Transfer Command Group
Use the commands in the Waveform Transfer Command Group to transfer
waveform data points to and from the oscilloscope. Waveform data points are a
collection of values that define a waveform. One data value usually represents
one data point in the waveform record. When working with envelope waveforms,
each data value is either the minimum or maximum of a min/max pair.
2-50
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
NOTE. The source waveform (as specified by the DATa:SOUrce) must be turned
on for the following queries to return a response:
CURVe?
DATa:COMPosition:AVAILable?
WAVFrm?
WFMOutpre:RECOrdlength?
WFMOutpre:FILTERFreq?
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
WFMOutpre:PT_ORder?
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
WFMOutpre:XINcr?
WFMOutpre:XZEro?
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?
WFMOutpre:YOFf?
WFMOutpre:YZEro?
Before you transfer waveform data, you must specify the data format,
composition, resolution, record length, and waveform source or destination. For
more information on the waveform transfer features which are unique to the
MSO/DPO2000B and MSO/DPO2000 series, refer to Appendix B: Waveform
Data in MSO/DPO2000B and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instructions.(See page B-1.)
Data Formats
All data points for DPO models are signed integer format only. Valid data widths
for CH1–CH4, MATH, and REF1, REF2 are 1 and 2-byte widths. The valid data
widths for the digital collection (MSO models) is either 4 or 8-byte widths.
The oscilloscope can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or binary format.
You specify the format with the DATa:ENCdg command.
ASCII Data. ASCII data is represented by signed integer values. The range of the
values depends on the byte width specified. One byte wide data ranges from -128
to 127. Two byte wide data ranges from -32768 to 32767.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-51
Command Groups
Each data value requires two to seven characters. This includes one to five
characters to represent the value, another character, if the value is negative, to
represent a minus sign, and a comma to separate the data points.
An example ASCII waveform data string may look like this:
CURVE<space>-110,-109,-110,-110,-109,-107,-109,-107,-106,
-105,-103,-100,-97,-90,-84,-80
NOTE. You can use ASCII to obtain a readable and easier to format output than
binary. However, the oscilloscope may require bytes to send the same values with
ASCII than with binary, reducing transmission speed.
The use of ASCII for waveform data transfer is inefficient. ASCII-formatted
Waveform (WAVFRM?) and Curve (CURVE?) queries, exceeding 1 M points,
are not supported.
Binary Data. Binary data is represented by signed integer or positive integer
values. The range of the values depends on the byte width specified. When the
byte width is one, signed integer data ranges from -128 to 127, and positive
integer values range from 0 to 255. When the byte width is two, the values range
from -32768 to 32767. and positive integer values range from 0 to 65,535.
Table 2-33: Binary data ranges
Byte width
Signed integer range
Positive integer range
1
-128 to 127
0 to 255
2
32,768 to 32,767
0 to 65,535
The defined binary formats also specify the order in which the bytes are
transferred. The four binary formats are RIBinary, RPBinary, SRIbinary, and
SRPbinary.
RIBinary is signed integer where the most significant byte is transferred first, and
RPBinary is positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred first.
SRIbinary and SRPbinary correspond to RIBinary and RPBinary respectively but
use a swapped byte order where the least significant byte is transferred first. The
byte order is ignored when DATa:WIDth is set to 1.
Waveform Data and Record
Lengths
You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record. You can transfer a
portion of the waveform or you can transfer the entire record. You can use the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands to specify the first and last data points
of the waveform record.
When transferring data into the oscilloscope, you must first specify the record
length of the destination waveform record. You do this with the WFMInpre:NR_Pt
2-52
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
command. Next, specify the first data point within the waveform record. For
example, when you set DATa:STARt to 1, data points will be stored starting
with the first point in the record. The oscilloscope will ignore the value set by
DATa:STOP when reading in data. It will stop reading data when there is no data
to read or when it has reached the specified record length.
When transferring data from the oscilloscope, you must specify the first and last
data points in the waveform record. Setting DATa:STARt to 1 and DATa:STOP to
the record length will always return the entire waveform.
Waveform Data Locations
and Memory Allocation
Waveform Preamble
Scaling Waveform Data
Transferring Waveform
Data from the Oscilloscope
The DATa:SOUrce command specifies the waveform source when transferring a
waveform from the oscilloscope. You can only transfer one waveform at a time.
Waveforms sent to the oscilloscope are always stored in one of the reference
memory locations. Use the DATa:DESTination command to specify a reference
memory location.
Each waveform you transfer has an associated waveform preamble, which
contains information such as horizontal scale, vertical scale, and the other settings
in effect when the waveform was created. Refer to the individual WFMInpre and
WFMOutpre commands for information.
Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller, you can convert the data
points into voltage values for analysis using information from the waveform
preamble.
You can transfer waveforms from the oscilloscope to an external controller using
the following sequence:
1. Select the waveform source(s) using DATa:SOUrce.
2. Specify the waveform data format using DATa:ENCdg.
3. Specify the number of bytes per data point using WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr.
4. Specify the portion of the waveform that you want to transfer using
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.
5. Transfer waveform preamble information using the WFMOutpre? query.
6. Transfer waveform data from the oscilloscope using the CURVe? query.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-53
Command Groups
Transferring Waveform
Data to the Oscilloscope
You can transfer waveforms to the oscilloscope from an external controller using
the following sequence:
1. Specify the reference waveform using DATa:DESTination.
2. Specify the record length of the reference waveform using WFMPre:NR_Pt.
3. Specify the waveform data format using WFMInpre:ENCdg.
4. Specify the number of bytes per data point using WFMInpre:BYT_Nr.
5. Specify first data point in the waveform record using DATa:STARt.
6. Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMInpre.
7. Transfer waveform data to the oscilloscope using CURVe.
Table 2-34: Waveform Transfer Commands
2-54
Command
Description
CURVe
The command format transfers waveform
data to the oscilloscope (reference waveform
specified by DATa:DESTination)
The query format transfers waveform
data from oscilloscope specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command
DATa
Sets the format and location of the waveform
data that is transferred with the CURVe
Command
Or returns the format and location of the
waveform data that is transferred with the
CURVe? command
DATa:COMPosition
Sets or returns the type of data that the
CURVe? query returns
DATa:COMPosition:AVAILable?
Lists the waveform data types that are
available for return from the instrument under
the current instrument settings
DATa:DESTination
Sets or returns the reference waveform
for storing waveform data sent to the
oscilloscope
DATa:ENCdg
Sets or returns the format of outgoing
waveform data
DATa:RESOlution
Sets or returns whether the CURVE query
returns full resolution records (acquired
data) or reduced resolution records
(filtered/displayed data).
DATa:SOUrce
Sets or returns the location of waveform data
transferred from the oscilloscope
DATa:STARt
Sets or returns the starting point in waveform
transfer
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-34: Waveform Transfer Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
DATa:STOP
Sets or returns the ending data point in
waveform transfer
WAVFrm?
Returns a branch query containing waveform
data in either binary or ASCII format,
waveform formatting data, and the location of
the waveform data source
WFMInpre?
Returns the waveform formatting specification
to be applied to the next incoming CURVE
command data
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr
Sets or returns the number of bits per binary
waveform point for the incoming waveform
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt
Sets or returns the format of binary data for
the incoming waveform
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr
Sets or returns the data width for the
incoming waveform
WFMInpre:BYT_Or
Sets or returns the byte order of waveform
points for the incoming waveform
WFMInpre:COMPosition
Sets and queries the type of waveform data
to be transferred to the instrument with the
CURVe? command.
WFMInpre:FILTERFreq
Sets or returns the byte order of waveform
points for the outgoing waveform
WFMInpre:ENCdg
Sets or returns the type of encoding for
incoming waveform data
WFMInpre:NR_Pt
Sets or returns the number of points in the
incoming waveform record
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt
Sets or returns the point format of incoming
waveform data
WFMInpre:PT_Off
This query always returns a 0
WFMInpre:XINcr
Sets or returns the horizontal sampling
interval between incoming waveform points
WFMInpre:XUNit
Sets or returns the horizontal units of the
incoming waveform
WFMInpre:XZEro
Sets or returns the time of the first point in
the incoming waveform
WFMInpre:YMUlt
Sets or returns the vertical scale factor, per
digitizing level, of the incoming waveform
points
WFMInpre:YOFf
Sets or returns the vertical position of the
incoming waveform in digitizing levels
WFMInpre:YUNit
Sets or returns the vertical units of the
incoming waveform
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-55
Command Groups
Table 2-34: Waveform Transfer Commands (cont.)
2-56
Command
Description
WFMInpre:YZEro
Sets or returns the vertical offset of the
incoming waveform
WFMOutpre?
Returns the waveform formatting data for
the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce
command
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
Sets or returns which byte of binary waveform
data is transmitted first, during a waveform
data transfer, when data points require more
than one byte.
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
Sets or returns the number of bits per
waveform point that outgoing waveforms
contain
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
Sets or returns the format of binary data for
the outgoing waveform
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
Sets or returns the data width for the outgoing
waveform
WFMOutpre:COMPosition
Controls or indicates the type of data used by
the CURVe? query.
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Sets or returns the type of encoding for
outgoing waveforms
WFMOutpre:FILTERFreq?
Specifies or returns the FilterVu low pass
filter frequency, which was applied to the
waveform being sent to the instrument.
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Returns the number of points for the
waveform transmitted in response to a
CURVe? query
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
Returns the point format for the outgoing
waveform
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
This query always returns a 0 if the waveform
specified by DATA:SOUrce is on or displayed
WFMOutpre:PT_ORder?
This query always returns LINEAR.
WFMOutpre:RECOrdlength?
Returns the record length for the source
waveform as specified by the DATa:SOUrce
command.
WFMOutpre:WFId?
Returns a string describing the acquisition
parameters for the outgoing waveform
WFMOutpre:XINcr?
Returns the horizontal sampling interval for
the outgoing waveform
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
Returns the horizontal units for the outgoing
waveform
WFMOutpre:XZEro?
Returns the time of the first point in the
outgoing waveform
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-34: Waveform Transfer Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?
Returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing
level for the outgoing waveform
WFMOutpre:YOFf?
Returns the vertical position in digitizing
levels for the outgoing waveform
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
Returns the vertical units for the outgoing
waveform
WFMOutpre:YZEro?
Returns the vertical offset for the outgoing
waveform
For more information, refer to Appendix B: Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B
and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instructions.(See page B-1.)
Zoom Command Group
Use the commands in the Zoom Command Group to expand and position the
waveform display horizontally and vertically, without changing the time base.
Table 2-35: Zoom Commands
Command
Description
ZOOm?
Returns the current horizontal positioning
and scaling of the display
ZOOm{:MODe|:STATE}
Sets or returns the zoom mode
ZOOm:ZOOM1?
Returns the current horizontal positioning
and scaling of the display
ZOOm:ZOOM1:FACtor?
Returns the zoom factor of a particular zoom
box
ZOOm:ZOOM1:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or returns the horizontal zoom position
for the specified waveform in the specified
zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM1:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the horizontal zoom scale of
the specified waveform in the specified zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM1:POSition
Sets or returns the horizontal zoom position
for the specified waveform in the specified
zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM1:SCAle
Sets or returns the horizontal zoom scale of
the specified waveform in the specified zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM1:STATE
Specifies or returns a trace as zoomed, on
or off
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-57
Command Groups
2-58
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ACQuire? (Query Only)
Returns the following current acquisition parameters:
Stop after
Acquisition state
Mode
Number of averages
Sampling mode
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire?
Related Commands
Examples
ACQuire:MODe, ACQuire:NUMACq?, ACQuire:NUMAVg, ACQuire:
STOPAfter
ACQuire? might return ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE
SAMPLE;NUMAVG 16;SAMPLINGMODE RT
ACQuire:MAXSamplerate? (Query Only)
Returns the maximum real-time sample rate, which is the same across all
MSO/DPO2000/B series models.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:MAXSamplerate?
Examples
ACQUIRE:MAXSAMPLERATE? might return 1.0000E+9 in a DPO2024 instrument
indicating that the maximum real-time sample rate is 1 GS/s.
ACQuire:MODe
Sets or returns the acquisition mode of the oscilloscope for all live waveforms.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-59
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition intervals.
Each acquisition interval represents a time duration set by the horizontal scale
(time per division). The oscilloscope sampling system always samples at the
maximum rate, so the acquisition interval may include than one sample.
The acquisition mode (which you set using this ACQuire:MODe command)
determines how the final value of the acquisition interval is generated from the
many data samples.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:MODe {SAMple|AVErage}
ACQuire:MODe?
Related Commands
Arguments
ACQuire:NUMAVg, CURVe
SAMple specifies that the displayed data point value is the first sampled value
that is taken during the acquisition interval. In sample mode, all waveform data
has 8 bits of precision. You can request 16 bit data with a CURVe query but the
lower-order 8 bits of data will be zero. SAMple is the default mode.
AVErage specifies averaging mode, in which the resulting waveform shows an
average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform acquisitions. The
oscilloscope processes the number of waveforms you specify into the acquired
waveform, creating a running exponential average of the input signal. The number
of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the average waveform is set or
queried using the ACQuire:NUMAVg command.
Examples
ACQUIRE:MODE AVErage sets an average acquisition mode indicating that
the resulting waveform is the average of the specified number of waveform
acquisitions.
ACQUIRE:MODE? might return:ACQUIRE:MODE AVERAGE indicating that
the displayed waveform is the average of the specified number of waveform
acquisitions.
ACQuire:NUMACq? (Query Only)
The acquisition number will continue to increase while acquisitions are running
until there is a reset. Starting and stopping acquisitions do not cause this number
to reset. For example, if acquisitions are running, the acquisition count will
increase (assuming the oscilloscope is triggering). If you stop the acquisitions, the
acquisition number will freeze at a given number (For example: 5000). If you
2-60
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
start acquisitions again, it will continue from 5000. The number will reset to 0
only if you change the horizontal scale while acquisitions are running.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:NUMACq?
Related Commands
Returns
ACQuire:STATE
ACQuire:NUMACq? might return :ACQUIRE:NUMACQ 350 indicating that 350
acquisitions have occurred.
ACQuire:NUMAVg
Sets or returns the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an averaged
waveform. Use the ACQuire:MODe command to enable the Average mode.
Sending this command is equivalent to turning a multipurpose knob to enter the
number of waveform acquisitions to average.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:NUMAVg <NR1>
ACQuire:NUMAVg?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
ACQuire:MODe
<NR1> is the number of waveform acquisitions to average. The range of values is
from 2 to 512 in powers of two.
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 16 specifies that 16 waveform averages will be performed
before exponential averaging starts.
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG? might return :ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 64 indicating that there
are 64 acquisitions specified for averaging.
ACQuire:STATE
Starts or stops acquisitions. When state is set to ON or RUN, a new acquisition
will be started. If the last acquisition was a single acquisition sequence, a new
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-61
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
single sequence acquisition will be started. If the last acquisition was continuous,
a new continuous acquisition will be started.
If RUN is issued in the middle of completing a single sequence acquisition (for
example, averaging or enveloping), the acquisition sequence is restarted, and
any accumulated data is discarded. Also, the oscilloscope resets the number of
acquisitions. If the RUN argument is issued while in continuous mode, acquisition
continues.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:STATE {OFF|ON|RUN|STOP|<NR1>}
ACQuire:STATE?
Related Commands
Arguments
ACQuire:STOPAfter
OFF stops acquisitions.
STOP stops acquisitions.
ON starts acquisitions.
RUN starts acquisitions.
<NR1> = 0 stops acquisitions; any other value starts acquisitions.
Examples
ACQUIRE:STATE RUN starts the acquisition of waveform data.
ACQUIRE:STATE? might return:ACQUIRE:STATE 0 indicating that the
acquisition is stopped.
2-62
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ACQuire:STOPAfter
Sets or returns whether the oscilloscope continually acquires acquisitions or
acquires a single sequence.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:STOPAfter {RUNSTop|SEQuence}
ACQuire:STOPAfter?
Related Commands
Arguments
ACQuire:STATE
RUNSTop specifies that the oscilloscope will continually acquire data, if
ACQuire:STATE is turned on.
SEQuence specifies that the next acquisition will be a single-sequence acquisition.
Examples
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTop sets the oscilloscope to continually acquire data.
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER? might return:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
indicating that the next acquisition the oscilloscope makes will be of the
single-sequence type.
ALIas
Sets or returns the state of alias functionality. Use Alias commands to define new
commands as a sequence of standard commands. You may find this useful when
repeatedly using the same commands to perform certain tasks like setting up
measurements. Aliases are similar to macros but do not include the capability to
substitute parameters into alias bodies.
To use Alias commands, first define the alias, then turn on the alias state.
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
ALIas?
Related Commands
ALIas:DEFine
ALIas[:STATE]
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-63
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
OFF turns alias expansion off. If a defined alias is sent when ALIas is off, a
command error (110) will be generated.
ON turns alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the specified
command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
<NR1> = 0 disables alias mode; any other value enables alias mode.
Examples
ALIAS ON turns the alias feature on. When a defined alias is received, the specified
command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
ALIAS? might return :ALIAS 1 indicating that the alias feature is on.
ALIas:CATalog? (Query Only)
Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels, separated by commas. If no
aliases are defined, the query returns the string "".
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas:CATalog?
Examples
ALIAS:CATALOG? might return the string :ALIAS:CATALOG
"SETUP1","TESTMENU1","DEFAULT" showing that there are three aliases
named SETUP1, TESTMENU1, and DEFAULT.
ALIas:DEFine
Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label. These messages are
then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a command or query,
provided that ALIas:STATE has been turned on. The query form of this command
returns the definitions of a selected alias.
NOTE. Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an error. To give a
new alias the name of an existing alias, the existing alias must first be deleted.
2-64
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas:DEFine <QString><,>{<QString>|<Block>}
ALIas:DEFine? <QString>
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
ALIas[:STATE]
The first <QString> is the alias label.
This label cannot be a command name. Labels must start with a letter and can
contain only letters, numbers, and underscores; other characters are not allowed.
The label must be less than or equal to 12 characters.
The second<QString> or <Block> is a complete sequence of program messages.
The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by
semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands. The sequence
must be less than or equal to 256 characters.
Examples
ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",":RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET
EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1 ON" defines an alias named "ST1" that sets
up the oscilloscope.
ALIAS:DEFINE? "ST1" returns :ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",#246
:RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1 ON
ALIas:DELEte (No Query Form)
Removes a specified alias and is identical to ALIas:DELEte:NAMe. An error
message is generated if the named alias does not exist.
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas:DELEte <QString>
Related Commands
Arguments
*ESR?, ALIas:DELEte:ALL
<QString> is the name of the alias to be removed. Using ALIas:DELEte
without specifying an alias causes an execution error. <QString> must be a
previously defined value.
Examples
ALIAS:DELETE "SETUP1" deletes the alias named SETUP1.
ALIas:DELEte:ALL (No Query Form)
Deletes all existing aliases.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-65
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
Related Commands
Examples
ALIas:DELEte, ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe]
ALIAS:DELETE:ALL deletes all existing aliases.
ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe] (No Query Form)
Removes a specified alias. This command is identical to ALIas:DELEte
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe] <QString>
Arguments
<QString> is the name of the alias to remove. Using ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe]
without specifying an alias causes an execution error. <QString> must be an
existing alias.
Examples
ALIAS:DELETE[:NAME] “STARTUP” deletes the alias named STARTUP.
ALIas[:STATE]
Turns aliases on or off. This command is identical to the ALIas command.
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas[:STATE] {<NR1>|OFF|ON}
ALIas[:STATE]?
Arguments
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns alias expansion off. If a defined alias is sent when
ALIas:STATE is OFF, a command error (102) is generated.
ON or <NR1>0 turns alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the
specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
2-66
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
ALIAS[:STATE] OFF turns the command alias feature off.
ALIAS[:STATE]? returns 0 when the alias feature is off.
ALLEv? (Query Only)
Prompts the oscilloscope to return all events and their messages (delimited by
commas), and removes the returned events from the Event Queue. Use the *ESR?
query to enable the events to be returned. This command is similar to repeatedly
sending *EVMsg? queries to the oscilloscope.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
ALLEv?
Related Commands
Examples
*ESR?, EVMsg?
ALLEV? might return :ALLEV 2225,"Measurement error, No waveform
to measure; "420,"Query UNTERMINATED;"
AUTOSet (No Query Form)
Sets the vertical, horizontal, and trigger controls of the oscilloscope to
automatically acquire and display the selected waveform.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
AUTOSet {EXECute|UNDo}
Arguments
EXECute autosets the displayed waveform.
UNDo restores the oscilloscope settings to those present prior to the autoset
execution.
Examples
AUTOSET EXECUTE vertical, horizontal, and trigger controls of the oscilloscope to
automatically acquire and display the selected waveform.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-67
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
AUTOSet:ENAble
Enables or disables the autoset.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
AUTOSet:ENAble {OFF|ON}
AUTOSet:ENAble?
Related Commands
Arguments
AUTOSet
ON enables the autoset feature.
OFF disables the autoset feature.
Examples
AUTOSET:ENABLE ? might return AUTOSET:ENABLE 1 indicating that autoset is
enabled.
AUTOSET:ENABLE OFF disables autoset.
AUXin? (Query Only)
Returns all auxiliary input parameters.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
AUXin?
AUXin:PRObe
Returns all information concerning the probe attached to auxiliary input.
2-68
Group
Vertical
Syntax
AUXin:PRObe
AUXin:PRObe?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
AUXIN:PROBE? might return AUXIN:PROBE:ID:TYPE "No Probe
Detected";SERNUMBER "";:AUXIN:PROBE:UNITS "";RESISTANCE
1.0000E+6 giving information about the probe attached to the AUX In input.
AUXin:PRObe:AUTOZero (No Query Form)
Sets the TekVPI probe attached to the Aux In input to autozero. The oscilloscope
will ignore this command if the Auxiliary input does not have a TekVPI probe
connected to it.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
AUXin:PRObe:AUTOZero {EXECute}
Arguments
EXECute sets the probe to autozero.
Examples
AUXin:PROBE:AUTOZERO EXECUTE
AUXin:PRObe:COMMAND (No Query Form)
Sets the state of the probe control specified with the first argument to the state
specified with the second argument. The commands and states are unique to the
attached probe type. Only certain VPI probes support this command. See the
probe documentation for how to set these string arguments.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
AUXin:PRObe:COMMAND <QString>, <QString>
Arguments
Examples
<QString> are quoted strings specifying the probe command and value to set in
the probe attached to the auxiliary input.
AUXIN:PROBE:COMMAND “OUTPUT”, “ON” turns the output of a Tektronix
VPI-DPG probe on.
AUXIN:PROBE:COMMAND “MODE”, “4–4V1MHz” sets a Tektronix VPI-DPG
probe to the 4-4V1MHz mode.
AUXIN:PROBE:COMMAND?“MODE” might return AUXIN:PROBE:COMMAND
“MODE”,“4-4V1MHZ”.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-69
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
AUXin:PRObe:DEGAUss (No Query Form)
Starts a degauss/autozero cycle on a TekVPI current probe attached to the Aux In
input. If you send this command to a probe that does not support this function,
it is ignored
Group
Vertical
Syntax
AUXin:PRObe:DEGAUss {EXECute}
Arguments
EXECute starts a probe degauss cycle.
Examples
AUXin:PROBE:DEGAUSS EXECUTE degausses the probe attached to the Aux
In input.
AUXin:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE? (Query Only)
Returns the state of the probe degauss (NEEDED, RECOMMENDED, PASSED,
FAILED, RUNNING). The command will return PASSED for probes that do not
support degauss operations.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
AUXin:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE?
Examples
AUXin:PROBE:DEGAUSS:STATE? might return:
AUXin:PROBE:DEGAUSS:STATE PASSED indicating that the probe has been
degaussed.
AUXin:PRObe:FORCEDRange
Changes or returns the range on a TekVPI probe attached to the Aux In input.
2-70
Group
Vertical
Syntax
AUXin:PRObe:FORCEDRange <NR3>
AUXin:PRObe:FORCEDRange?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
<NR3> is the probe range, which is probe dependent.
AUXin:PRObe:GAIN
Sets or returns the gain factor of a probe that is attached to the Aux In input.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
AUXin:PRObe:GAIN <NR3>
AUXin:PRObe:GAIN?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the probe gain, which is probe dependent.
AUXin:PROBE:GAIN? might return :AUXin:PROBE:GAIN 100.0000E-3
indicating that the attached 10x probe delivers 0.1 V to the Aux In BNC for every
1.0 V applied to the probe input.
AUXin:PRObe:ID:SERnumber? (Query Only)
Returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the auxiliary input.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
AUXin:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
AUXin:PRObe:ID:TYPE? (Query Only)
Returns the type of probe that is attached to the auxiliary input.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
AUXin:PRObe:ID:TYPE?
AUXin:PRObe:RESistance? (Query Only)
Returns the resistance of the probe attached to the front panel Aux In connector.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-71
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Vertical
Syntax
AUXin:PRObe:RESistance?
Examples
AUXin:PRObe:RESistance? might return :AUXin:PROBE:RESISTANCE
1.0000E+6 indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to the front
panel Aux In connector is 1 MΩ.
NOTE. This query will return 0.0 if no probe is attached or the attached probe
does not report the input resistance.
AUXin:PRObe:SIGnal
This command changes the input bypass setting on VPI probes that support input
bypass, for example the TCP0001. If sent to a probe that does not support input
bypass, it is ignored.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
AUXin:PRObe:SIGnal {BYPass|PASS}
AUXin:PRObe:SIGnal?
Arguments
BYPass sets the probe to Bypass mode.
PASS sets the probe to Pass mode.
AUXin:PRObe:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns a string describing the units of measure of the probe attached to the Aux
In input.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
AUXin:PRObe:UNIts?
Examples
2-72
AUXin:PROBE:UNITS? might return: :AUXin:PROBE:UNITS “V” indicating
that the units of measure for the attached probe are volts.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
BUS
Sets or returns the parameters for each bus. These parameters affect either the
Serial Trigger Setup or the Bus Display.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO, DPO2EMBD, or DPO2COMP application
module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate
Sets or returns the bit rate for CAN bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate <NR1>
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate?
Arguments
Returns
<NR1> sets the bit rate to the closest bit rate supported by the instrument.
The query always returns the numerical bit rate value.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:PRObe
Sets or returns the probing method to probe CAN bus <x>, where x is the bus
number.
Conditions
Group
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Bus
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-73
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
BUS:B<x>:CAN:PRObe {CANH|CANL|RX|TX|DIFFerential}
BUS:B<x>:CAN:PRObe?
CANH specifies the single-ended CANH signal, as specified by the CAN standard.
CANL specifies the single-ended CANL signal, as specified by the CAN standard.
RX specifies the receive signal on the bus side of the CAN transceiver.
TX specifies the transmit signal.
DIFFerential specifies the differential CAN signal.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint
Sets or returns the sampling point during each bit period for bus <x>, where x
is the bus number
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint <NR1>
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint?
Arguments
<NR1> is the sample point in percent. Values are limited to 25, 30, ... 70, 75.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce
Sets or returns the CAN bus data source for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
2-74
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
CH1–CH4 is the analog channel to use as the data source.
D0–D15 is the digital channel to use as the data source.
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMAt
Sets or returns the display format for the numerical information in the bus
waveform <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO, DPO2EMBD, or DPO2COMP application
module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMAt {BINary|HEXadecimal|ASCII|MIXed}
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMAt?
Related Commands
Arguments
BUS:B<x>:TYPE
BINary specifies a binary data display.
HEXadecimal specifies a hexadecimal data display.
ASCII specifies an ASCII format for RS232 only.
MIXed specifies a mixed format for LIN only.
BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:RWINClude
Sets and returns whether the read/write bit is included in the address.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:RWINClude {<NR1>|OFF|ON}
BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:RWINClude?
Arguments
<NR1> = 0 does not include the read/write bit in the address; any other value
includes the read/write bit in the address.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-75
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
OFF does not include the read/write bit in the address.
ON includes the read/write bit in the address.
Examples
BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:RWINCLUDE ON includes the read/write bit in the
address.
BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:RWINCLUDE? might return
BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:RWINCLUDE 0 indicating that the read/write bit is
not included in the address.
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the I2C SCLK source for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1–CH4 specifies the analog channel to use as the I2C SCLK source.
D0–D15 specifies the digital channel to use as the I2C SCLK source.
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:DATA|:SDATA}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the I2C SDATA source for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
2-76
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:DATA|:SDATA}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:DATA|:SDATA}:SOUrce?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
CH1–CH4 specifies the analog channel to use as the I2C SDATA source.
D0–D15 specifies the digital channel to use as the I2C SDATA source.
BUS:B<x>:LABel
Sets or returns the waveform label for bus < x>, where x is the bus number
1 through 4.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:LABel <Qstring>
BUS:B<x>:LABel?
Arguments
<Qstring> is an alpha-numeric string of text, enclosed in quotes, that contains
the text label information for bus <x>. The text string is limited to 30 characters.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate
Sets or returns the bit rate for LIN.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate <NR1>
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> is the LIN bit rate.
BUS:B1:LIN:BITRATE 9600 sets the bit rate 9600.
BUS:B1:LIN:BITRATE? might return BUS:B1:LIN:BITRATE 2400 indicating
that the bit rate is set to 2400.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat
Sets or returns the LIN ID format.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-77
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat {NOPARity|PARity}
BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat?
Arguments
NOPARity sets the LIN ID format to no parity.
PARity sets the LIN ID format to parity.
Examples
BUS:B1:LIN:IDFORMAT PARITY sets the LIN ID format to parity.
BUS:B1:LIN:IDFORMAT? might return BUS:B1:LIN:IDFORMAT NOPARITY
indicating that the LIN ID format is no parity.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLARity
Sets or returns the LIN polarity.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLARity {NORMal|INVerted}
BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLARity?
Arguments
NORMal specifies normal LIN polarity.
INVerted specifies inverted LIN polarity.
Examples
BUS:B1:LIN:POLARITY INVERTED sets the LIN polarity to INVERTED.
BUS:B1:LIN:POLARITY? might return BUS:B1:LIN:POLARITY NORMAL
indicating that the LIN polarity is normal.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint
Sets or returns the sample point (in %) at which to sample during each bit period.
2-78
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint <NR1>
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> is the sample point (in %) at which to sample during each bit period.
BUS:B1:LIN:SAMPLEPOINT 10 sets the sample point is at 10% of the bit period
BUS:B1:LIN:SAMPLEPOINT? might return BUS:B1:LIN:SAMPLEPOINT 50
indicating that the sample point is at 50% of the bit period
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce
Sets or returns the LIN data source.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies the LIN source channel where x is 1 to 4.
D<x> specifies the LIN source channel where x is 0 to 15.
Examples
BUS:B1:LIN:SOURCE CH4 sets the LIN source to channel 4.
BUS:B1:LIN:SOURCE? might return BUS:B1:LIN:SOURCE CH1 indicating that
the LIN source is channel 1.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard
Sets or returns the LIN standard.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-79
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard {V1X|V2X|MIXed}
BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard?
Arguments
V1X sets the LIN standard to V1X.
V2X sets the LIN standard to V2X
MIXed sets the LIN standard to MIXED.
Examples
BUS:B1:LIN:STANDARD V1X sets the LIN standard is V1X.
BUS:B1:LIN:STANDARD? might return BUS:B1:LIN:STANDARD V2X
indicating that the LIN standard is V2X.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>:SOUrce
Sets or returns the parallel bit source for B<x>, where x is the bus number and
Bit<x> is the bit number.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1–CH4 specifies the bit source B<x>. BIT<x> specifies the bit number.
D0–D15 specifies the bit source B<x>. BIT<x> specifies the bit number.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:EDGE
Sets or returns the parallel clock edge for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
2-80
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:EDGE {EITher|RISing|FALling}
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:EDGE?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
EIther specifies either rising or falling edge as the clock edge.
RISing specifies the rising edge as the clock edge.
FALling specifies the falling edge as the clock edge.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:ISCLOCKed
Sets or returns the parallel bus clock function for bus <x>, where x is the bus
number.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:ISCLOCKed {YES|NO}
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:ISCLOCKed?
Arguments
YES specifies that the parallel bus is clocked.
NO specifies that the parallel bus is not clocked.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:SOUrce
Sets or returns the parallel bus source <x>, where x is the bus number.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1–CH4 specifies the channel to use as the parallel bit source.
D0–D15 specifies the digital channel to use as the parallel bit source.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:WIDth
Sets or returns the number of bits used for the width of the parallel bus <x>,
where x is the bus number.
Group
Bus
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-81
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:WIDth <NR1>
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:WIDth?
<NR1> is the number of bits.
BUS:B<x>:POSition
Sets or returns the position of the bus <x> waveform on the display, where x is
the bus number 1 through 4.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO, DPO2EMBD, or DPO2COMP application
module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:POSition <NR3>
BUS:B<x>:POSition?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the position.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate
Sets or returns the RS232 bit rate for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate <NR1>
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate?
Arguments
2-82
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
<NR1> is the bit rate in bits-per-second: 50 to 10000000. You can enter any
positive integer, and the instrument will coerce the value to the closest supported
bit rate.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits
Sets or returns the number of RS232 data bits for bus <x>, where x is the bus
number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits {7|8|9}
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits?
Arguments
7 specifies seven bits in the RS232 data frame.
8 specifies eight bits in the RS232 data frame.
9 specifies nine bits in the RS232 data frame.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter
Sets or returns the RS232 delimiting value for a packet on bus <x>, where x
is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter {NULl|LF|CR|SPace|XFF}
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter?
Arguments
NULl specifies 0x00.
LF specifies 0x0A.
CR specifies 0x0D.
XFF specifies 0xFF.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode
Sets or returns the display mode for the bus <x> display and event table, where x
is the bus number.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-83
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode {FRAme|PACKET}
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode?
Arguments
FRAme displays each frame as a single entity.
PACKET displays a group of frames terminated with a single frame defined by the
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELImiter command or the front panel.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity
Sets or returns the RS232C parity for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity {NONe|EVEN|ODD}
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity?
Arguments
NONe specifies no parity.
EVEN specifies even parity.
ODD specifies odd parity.
NOTE. 9 data bits (BUS:B<x>:DATABITS 9) does not support parity. Changing
the parity with the PI while using 9 data bits, has no effect.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity
Sets or returns the RS232C polarity for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
Group
2-84
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Bus
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity {NORMal|INVERTed}
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity?
NORMal sets the RS232C bus polarity to positive.
INVERTed sets the RS232C bus polarity to negative.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:SOUrce
Sets or returns the RS232 RX source for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1–CH4 specifies the channel to use for the RS232 RX source.
D0–D15 specifies the digital channel to use for the RS232 RX source.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:SOUrce
Sets or returns the RS232 TX Source for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1–CH4 specifies the channel to use as the RS232 TX source.
D0–D15 specifies the digital channel to use as the RS232 TX source.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-85
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder
Sets or returns the bit order for the specified SPI bus.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder {LSB|MSB}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder?
Arguments
LSB specifies least significant bit first
MSB specifies most significant bit first
Examples
BUS:B1:SPI:BITOrder LSB sets the bit order to LSB for the specified bus.
BUS:B1:SPI:BITOrder? might return BUS:B1:SPI:BITOrder MSB
indicating that the returned bit order for the specified bus is MSB.
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:POLARity
Sets or returns the SPI SCLK polarity for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:POLARity {FALL|RISe}
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:POLARity?
Arguments
FALL specifies the falling edge.
RISe specifies the rising edge.
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the SPI SCLK source for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
2-86
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1-CH4 is the channel to use as the SPI SCLK source.
D0-D15 is the digital channel to use as the SPI SCLK source.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:POLARity
Sets or returns the SPI MISO polarity for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:POLARity {LOW|HIGH}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:POLARity?
Arguments
LOW specifies an active low polarity.
HIGH specifies an active high polarity.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the SPI MISO source for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:SOUrce?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-87
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
CH1-CH4 is the channel to use as the SPI MISO source.
D0-D15 is the digital channel to use as the SPI MISO source.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:POLARity
Sets or returns the SPI MOSI polarity for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:POLARity {LOW|HIGH}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:POLARity?
Arguments
LOW specifies the active low polarity.
HIGH specifies the active high polarity.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the SPI MOSI source for bus <x, where x is the bus number>.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1-CH4 is the channel to use as the SPI MISO source.
D0-D15 is the digital channel to use as the SPI MISO source.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA:SIZe
Sets or returns the number of bits per word for the specified SPI bus.
2-88
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA:SIZe <NR1>
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA:SIZe?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> specifies the number of bits per word.
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZe 16 sets the data size to 16.
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZe? might return BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZe 8
indicating that the data size is 8 bits.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING
Sets or returns the type of SPI framing.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING {SS|IDLEtime}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING?
Arguments
SS specifies framing by SS (non 2-wire).
IDLEtime specifies framing by Idle Time (2-wire).
Examples
BUS:B1:SPI:FRAMING SS sets the SPI framing type to SS.
BUS:B1:SPI:FRAMING IDLETIME might return BUS:B1:SPI:FRAMING
IDLETIME indicating that the SPI framing type is set to IDLETIME.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime
Sets or returns the SPI bus idle time in seconds for the specified SPI bus.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-89
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime <NR3>
BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the idle time in seconds.
BUS:B1:SPI:IDLETime? might return BUS:B1:SPI:IDLETime 5.0000E-6
indicating that the idle time is 5 μs.
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:POLARity
Sets or returns the SPI SS polarity for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:POLARity {LOW|HIGH}
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:POLARity?
Arguments
LOW specifies an active low polarity.
HIGH specifies an active high polarity.
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the SPI SS source for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
2-90
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
CH1–CH4 is the channel to use as the SPI SS source.
D0–D15 is the digital channel to use as the SPI SS source.
BUS:B<x>:STATE
Sets or returns the on/off state of bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}
BUS:B<x>:STATE?
Related Commands
Arguments
SELect:BUS<x>
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 turns on the bus.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the bus.
BUS:B<x>:TYPE
Sets or returns the bus type for <x>, where x is the bus number.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:TYPE {I2C|SPI|CAN|RS232C|PARallel|LIN}
BUS:B<x>:TYPE
Arguments
I2C specifies the Inter-IC bus.
SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus (not available on two-channel
models).
CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus.
RS232C specifies the RS232C bus.
PARallel specifies the parallel bus.
LIN specifies the LIN bus.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-91
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
BUS:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets the lower threshold for each channel. This applies to all search
and trigger types that use the channel. This command supersedes the
:BUS:THReshold:CH<x> above.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
BUS:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the threshold in volts.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
Examples
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1 TTL sets the CH1 lower threshold to 800 mV.
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1? might return :BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1
-800.0000E-3 indicating that the CH1 lower threshold is -800 mV.
BUS:THReshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the threshold for analog channel <x>, where x is the channel
number. This setting applies to all trigger types that use the channel. The threshold
value of CH<x> is set to the closest value used by hardware. The threshold
settings for both BUS: THReshold:CH<x> and BUS:THRESHOLD:D<x>
channels will be rounded to the nearest threshold value used by hardware and not
necessarily the value set by the user. For example: If you set the threshold to 2.48
volts and the hardware only supports 2.5 volts, then the threshold value will be
2.5 volts and not 2.48 as set by you.
Conditions
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:THReshold:CH<x> {ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
BUS:THReshold:CH<x>?
Related Commands
2-92
This command requires a DPO2AUTO, DPO2EMBD, or DPO2COMP application
module.
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
TTL specifies a TTL preset high level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> specifies the threshold level in volts.
BUS:THReshold:D<x>
Sets or returns the threshold for digital channel <x>, where x is the digital channel
number. This will apply to all search and trigger types that use the channel. The
threshold value of D<x> is set to the closest value used by hardware.
Digital channel thresholds are set in two groups. One for channels D0–D7 and the
other for D8–D15. Setting the thresholds in one of these groups sets the threshold
for all the channels in that group.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO, DPO2EMBD, or DPO2COMP application
module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:THReshold:D<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
BUS:THReshold:D<x>?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:LEVel:D<x>
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> specifies the threshold level in volts.
BUS:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets the upper threshold for each channel. This applies to all search and trigger
types that use the channel.
Group
Bus
Syntax
BUS:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
BUS:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-93
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the threshold in volts.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
Examples
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1 800.0000E-3 sets the CH1 upper threshold to
800 mV.
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1? might return :BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1
-800.0000E-3 indicating that the CH1 upper threshold is set to -800 mV.
BUSY? (Query Only)
Returns the status of the oscilloscope. This command allows you to synchronize
the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
BUSY?
Related Commands
Returns
*OPC, *WAI
<NR1> = 0 means the oscilloscope is not busy processing a command whose
execution time is extensive.
<NR1> = 1 means the oscilloscope is busy processing one of the commands listed
in the table below.
Commands that affect BUSY? response
Examples
Operation
Command
Single sequence
acquisition
ACQuire:STATE ON or
ACQuire:STATE RUN or
ACQuire:STATE1
(when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to SEQuence)
Hard copy operation
HARDCopy STArt
Calibration step
Refer to the optional oscilloscope Service Manual.
BUSY? might return :BUSY 1 indicating that the oscilloscope is currently busy.
See the section titled “Using the BUSY Query” for an example of how to use
this query.
2-94
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
*CAL? (Query Only)
Performs an internal self-calibration and returns the oscilloscope calibration status.
NOTE. Disconnect or otherwise remove all input signals prior to starting
self-calibration. The self-calibration can take several minutes to complete.
No other commands are executed until calibration is complete.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
*CAL?
Returns
<NR1> = 1 indicates the calibration did not complete successfully.
<NR1> = 0 indicates the calibration completed without errors.
Examples
*CAL? starts the internal signal path calibration and might return 0 to indicate that
the calibration was successful.
CALibrate:FACtory (No Query Form)
Provides the controls for starting and stopping the factory calibration process. The
factory calibration process consists of a series of steps.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory {STARt|CONTinue|PREVious|ABOrt|DUmp}
Arguments
STARt initializes the factory calibration sequence and starts the first calibration
step.
CONTinue begins the next factory calibration step.
PREVious attempts to run the most recent factory calibration step again.
ABOrt stops the calibration process.
DUmp stops the calibration and prints the calibration constants.
Examples
CALIBRATE:FACTORY START starts the calibration process.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-95
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CALibrate:FACtory:STATus? (Query Only)
Returns the factory calibration status value saved in nonvolatile memory.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:STATus?
Examples
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STATUS? might return CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STATUS
PASS indicating that factory calibration passed.
CALibrate:INTERNal (No Query Form)
This command starts a signal path compensation.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:INTERNal
Arguments
Examples
None
CALIBRATE:INTERNAL starts a serial path compensation cycle.
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt (No Query Form)
Starts the internal signal path calibration (SPC) of the oscilloscope. You can
use the CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? query to return the current status of the
internal signal path calibration of the oscilloscope.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt
Related Commands
Examples
2-96
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:START initiates the internal signal path calibration of
the oscilloscope.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? (Query Only)
Returns the current status of the oscilloscope internal signal path calibration for
the last SPC operation.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?
Related Commands
Returns
*CAL?
This query will return one of the following:
INIT indicates the oscilloscope has not had internal signal path calibration
run.
PASS indicates the signal path calibration completed successfully.
FAIL indicates the signal path calibration did not complete successfully.
RUNNING indicates the signal path calibration is currently running.
Examples
CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:STATUS? might return
:CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:STATUS INIT indicating that the current status of the
internal signal path calibration is that it has not been run.
CALibrate:RESults? (Query Only)
Returns the status of internal and factory calibrations, without performing any
calibration operations. The results returned do not include the calibration status
of attached probes. The CALibrate:RESults? query is intended to support
GO/NoGO testing of the oscilloscope calibration readiness: all returned results
should indicate PASS status if the oscilloscope is "fit for duty". It is quite
common, however, to use uncalibrated probes (particularly when the oscilloscope
inputs are connected into a test system with coaxial cables).
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:RESults?
Related Commands
*CAL?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-97
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory? (Query Only)
Returns the status of internal and factory calibration, without performing any
calibration operations.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory?
CALibrate:RESults:SPC? (Query Only)
Returns the status of the SPC operation. This query does not initiate a SPC.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Related Commands
Returns
*CAL?
INIT indicates that SPC has never successfully completed.
PASS indicates that the last SPC operation passed.
FAIL indicates that the last SPC operation failed.
RUNNING indicates that the SPC operation is running.
Examples
CALIBRATE:RESULTS:SPC? returns the results of the last SPC operation: either
PASS or FAIL.
CALibrate:TEMPerature? (Query Only)
Returns 0 as the MSO/DPO2000/B series instruments do not support recording
of oscilloscope temperature.
2-98
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:TEMPerature?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CH<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the vertical parameters for channel <x>, where x is the channel number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>?
CH<x>:BANdwidth
Sets or returns the selectable low-pass bandwidth limit filter for channel <x>,
where x is the channel number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:BANdwidth {TWEnty|FULl|<NR3>}
CH<x>:BANdwidth?
Arguments
TWEnty sets the upper bandwidth limit of channel <x> to 20 MHz.
FULl disables any optional bandwidth limiting. The specified channel operates
at its maximum attainable bandwidth.
<NR3> is a double-precision ASCII string. The oscilloscope rounds this value to
an available bandwidth using geometric rounding, and then uses this value to
set the upper bandwidth limit.
NOTE. Other values may be possible depending on the attached probes.
Examples
CH1:BANDWIDTH TWENTY sets the bandwidth of channel 1 to 20 MHz.
CH<x>:COUPling
Sets or returns the input attenuator coupling setting for channel <x>, where x
is the channel number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:COUPling {AC|DC|GND}
CH<x>:COUPling?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-99
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
AC sets channel <x> to AC coupling.
DC sets channel <x> to DC coupling.
GND sets channel<x> to ground. Only a flat, ground-level waveform will be
displayed.
Examples
CH2:COUPLING GND sets channel 2 to ground.
CH3:COUPling? might return :CH3:COUPling DC indicating that channel 3
is set to DC coupling.
CH<x>:DESKew
Sets or returns the deskew time for channel <x>, where x is the channel number.
You can adjust the deskew time to add an independent, channel-based delay time
to the delay (set by the horizontal position control and common to all channels)
from the common trigger point to first sample taken for each channel. This lets
you compensate individual channels for different delays introduced by their
individual input hook ups.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:DESKew <NR3>
CH<x>:DESKew?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the deskew time for channel <x>, ranging from -100 ns to +100 ns
with a resolution of 1 ns.
CH4:DESKew 5.0E-9 sets the deskew time for channel 4 to 5 ns.
CH2:DESKew? might return :CH2:DESKEW 2.0000E-09 indicating that the
deskew time for channel 2 is set to 2 ns.
CH<x>:IMPedance
Sets or returns the input impedance of channel <x>, where x is the channel
number. This command is provided for compatibilty.
Group
2-100
Vertical
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
CH<x>:IMPedance
CH<x>:IMPedance?
CH<x>:INVert
Sets or returns the invert function for channel <x>, where is the channel number.
When on, the invert function inverts the waveform for the specified channel.
NOTE. This command inverts the waveform for display purposes only. The
oscilloscope does not use an inverted waveform for triggers or trigger logic inputs.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:INVert {ON|OFF}
CH<x>:INVert?
Arguments
OFF sets the invert function for channel <x> to off.
ON sets the invert function for channel <x> to on.
Examples
CH4:INVert ON inverts the waveform on channel 4.
CH2:INVert? might return :CH2:INVERT 0 indicating that channel 2 is not
inverted.
CH<x>:LABel
Sets or returns the waveform label for channel <x>, where x is the channel number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:LABel <Qstring>
CH<x>:LABel?
Arguments
<Qstring> is an alpha-numeric string of text, enclosed in quotes, that contains
the text label information for the channel <x> waveform. The text string is limited
to 30 characters.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-101
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CH<x>:OFFSet
Sets or returns the vertical offset for channel <x>, where x is the channel number.
This command offsets the vertical acquisition window (moves the level at the
vertical center of the acquisition window) for the specified channel. Visualize
offset as scrolling the acquisition window towards the top of a large signal for
increased offset values, and scrolling towards the bottom for decreased offset
values. The resolution of the vertical window sets the offset increment for this
control.
Offset adjusts only the vertical center of the acquisition window for channel
waveforms to help determine what data is acquired. The oscilloscope always
displays the input signal minus the offset value.
The channel offset range depends on the vertical scale factor. The valid ranges
for the MSO/DPO2000/B series oscilloscopes are (when the probe and external
attenuation factor is X1):
For V/Div settings from 2 mV/div to 200 mV/div, the offset range is +/– 1 V
For V/Div settings from 202 mV/div to 5 V/div, the offset range is +/– 25 V
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:OFFSet <NR3>
CH<x>:OFFSet?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CH<x>:POSition
<NR3> is the offset value for the specified channel <x>.
CH3:OFFSet 2.0E-3 sets the offset for channel 3 to 2 mV.
CH4:OFFSet? might return :CH4:OFFSET 1.0000E-03 indicating that the
offset for channel 4 is set to 1 mV.
CH<x>:POSition
Sets or returns the vertical position of channel <x>, where x is the channel
number. The position value is applied to the signal before it is digitized.
Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up.
Decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down. The position
value determines the vertical graticule coordinate at which input signal values,
minus the present offset setting for that channel, are displayed. For example,
2-102
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
if the position for Channel 3 is set to 2.0 and the offset is set to 3.0, then input
signals equal to 3.0 units are displayed 2.0 divisions above the center of the screen
(at 1 V/div).
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:POSition <NR3>
CH<x>:POSition?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CH<x>:OFFSet, REF<x>:VERTical:POSition, MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition
<NR3> is the position value for channel <x>, in divisions, from the center
graticule. The range is 4 to -4 divisions.
CH2:POSition 1.3 positions the Channel 2 input signal 1.3 divisions above the
center graticule.
CH1:POSition? might return :CH1:POSITION -1.3000 indicating that the
current position of Channel 1 is 1.3 divisions below the center graticule.
CH<x>:PRObe? (Query Only)
Returns all information concerning the probe attached to channel <x>, where x
is the channel number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe?
CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero (No Query Form)
Sets the TekVPI probe attached to channel <x> to zero, where x is the channel
number
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero EXECute
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-103
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
Execute auto zeros the probe.
CH<x>:PRObe:COMMAND (No Query Form)
Sets the state of the probe control specified with the first argument to the state
specified with the second argument. The commands and states are unique to the
attached probe type. Only certain VPI probes support this command. See the
probe documentation for how to set these string arguments.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:COMMAND <QString>, <QString>
Arguments
Examples
<QString> are quoted strings specifying the probe command and value to set in
the probe attached to the specified channel.
CH1:PROBE:COMMAND “MODE”, “4–4V1MHz” sets a Tektronix VPI-DPG probe
to the 4-4V1MHz mode.
CH1:PROBE:COMMAND “OUTPUT”, “ON” turns the output of a Tektronix
VPI-DPG probe on.
CH1:PROBE:COMMAND?“MODE” might return CH1:PROBE:COMMAND
“MODE”,“4-4V1MHZ”.
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss (No Query Form)
Starts a degauss auto-zero cycle on a TekVPI current probe attached to the input
channel specified by <x>, where x is the channel number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss EXECute
Arguments
EXECute initiates the degauss operation.
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE? (Query Only)
Returns the state of the probe degauss for the channel specified by <x>, where is x
is the channel number.
2-104
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
NOTE. This command will return PASSED for probes that do not support degauss
operations.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE?
Returns
NEEDED indicates the probe should be degaussed before taking measurements.
RECOMMENDED indicates the measurement accuracy might be improved by
degaussing the probe.
PASSED indicates the probe is degaussed.
FAILED indicates the degauss operation failed.
RUNNING indicates the probe degauss operation is currently in progress.
CH<x>:PRObe:FORCEDRange
Sets or returns the range of a TekVPI probe attached to the channel specified by
<x>, where x is the channel number.
NOTE. This command will return PASSED for probes that do not support degauss
operations.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:FORCEDRange <NR3>
CH<x>:PRObe:FORCEDRange?
Arguments
Returns
<NR3> specifies the range, which is probe specific.
This command returns 0.0 for probes that do no support forced range.
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN
Sets or returns the gain factor for the probe attached to the channel specified by
<x>, where x is the channel number. The "gain" of a probe is the output divided
by the input transfer ratio. For example, a common 10x probe has a gain of 0.1.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-105
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN <NR3>
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CH<x>:SCAle
<NR3> is the probe gain. Allowed values depend on the specific probe.
CH2:PROBE:GAIN? might return :CH2:PROBE:GAIN 0.1000E+00 indicating
that the attached 10x probe delivers 1 V to the channel 2 BNC for every 10 V
applied to the probe input.
CH<x>:PRObe:ID? (Query Only)
Returns the type and serial number of the probe attached to channel <x>, where x
is the channel number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:ID?
Examples
CH2:PROBE:ID? might return :CH2:PROBE:ID:TYPE "10X";SERNUMBER
"N/A" indicating that a passive 10x probe of unknown serial number is attached
to channel 2.
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber? (Query Only)
Returns the serial number of the probe attached to channel <x>, where x is the
channel number.
NOTE. For Level 0 and 1 probes, the serial number will be "".
2-106
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
CH1:PROBE:ID:SERNUMBER? might return :CH1:PROBE:ID:SERNUMBER
"B010289" indicating that the serial number of the probe attached to channel 1
is B010289.
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPE? (Query Only)
Returns the type of probe attached to the channel specified by <x>, where x
is the channel number. Level 2 (or higher) probes supply their exact product
nomenclature; for Level 0 or 1 probes, a generic “No Probe Detected message is
returned.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPE?
Examples
CH1:PROBE:ID:TYPE? might return :CH1:PROBE:ID:TYPE "P6203"
indicating that P6203-type probe is attached to channel 1.
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance? (Query Only)
Returns the resistance factor of the probe attached to channel <x>, where x is the
channel number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?
Examples
CH2:PRObe:RESistance? might return :CH2:PROBE:RESISTANCE
10.0000E+6 indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to Channel
2 is 1 MΩ.
NOTE. This query will return 0.0 if no probe is attached or the attached probe
does not report the input resistance.
CH<x>:PRObe:SIGnal
Sets or returns the input bypass setting of a TekVPI probe attached to channel
<x>, where x is the channel number. The probe must support input bypass, for
example TCP0001. This command is ignored if sent to an unsupported probe.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-107
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:SIGnal {BYPass|PASS}
CH<x>:PRObe:SIGnal?
Arguments
BYPass sets the probe to Bypass mode.
PASS sets the probe to Pass mode.
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns a string describing the units of measure for the probe attached to channel
<x>, where x is the channel number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?
Examples
CH4:PROBE:UNITS? might return :CH4:PROBE:UNITS "V" indicating that the
units of measure for the probe attached to channel 4 are volts.
CH<x>:SCAle
Sets or returns the vertical scale for the channel specified by <x>, where x is the
channel number.
Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter. For a signal with constant
amplitude, increasing the Scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller.
Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger.
Scale affects all waveforms, but affects channel waveforms differently from
other waveforms:
For channel waveforms, this setting controls the vertical size of the acquisition
window as well as the display scale. The range and resolution of scale
values depends on the probe attached and any other external factors you have
specified.
For reference and math waveforms, this setting controls the display only,
graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition
hardware.
Group
2-108
Vertical
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CH<x>:SCAle <NR3>
CH<x>:SCAle?
CH<x>:OFFSet, CH<x>:POSition, REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle,
MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle
<NR3> is the vertical channel scale in units-per-division. The value entered here
is truncated to three significant digits.
CH4:SCALE 100E-03 sets the channel 4 scale to 100 mV per division.
CH2:SCALE? might return :CH2:SCALE 1.0000 indicating that the current scale
setting of channel 2 is 1 V per division.
CH<x>:TERmination
Sets the connected-disconnected status of a 50 Ω resistor, which may be connected
between the specified channel's coupled input and oscilloscope ground. The
channel is specified by <x>. There is also a corresponding query that requests the
termination parameter and translates this enumeration into one of the two float
values. This command is maintained for compatibility.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:TERmination
CH<x>:TERmination?
CH<x>:VOLts
Sets or returns the vertical sensitivity for channel <x>, where x is the channel
number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:VOLts <NR3>
CH<x>:VOLts?
Arguments
<NR3> is the vertical sensitivity, in volts.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-109
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CH<x>:YUNits
Sets or returns the units for the channel specified by <x>, where x is the channel
number. String arguments are case insensitive and any unsupported units will
generate an error.
Supported units are:
%, /Hz, A, A/A, A/V, A/W, A/dB, A/s, AA, AW, AdB, As, B, Hz, IRE, S/s, V,
V/A, V/V, V/W, V/dB, V/s, VV, VW, VdB, Volts, Vs, W, W/A, W/V, W/W, W/dB,
W/s, WA, WV, WW, WdB, Ws, dB, dB/A, dB/V, dB/W, dB/dB, dBA, dBV, dBW,
dBdB, day, degrees, div, hr, min, ohms, percent, s
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:YUNits <QString>
CH<x>:YUNits?
Arguments
QString is a string of text surrounded by quotes, specifying the supported units.
CLEARMenu (No Query Form)
Clears the current menu from the display. This command is equivalent to pressing
the front panel Menu off.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
CLEARMenu
*CLS (No Query Form)
Clears the following:
Event Queue
Standard Event Status Register
Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit)
If the *CLS command immediately follows an <EOI>, the Output Queue and
MAV bit (Status Byte Register bit 4) are also cleared. The MAV bit indicates that
information is in the output queue. The device clear (DCL) GPIB control message
will clear the output queue and thus MAV. *CLS does not clear the output queue
or MAV.
2-110
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
*CLS can suppress a Service Request that is to be generated by an *OPC. This
will happen if a single sequence acquisition operation is still being processed
when the *CLS command is executed.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*CLS
Related Commands
Examples
DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
*CLS clears the oscilloscope status data structures.
CURSor?
Returns all of the current cursor settings.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor?
Examples
CURSOR? might return the following as the current cursor settings:
:CURSOR:FUNCTION SCREEN;HBARS:POSITION1 0.0000;POSITION2
0.0000;UNITS BASE;:CURSOR:MODE INDEPENDENT;VBARS:POSITION1
-19.0006E-6;POSITION2 -18.9994E-6;UNITS SECONDS
CURSor:FUNCtion
Sets or returns the cursor type. Cursors are attached to the selected waveform in
Waveform mode and are attached to the display area in Screen mode.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:FUNCtion {OFF|SCREEN|WAVEform|VBArs|HBArs}
CURSor:FUNCtion?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-111
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
OFF removes the cursors from the display but does not change the cursor type.
SCREEN specifies both horizontal and vertical bar cursors, which measure the
selected waveform in horizontal and vertical units. Use these cursors to measure
anywhere in the waveform display area.
WAVEform specifies paired cursors in YT display format for measuring waveform
amplitude and time. In XY and XYZ format, these cursors indicate the amplitude
positions of an XY pair (Ch1 vs Ch2 voltage, where Ch1 is the X axis and Ch2 is
the Y axis) relative to the trigger.
VBArs specifies the vertical bar cursor to measure the selected waveform in
vertical units.
HBArs specifies the horizontal bar cursor to measure the selected waveform in
horizontal units.
Examples
CURSOR:FUNCTION WAVEFORM selects the paired cursors for measuring waveform
amplitude and time.
CURSOR:FUNCTION? might return :CURSor:FUNCtion SCREEN indicating that
the screen cursors are currently selected.
CURSor:HBArs? (Query Only)
Returns the current settings for the horizontal bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs?
Examples
CURSOR:HBARS? might return the horizontal
bar setting as :CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1
320.0000E-03;POSITION2-320.0000E-03;UNITS BASE
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)
Returns the vertical difference between the two horizontal bar cursors.
2-112
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
A floating point value with an exponent.
CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA? might return :CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA 5.0800E+00
indicating that the difference between the two cursors is 5.08.
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
Sets or returns the horizontal bar cursor position relative to ground, which is
expressed in vertical units (usually volts). The cursor is specified by x, which
can be 1 or 2.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CURSor:FUNCtion
<NR3> specifies the cursor position relative to ground.
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 25.0E-3 positions Cursor 1 of the horizontal
cursors at 25 mV.
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2? might return :CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2
-64.0000E-03 indicating that Cursor 2 of the horizontal bar cursors is at -64 mV.
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
Sets or returns the units for the horizontal bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts {BASe|PERcent}
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-113
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
BASe selects the vertical units for the selected waveform.
PERcent selects ratio cursors.
Examples
CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS might return :CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS BASE indicating
that the units for the horizontal bar cursors are base.
CURSor:HBArs:USE (No Query Form)
Sets the horizontal bar cursor measurement scale. This command is only
applicable when ratio cursors are on.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:USE {CURrent|HALFgrat|FIVEdivs}
Related Commands
Arguments
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
CURrent sets the H Bar measurement scale so that 0% is the current position of the
lowest H Bar cursor and 100% is the current position of the highest H Bar cursor.
HALFgrat resets the H bar measurement scale to half the number of divisions
(five for some models and four for others) so that 25% is the current position of
the lowest H Bar cursor and 75% is the current position of the highest H Bar.
FIVEdivs sets H Bar measurement scale so that five screen major divisions is
100%, where 0% is –2.5 divisions and 100% is +2.5 divisions from the center
horizontal graticule.
Examples
CURSOR:HBARS:USE FIVEDIVS sets the H Bar measurement scale so that
5 screen major divisions equals 100%.
CURSor:MODe
Sets or returns whether the two cursors move linked together in unison or
separately. This applies to the Waveform cursors display mode.
Conditions
Group
2-114
This command is only applicable when waveform cursors are displayed.
Cursor
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
CURSor:MODe {TRACk|INDependent}
CURSor:MODe?
TRACk ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together. For cursor 1
adjustments, this ties the movement of the two cursors together; however, cursor 2
continues to move independently of cursor 1.
INDependent allows independent adjustment of the two cursors.
Examples
CURSOR:MODE TRACK specifies that the cursor positions move in unison.
CURSOR:MODE? might return :CURSOR:MODE TRACK indicating that the two
cursors move in unison.
CURSor:VBArs? (Query Only)
Returns the current settings for the vertical bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs?
Examples
CURSOR:VBARS? might return the following vertical bar settings
:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 1.0000E-06;POSITION2
9.0000E-06
CURSor:VBArs:ALTERNATE<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the alternate readout for the waveform (Vbar) cursors specified by <x>.
This alternate readout is in effect for a bus waveform.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:ALTERNATE<x>?
Arguments
X = 1 specifies vertical bar cursor 1.
X = 2 specifies vertical bar cursor 2.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-115
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)
Returns the horizontal difference between the two vertical bar cursors. The units
are specified by the CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command.
This is equivalent to watching the cursor readout in the display while using the
appropriate cursor mode.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
<NR3>
CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA? might return :CURSOR:VBARS:DELTa 1.0640E+00
indicating that the time between the vertical bar cursors is 1.064 s.
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the horizontal value of the specified vertical bar ticks for cursor <x>.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>?
Related Commands
Arguments
2-116
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
<x> specifies the cursor. Valid values are 1 and 2.
Returns
<NR3> indicates the value of one of the tics. The units are specified by the
Examples
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS2? might return CURSOR:VBARS:HPOS2 100E-3,
indicating that the value of one vertical bar tick.
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
Sets or returns the horizontal position for the specified vertical bar cursor. The
cursor is specified by <x>, which can be 1 or 2. Values are with respect to trigger
position or the zero reference point for the designated waveform (if horizontal
units are not set to time). Use the CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command to specify
units.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>?
Related Commands
Arguments
Returns
Examples
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
<NR3> specifies the cursor position.
A floating point value with an exponent.
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION2 9.00E-6 positions the cursor2 vertical bar cursor
at 9 ms.
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION1? this command might return
:CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1 1.0000E-06 indicating that the
cursor1 vertical bar is positioned at 1 μs.
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
Sets or returns the units for the vertical bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts {SEConds|HERtz|DEGrees|PERcent}
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?
Arguments
SEConds sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the time domain (seconds).
HERtz sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the frequency domain (Hertz).
DEGrees sets the units to degrees for use with an XY display.
PERcent sets the units to percent for use with ratio cursors.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-117
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Returns
Examples
SECONDS, HERTZ, DEGREES, or PERCENT, depending on the current vertical bar
cursor units.
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS HERtz sets the units of the VBArs cursors to 1/seconds.
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS? might return :CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS
indicating that the units for the vertical bar cursor are currently set to seconds.
CURSor:VBArs:USE (No Query Form)
Sets the vertical bar cursor measurement scale.
Conditions
This command is only applicable when ratio cursors are on.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:USE {CURrent|HALFgrat|FIVEdivs}
Related Commands
Arguments
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
CURrent sets the V Bar measurement scale so that 0% is the current position of
the left-most V Bar cursor and 100% is the current position of the right-most
V Bar cursor.
HALFgrat resets the V Bar measurement scale to half the number of divisions
(five for some models and four for others) so that 25% is the current position of
the lowest V Bar cursor and 75% is the current position of the highest V Bar.
FIVEdivs sets V Bar measurement scale so that five screen major divisions is
100%, where 0% is –2.5 divisions and 100% is +2.5 divisions from the center
vertical graticule.
Examples
CURSOR:VBARS:USE CURRENT sets the V Bar measurement scale to use the
current cursor positions as 0% and 100% of scale if units are set to %.
CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa? (Query Only)
Returns the vertical difference between the two vertical bar cursor ticks.
Group
2-118
Cursor
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa?
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
<NR3> indicates the horizontal difference between the two vertical bar cursors.
CURSOR:VBARS:VDELTA? might return CURSOR:VBARS:VDELTA 1.064E+0,
indicating that the vertical difference between the vertical bar cursors ticks is
1.064 units.
CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:DELta? (Query Only)
Returns the difference between the cursors X radius and the cursor Y radius (ΔY¸
ΔX). The ratio is calculated as (cursor 2 Y - cursor 1 Y) ÷ (cursor 2 X - cursor 1 X).
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:DELta?
CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:POSITION<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the polar radius for the specified cursor, where x can be either 1 or 2.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:POSITION<x>?
CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns the polar radius units.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:UNIts?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-119
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:DELta? (Query Only)
Returns the XY cursor polar angle delta.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:DELta?
CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:POSITION<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the cursor X or cursor Y polar coordinate, where x is either 1 or 2.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:POSITION<x>?
CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns the cursor coordinate units.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:UNIts?
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:DELta? (Query Only)
Returns the difference between the cursors X position and cursor Y position. The
ΔX × ΔY value is calculated as (X2 – X1) × (Y2 – Y1).
2-120
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:DELta?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:POSITION<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the position of the X or Y cursor used to calculate the X × Y cursor
measurement, Position 1 = (X1 × Y1); Position 2 = (X2 × Y2). The cursor is
specified by x, which can be 1 or 2.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:POSITION<x>?
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns the XY cursor product units.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:UNIts?
CURSor:XY:RATIO:DELta? (Query Only)
Returns the ratio of the difference between the cursors X position and cursor Y
position (ΔY¸ ΔX). The ratio is calculated as (Y2 – Y1) / (X2 – X1).
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:RATIO:DELta?
CURSor:XY:RATIO:POSITION<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the X (horizontal) or Y (vertical) position for the specified cursor, which
can be 1 (X) or 2 (Y). The ratio is calculated as Position 1 = (Y1/X1); Position
2 = (Y2/X2).
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:RATIO:POSITION<x>?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-121
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CURSor:XY:RATIO:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns the cursor X and cursor Y units for the ratio measurement.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:RATIO:UNIts?
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:DELta? (Query Only)
Returns the cursor X delta value in rectangular coordinates.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:DELta?
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:POSITION<x>
Sets or returns the X rectangular coordinate for cursor 1 or cursor 2. Cursors are
specified by x and can be either 1 or 2.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:POSITION<x> <NR3>
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:POSITION<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> is the coordinate in volts.
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns the cursor X rectangular units.
2-122
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:UNIts?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:DELta? (Query Only)
Returns The cursor Y delta value in rectangular coordinates.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:DELta?
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:POSITION<x>
Sets or returns the Y rectangular coordinate for cursor 1 or cursor 2. The cursor
is specified by x.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:POSITION<x> <NR3>
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:POSITION<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> is the coordinate in volts.
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns the cursor Y rectangular units.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:UNIts?
CURVe
Transfers waveform data to and from the oscilloscope in binary or ASCII format.
Each waveform transferred includes a waveform preamble which contains the
data format, scale, and associated information.
For analog waveforms, the CURVe? query transfers data from the oscilloscope.
The data source is specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The first and last
data points are specified by the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
The oscilloscope returns data from the last acquisition if the source is a channel
waveform that is being previewed. The data does not reflect the acquisition
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-123
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
preview parameters. The user should always follow acquisition parameter changes
with a single sequence OPC command prior to CURVe? to ensure the return data
reflects the new acquisition parameters.
The CURVe command transfers waveform data to the oscilloscope. The data
is stored in the reference memory location specified by DATa:DESTination,
starting with the data point specified by DATa:STARt. Only one waveform can
be transferred at a time. The waveform will only be displayed if the reference
is displayed.
For CURVe queries, first set DATa:RESOlution and DATa:COMPosition
appropriately. For MSO/DPO2000/B math FFT CURVe queries, set them to:
DATA:RESOLUTION FULL and DATA:COMPOSITION SINGULAR_YT.
For more information, see: Appendix B: Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B
and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instruments.
(See page B-1.)
NOTE. Transferring large volumes of data to or from the oscilloscope takes time.
ASCII waveform transfer is very inefficient.
NOTE. For MSO models, reduced resolution waveform data is not available for
the digital channels.
S
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
CURVe {<Block>|<asc curve>}
CURVe?
Related Commands
Arguments
DATa:COMPositionDATa:DESTination, DATa:RESOlutionDATa:SOUrce,
DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, WFMInpre?, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre?,
HEADer
<Block> is the waveform data in binary format. The waveform is formatted as:
#<x><yyy><data><newline>, where:
<x> is the number of y bytes. For example, if <yyy>=500, then <x>=3)
<yyy> is the number of bytes to transfer if samples are one or two bytes
wide. Use the WFMInpre:BYT_Nr command to set the width for waveforms
transferred into the oscilloscope. Use WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr to set the width
for waveforms transferred out from the oscilloscope.
2-124
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
<data> is the curve data.
<newline> is a single byte new line character at the end of the data.
<asc curve> is the waveform data in ASCII format. The format for ASCII data
is <NR1> [,<NR1>...], where each <NR1> represents a data point.
Examples
CURVE? with ASCII encoding, start and stop of 1 and 10 respectively, and a width
set to 1 might return :CURVE 61,62,61,60,60,-59,-59,-58,-58,-59
NOTE. Curve data is transferred from the oscilloscope asynchronously, depending
on the length of the curve record. Such transfers may require several seconds
to complete. During this period, the oscilloscope will not respond to the user
controls. You can interrupt these asynchronous data transfers by sending a device
clear message to the oscilloscope or by interrupting the query with another
command or query. In order to verify that curve data has been completely
transferred, it is recommended that you follow such queries with an *ESR?
query to verify there are no error bits set. You can also check the event queue to
determine the cause of the error. If the error was caused by an interrupted query,
then the asynchronous data transfer was not complete when the *ESR? query was
sent. In such cases, it may be necessary to increase the program's time-out value
to ensure that all data is transferred and read.
DATa
Sets or returns the format and location of waveform data transferred with the
CURVe? query or CURVe command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa {INIT|SNAp}
DATa?
Related Commands
Arguments
CURVe, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, DATa:ENCdg, WFMInpre:NR_Pt,
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults except for
DATa:STOP, which is set to the current acquisition record length.
SNAp sets DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP to match the current waveform cursor
positions.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-125
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
DATA? might return :DATA:DESTINATION REF1:ENCDG RIBINARY;SOURCE
CH1;START 1;STOP 500;WIDTH 1
DATA INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults.
DATa:COMPosition
Sets or returns the type of data that the CURVe? query returns.
NOTE. For more information on querying waveform data, see Appendix B:
Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instruments.)
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa:COMPosition {COMPOSITE_YT|COMPOSITE_ENV|SINGULAR_YT}
DATa:COMPosition?
Arguments
COMPOSITE_YT is of native width 8-bits and is written as 8-bit data in ISF files
and REF waveforms. The data can be queried as 1- or 2-byte data in CURVe?
queries by setting the data width to 1 or 2.
COMPOSITE_ENV is min/max pair data. Its native width is 8-bits and is written as
8-bit data in ISF files and REF waveforms. The data can be queried as 1- or 2byte data in CURVe? queries by setting the data width to 1 or 2.
SINGULAR_YT is 16-bit data which originates as averaged acquired data or math
data. It is written to ISF files and REF waveforms as 16-bit data. The data can be
queried as 1- or 2- byte data in CURVe? queries by setting the data width to 1 or 2.
Examples
DATA:COMPOSITION? might return :DATA:COMPOSITION SINGULAR_YT
indicating that the data type returned by the CURVe? query is singular waveform.
DATA:COMPOSITIONCOMPOSITE_YT sets the return data type of CURVe? query
as composite waveform.
DATa:COMPosition:AVAILable? (Query Only)
Lists the waveform data types that are available for return from the instrument
under the current instrument settings.
Group
2-126
Waveform Transfer
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Returns
DATa:COMPosition:AVAILable?
COMPOSITE_YT for sample data.
COMPOSITE_ENV for envelope or peak-detect data.
SINGULAR_YT for sample data.
Examples
DATA:COMPOSITION:AVAILABLE? might return
DATA:COMPOSITION:AVAILABLE COMPOSITE_YT indicating that the waveform
data type.
DATa:DESTination
Sets or returns the reference memory location for storing waveform data
transferred into the oscilloscope by the CURVe command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa:DESTination REF<x>
DATa:DESTination?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CURVe
REF<x> is the reference location where the waveform will be stored.
DATA:DESTINATION? might return :DATA:DESTINATION REF2 indicating
that reference 2is the currently selected reference memory location for incoming
waveform data. DATA:DESTINATION REF1 indicates that incoming waveform
data be stored in reference 1.
DATa:ENCdg
Sets or returns the format of outgoing waveform data. This command
is equivalent to setting WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,
andWFMInpre:FILTERFreq. Setting the DATa:ENGdg value causes the
corresponding WFMOutpre values to be updated and conversely.
NOTE. This command and query does not apply to incoming waveform data.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-127
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa:ENCdg
{ASCIi|FAStest|RIBinary|RPBinary|SRIbinary|SRPbinary}
DATa:ENCdg?
Related Commands
Arguments
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, WFMInpre:FILTERFreq
ASCIi specifies the ASCII representation for waveform data points. If ASCII is
the value, then :BN_Fmt and :BYT_Or are ignored.
FAStest specifies that the data be sent in the fastest possible manner consistent
with maintaining accuracy and is interpreted with respect to the waveform
specified by DATa:SOUrce.
RIBinary specifies signed integer data point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first.
When :BYT_Nr is 1, the range is from –128 through 127. When :BYT_Nr is 2,
the range is from –32,768 through 32,767. Center screen is 0 (zero). The upper
limit is the top of the screen and the lower limit is the bottom of the screen. This
is the default argument.
RPBinary specifies the positive integer data-point representation, with the most
significant byte transferred first.
When :BYT_Nr is 1, the range from 0 through 255. When :BYT_Nr is 2, the
range is from 0 to 65,535. The center of the screen is 127. The upper limit is the
top of the screen and the lower limit is the bottom of the screen.
SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs.
SRPbinary is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to PCs.
Table 2-36: DATa and WFMOutpre Parameter Settings
2-128
WFMOutpre Settings
DATa:ENCdg
Setting
:ENCdg
:BN_Fmt
:BYT_Or
:BYT_NR
ASCii
ASC
N/A
N/A
1,2
FAStest
BIN
RI
MSB
1,2
RIBinary
BIN
RI
MSB
1,2
RPBinary
BIN
RP
MSB
1,2
SRIbinary
BIN
RI
LSB
1,2
SRPbinary
BIN
RP
LSB
1,2
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
DATA:ENCDG? might return :DATa:ENCDG SRPBINARY for the format of the
outgoing waveform data.
DATA:ENCDG RPBinary sets the data encoding format to be a positive integer
where the most significant byte is transferred first.
DATa:RESOlution
Sets or returns whether the CURVe? query returns full resolution records
(acquired data) or reduced resolution records (filtered/displayed data).
NOTE. For more information on querying waveform data, see Appendix B:
Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instruments.)
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa:RESOlution {FULL|REDUced}
DATa:RESOlution?
Arguments
FULL sets the instrument to return the full undecimated record acquired by the
instrument. The full resolution records are not subject to the effects of FilterVu.
Full resolution record lengths are 100,000, 125,000, 1,000,000 or 1,250,000
points.
REDUced sets the instrument to return short waveforms that are decimated from
the full acquisition record. Reduced records are subject to the low pass filtering
effects of FilterVu settings. Reduced record lengths range from 800 to 6250
points, depending on the acquisition settings.
Examples
DATA:RESOLUTION? might return :DATA:RESOLUTION: FULL indicating that
the CURVe? query returns full resolution records (acquired data).
DATA:RESOLUTIONREDUCED sets the CURVe? returns to reduced resolution
records.
DATa:SOUrce
Sets or returns the location of the waveform data transferred from the oscilloscope
by the CURVe? query.
NOTE. For more information on querying waveform data, see Appendix B:
Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instruments.)
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-129
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH|REF1|REF2|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
DATa:SOUrce?
Related Commands
Arguments
CURVe
CH1–CH4 specifies which analog channel data will be transferred from the
oscilloscope to the controller, channels 1 through 4.
MATH specifies that the Math waveform data will be transferred from the
oscilloscope to the controller.
REF1–REF2 specifies which Reference waveform data will be transferred from
the oscilloscope to the controller, waveforms, 1 through 4.
D0–D15 specifies that the returned waveform data is packaged as 4 bytes per
sample, representing the states of all digital channels (D0–D15) and the logic
states of the analog channels (Ch1–Ch4). When the :DATA:SOURCE is set to
DIGITAL, the :DATA:WIDTH is automatically set to 4.
The format of the returned 4- byte (32 bit) data is as follows:
2-130
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
DATA:SOURCE? might return :DATA:SOURCE REF2 indicating that the source for
the waveform data which is transferred using a CURVe? query is reference 2.
DATA:SOURCE CH1 specifies that the CH1 waveform will be transferred in the
next CURVe? query.
DATa:STARt
Sets or returns the starting data point for incoming or outgoing waveform transfer.
This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to and from the
oscilloscope.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-131
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa:STARt <NR1>
DATa:STARt?
Related Commands
Arguments
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STOP, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
<NR1> is the first data point that will be transferred, which ranges from 1 to the
record length. Data will be transferred from <NR1> to DATa:STOP or the record
length, whichever is less. If <NR1> is greater than the record length, the last
data point in the record is transferred.
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are order independent. When DATa:STOP is
greater than DATa:STARt, the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE?
query.
Examples
DATA:START? might return :DATA:START 214 indicating that data point 214 is
the first waveform data point that will be transferred.
DATA:START 10 specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point 10.
DATa:STOP
Sets or returns the last data point that will be transferred when using the CURVe?
query. This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms from the
oscilloscope.
Changes to the record length value are not automatically reflected in the
DATa:STOP value. As record length is varied, the DATa:STOP value must be
explicitly changed to ensure the entire record is transmitted. In other words, curve
results will not automatically and correctly reflect increases in record length if
the distance from DATa:STARt to DATa:STOP stays smaller than the increased
record length.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa:STOP <NR1>
DATa:STOP?
Related Commands
2-132
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
<NR1> is the last data point that will be transferred, which ranges from 1 to
the record length. If <NR1> is greater than the record length, then data will be
transferred up to the record length. If both DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are
greater than the record length, the last data point in the record is returned.
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are order independent. When DATa:STOP is less
than DATa:STARt, the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE? query.
If you always want to transfer complete waveforms, set DATa:STARt to 1 and
DATa:STOP to the maximum record length, or larger.
Examples
DATA:STOP? might return :DATA:STOP 14900 indicating that 14900 is the last
waveform data point that will be transferred.
DATA:STOP 15000 specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point
15000.
DATa:WIDth
Sets or returns the number of bytes per data point in the waveform transferred
using the CURVe command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa:WIDth <NR1>
DATa:WIDth?
Related Commands
Arguments
CURVe
<NR1> = 1 specifies that there is 1 byte (8 bits) per point.
<NR1> = 2 specifies that there are 2 bytes (16 bits) per point. This format is useful
for AVErage waveforms.
Examples
DATA:WIDTH 1 sets the data width to 1 byte per data point for CURVe data.
DATE
Sets or returns the date the oscilloscope displays.
Group
Miscellaneous
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-133
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DATE <QString>
DATE?
TIME
<QString> is a date in the form "yyyy-mm-dd" where yyyy refers to a four-digit
year number, mm refers to a two-digit month number from 01 to 12, and dd refers
to a two-digit day number in the month.
DATE "2006-01-24" specifies that the date is set to January 24, 2006.
DATE? might return :DATE 2006-01-24 indicating that the current date is set to
January 24, 2006.
*DDT
Allows you to specify a command or a list of commands that execute when the
oscilloscope receives a *TRG command or the GET IEEE488.2 interface message.
Define Device Trigger (*DDT) is a special alias that the *TRG command uses.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*DDT {<Block>|<QString>}
*DDT?
Related Commands
Arguments
ALIas, *TRG
<Block> is a complete sequence of program messages. The messages can contain
only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all
rules for concatenating commands. The sequence must be less than or equal to 80
characters. The format of this argument is always returned as a query.
<QString> is a complete sequence of program messages. The messages can
contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must
follow all rules for concatenating commands. The sequence must be less than or
equal to 80 characters.
Examples
2-134
*DDT #OACQUIRE:STATE RUN specifies that the acquisition system will be
started each time a *TRG command is sent.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
DESE
Sets or returns the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER). The
DESER is the mask that determines whether events are reported to the Standard
Event Status Register (SESR), and entered into the Event Queue. For a detailed
discussion of the use of these registers, see Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
DESE <NR1>
DESE?
Related Commands
Arguments
*CLS, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
<NR1> sets the binary bits of the DESER according to this value, which ranges
from 1 through 255. For example, DESE 209 sets the DESER to the binary value
11010001 (that is, the most significant bit in the register is set to 1, the next most
significant bit to 1, the next bit to 0, etc.).
The power-on default for DESER is all bits set if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the
DESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.
NOTE. Setting the DESER and ESER to the same value allows only those codes
to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of the
Status Byte Register. Use the *ESE command to set the ESER.
Examples
DESE 209 sets the DESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ,
EXE and OPC bits.
DESE? might return :DESE 186, showing that the DESER contains the binary
value 10111010.
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion
Sets the self-test loop option.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion {ALWAYS|FAIL|ONFAIL|ONCE|NTIMES}
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-135
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
ALWAYS continues looping until the self tests (diagnostics) are stopped via the
front panel or by an oscilloscope command.
FAIL causes looping until the first self test (diagnostic) failure or until self tests
(diagnostics) are stopped.
ONFAIL causes looping on a specific test group as long as a FAIL status is
returned from the test.
ONCE executes self test (diagnostics test) sequence once.
NTIMES runs “n” number of loops.
Examples
DIAG:LOOP:OPTION ONCE runs one loop of self tests.
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes
Sets the self-test loop option to run N times.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes <NR1>
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes?
Arguments
<NR1> is the number of self-test loops.
Examples
DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES 3 sets the self-test loop to run three times.
DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES? might return :DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES 5,
indicating that the self-test loop is set to run five times.
DIAg:LOOP:STOP (No Query Form)
Stops the self-test at the end of the current loop.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:LOOP:STOP
Examples
2-136
DIAG:LOOP:STOP stops the self test at the end of the current loop.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? (Query Only)
Returns the pass/fail status from the last self-test sequence execution. Use this
query to determine which test(s) has failed.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?
Related Commands
Returns
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?
PASS indicates that all of the selected self (diagnostic) tests have passed.
FAIL indicates that at least one of the selected self (diagnostic) tests has failed.
Examples
DIAG:RESULT:FLAG? returns either DIAG:RESULT:FLAG PASS or FAIL.
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? (Query Only)
Returns the internal results log from the last self-test sequence execution. The
list contains all modules and module interfaces that were tested along with the
pass/fail status of each.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?
Related Commands
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?
Returns
<QString> in the following format:
<Status>--<Module name>[,<Status>--<Module name>...]
Examples
DIAG:RESULT:LOG? might return :DIAG:RESULT:LOG "NOT RUN--CPU,NOT
RUN--DISPLAY,NOT RUN--FPANEL,NOT RUN--IO,NOT RUN--ACQ,NOT
RUN--RO M,NOT RUN--APPKEY"
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-137
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
DIAg:SELect (No Query Form)
Sets the type of diagnostics grouping.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:SELect {ALL|APPKey|CPU|DISplay|FPAnel|IO|ROM|ACQ}
Arguments
ALL runs all diagnostic groups.
APPKey runs just the application key diagnostic group.
CPU runs just the CPU diagnostic group.
DISplay runs just the display circuit diagnostic group.
FPAnel runs just the front panel diagnostic group.
IO runs just the IO board diagnostic group.
ROM runs just the IO board diagnostic group.
ACQ runs just the acquisition system diagnostic group.
DIAg:SELect:<function> (No Query Form)
Runs self-tests on the specified system subsystem.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:SELect:<function>
Arguments
<function> specifies a single oscilloscope subsystem on which to run self tests
(diagnostics). Valid values are:
ACQ tests the acquisition system.
APPKey tests the application keys.
CPU tests the CPU.
DISplay tests the display.
FPAnel tests the front panel controls.
IO tests the IO ports.
ROM tests the system read only memory.
2-138
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
DIAG:SELECT:CPU sets the oscilloscope to run just CPU tests.
DIAg:STATE (No Query Form)
This command starts or stops the oscilloscope self-test. Depending on the
argument, self-test capabilities are either turned on or off.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:STATE {EXECute|ABORt}
Arguments
EXECute starts diagnostics.
ABORt stops diagnostics at the end of the current loop.
Examples
DIAG:STATE EXECute starts diagnostics.
DISplay? (Query Only)
Returns the current display settings.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay?
DISplay:CLOCk
Sets or returns whether the oscilloscope displays the date and time. The query
form of this command returns an ON (1) or an OFF (0).
NOTE. For the MSO/DPO2000/B series, the enumerations enable control of the
date/time display. The query form will return 0 when the control is set to NONe or
OFF and will return 1 when the control is set to DATETIME or ON.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:CLOCk {DATEOnly|TIMEOnly|DATETIME|NONe|ON|OFF|<NR1>}
DISplay:CLOCk?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-139
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
DATE, TIME
DATEOnly enables the display of date.
TIMEOnly enables the display of time.
DATETIME or ON enables the display of both date and time.
NONe or OFF disables the display of date and time.
<NR1> = 0 disables the display of date and time; any other value enables the
display of date and time.
Examples
DISPLAY:CLOCK ON enables display of date and time.
DISPLAY:CLOCK? might return :DISPLAY:CLOCK 1 indicating that the display
of date and time is currently enabled.
DISplay:DIGital:HEIght
Sets or returns the number of available digital waveform position slots.
NOTE. If the number of live digital channels exceeds the number of slots, their
height is reduced to a smaller size, allowing all digital channels to be displayed.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:DIGital:HEIght {SMAll|MEDium|LARge}
DISplay:DIGital:HEIght?
Arguments
SMAll sets the height to 40.
MEDium sets the height to 20.
LARge sets the height to 10.
DISplay:FORMat
Sets or returns the display format.
Group
2-140
Display
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
DISplay:FORMat {YT|XY}
DISplay:FORMat?
YT sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is the default mode.
XY argument displays one waveform against another. Selecting one source causes
its corresponding source to be implicitly selected, producing a single trace from
the two input waveforms.
Examples
DISPLAY:FORMAT XY sets the display format to XY.
DISPLAY:FORMAT? might return DISPLAY:FORMAT YT indicating that the
display format is YT.
DISplay:GLITch
Controls the display of the glitch capture background of the waveform. Set the
intensity with DISplay:INTENSITy:GLITch.
Group
FilterVu
Syntax
DISplay:GLITch {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
DISplay:GLITch?
Related Commands
Arguments
DISplay:INTENSITy:GLITch
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 turns on the glitch capture waveform display.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the glitch capture waveform display.
Examples
DISPLAY:GLITCH? might return DISPLAY:GLITCH 1 indicating that there is
glitch capture waveform display.
DISPLAY:GLITCH OFF turns off the glitch capture waveform display.
DISplay:GRAticule
Selects or queries the type of graticule the oscilloscope displays.
Group
Display
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-141
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
DISplay:GRAticule {CROSSHair|FRAme|FULl|GRId}
DISplay:GRAticule?
CROSSHair specifies a frame and cross hairs.
FRAme specifies a frame only.
FULl specifies a frame, a grid and cross hairs.
GRId specifies a frame and grid only.
Examples
DISPLAY:GRATICULE FRAme sets the graticule type to display the frame only.
DISPLAY:GRATICULE? might return :DISPLAY:GRATICULE FULL indicating
that all graticule elements are selected.
DISplay:INTENSITy? (Query Only)
Returns the display intensity settings.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:INTENSITy?
Examples
DISPLAY:INTENSITY? might return :DISPLAY:INTEnsITY:WAVEFORM
35;GRATICULE 35;BACKLIGHT HIGH;GLITCH CAPTURE BACKGROUND
INTENSITY 55
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight
Sets and returns the waveform backlight intensity settings.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight {LOW|MEDium|HIGH}
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight?
Examples
2-142
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT? might return
:DISPLAY:INTEnsITY:BACKLIGHT HIGH
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
DISplay:INTENSITy:GLITch
Sets the intensity of the glitch capture background of the waveform display. The
intensity can be set from 5 to 100% in increments of 5%. The intensity of the glitch
capture background can only be adjusted when the glitch capture background is
displayed and FilterVu filtering is in use. Otherwise, the intensity is fixed.
Use DISplay:GLITch to turn the glitch capture background ON and OFF.
Use FILTERVu:FREQuency to enable filtering. Filtering is enabled if the
frequency chosen is different than the oscilloscope's full bandwidth.
Group
FilterVu
Syntax
DISplay:INTENSITy:GLITch {<NR1>}
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> is the glitch intensity and ranges from 5 to 100 percent.
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:GLITCH ? might return DISPLAY:INTENSITY:GLITCH
5 indicating that the glitch intensity is 5%.
DISplay:INTENSITy:GRAticule
Sets and returns the display graticule intensity settings.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:INTENSITy:GRAticule <NR1>
DISplay:INTENSITy:GRAticule?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> is the graticule intensity and ranges from 0 to 100 percent.
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:GRATICULE? might return
DISPLAY:INTEnsITY:GRATICULE 30
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform
Sets and returns the display waveform intensity settings.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-143
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform <NR1>
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> is the waveform intensity and ranges from 1 to 100 percent.
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM? might return
DISPLAY:INTEnsITY:WAVEFORM 60
as the intensity of the waveforms.
DISplay:PERSistence
Sets or returns the display persistence. This affects the display only.
NOTE. When Persistence is set to Infinite, it does not mean that the brightness
of any pixel should never decrease. The brightness of a pixel is proportionally
dependent on the ratio between its intensity (which does NOT decrease at Infinite
Persistence) and the maximum value of intensity of any pixel on the screen. If a
particular pixel get hit less often than others, its brightness will decrease over
time. It will become less bright relative to the pixels that get hit often.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:PERSistence {<NR3>|CLEAR|AUTO|MINImum|INFInite}
DISplay:PERSistence?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the time of the persistence.
CLEAR resets the persist time count down and clears the display of acquired points.
INFInite displays waveform points until a control change resets the acquisition
system. When persistence is set to infinite, it does not mean that the brightness
of any pixel should never decrease. The brightness of a pixel is proportionally
dependent on the ratio between its intensity, which does NOT decrease at infinite
persistence, and the maximum value of intensity of any pixel on the screen. Thus,
if a particular pixel gets hit less often than others, its brightness will decrease over
time. It will become less bright relative to the pixels that get hit often.
AUTO specifies that the oscilloscope automatically determines the
best waveform persistence based on the value of waveform intensity
(DISPLAY:INTEnsITY:WAVEFORM)
2-144
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MINImum specifies that the waveform persistence is set to the minimum value
of 0.0E0.
Examples
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE 3 specifies that the waveform points are displayed
fading for 3 seconds before they completely disappear.
D<x>
Sets or returns parameters for digital channel <x>, where x is the channel number.
Group
MSO
Syntax
D<x>
D<x>:LABel
Sets or returns the waveform label for digital channel <x>, where x is the channel
number.
Group
MSO
Syntax
D<x>:LABel <Qstring>
D<x>:LABel?
Arguments
Examples
<Qstring> is an alpha-numeric string of text, enclosed in quotes, that contains
the text label information for the digital channel <x> waveform. The text string is
limited to 30 characters.
D4:LABEL? might return :D4:LABEL “Clk Wfm 4”.
D<x>:POSition
Sets or returns the vertical position for digital channel <x>, where x is the channel
number.
NOTE. Unlike analog channels, which use the center baseline as the zero point,
digital channels use the bottom logic level as the zero point. Because of the slot
model used to describe digital channel position, the oscilloscope rounds off
divisions to the nearest slot.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-145
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
MSO
Syntax
D<x>:POSition <NR3>
D<x>:POSition?
Arguments
<NR3> is the position of the digital channel in slot units. Use the oscilloscope
front-panel controls to place the channel; then query the channel to obtain an
exact value for the position.
D<x>:THREshold
Sets or returns the logical threshold for digital channel <x>, where x is the
channel number.
Group
MSO
Syntax
D<x>:THREshold {ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
D<x>:THREshold?
Arguments
ECL sets the digital threshold for channel <x> to a preset ECL high level of –1.3V.
TTL sets the digital threshold for channel <x> to a preset TTL high level of 1.4V.
<NR3> specifies the digital threshold for channel <x> in volts.
Examples
D5:THRESHOLD ECL sets the threshold for D5 digital channel to ECL levels.
D14:threshold? might return :D14:THRESHOLD 1.2500 indicating that the
threshold level for the D14 digital channel is 1.25 volts.
*ESE
Sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register (ESER). The ESER
prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte Register (STB). For a
detailed discussion on how to use registers, see Registers.
2-146
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*ESE <NR1>
*ESE?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
*CLS, DESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
<NR1> specifies the binary bits of the ESER according to this value, which ranges
from 0 through 255.
The power-on default for the ESER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the ESER
maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.
NOTE. Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same values allows only those
codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of
the Status Byte Register. Use the DESE command to set the DESER.
Examples
*ESE 209 sets the ESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ,
EXE, and OPC bits.
*ESE? might return 186, showing that the ESER contains the binary value
10111010.
*ESR? (Query Only)
Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register (SESR). *ESR? also
clears the SESR (reading the SESR clears it). For a detailed discussion on how
to use registers, see Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*ESR?
Related Commands
Examples
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
*ESR? might return 213, showing that the SESR contains the binary value
11010101.
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp
Sets or returns the network initialization search for a DHCP/BOOTP server.
Group
Ethernet
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-147
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp {ON|OFF}
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp?
ON enables the oscilloscope to search the network for a DHCP or BOOTP server
in order to automatically assign a dynamic IP address to the oscilloscope.
NOTE. Do not use DHCP/BOOTP searching if your oscilloscope has been
assigned a static address on a network. If you set this command to ON, the
DHCP/BOOTP search will delete or change your static IP address information.
OFF disables the oscilloscope to search the network for a DHCP or BOOTP server.
Examples
ETHERNET:DHCPBOOTP ON sets the oscilloscope to search for a DHCP or BOOTP
server and assign a dynamic IP address to the oscilloscope.
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress
Sets or returns the network Domain Name Server (Dns) IP address.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress <QString>
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is a standard IP address value, enclosed in quotes.
ETHERNET:DNS:IPADDRESS “128.196.13.352” sets the Dns IP address that
the oscilloscope uses to communicate with the network.
ETHERnet:DOMAINname
Sets or returns the network domain name.
2-148
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:DOMAINname <Qstring>
ETHERnet:DOMAINname?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is the network domain name, enclosed in quotes.
ETHERNET:DOMAINNAME “Alpha1.Mycorp.com” sets the domain name that
the oscilloscope uses to communicate with the network.
ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress? (Query Only)
Returns the Ethernet address value assigned to the oscilloscope. This is assigned
at the factory and can not be changed.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress?
Examples
ETHERNET:ENET:ADDRESS? returns an Ethernet address such as
08:00:11:01:02:03
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress
Sets or returns the remote interface gateway IP address.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress <QString>
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is a standard IP address value, enclosed in quotes.
ETHERNET:GATEWAY:IPADDRESS “128.143.16.1” sets the gateway IP
address.
ETHERnet:HTTPPort
Sets or returns the remote interface HTTP port value.
Group
Ethernet
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-149
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
ETHERnet:HTTPPort <QString>
ETHERnet:HTTPPort?
<QString> is an integer port number, enclosed in quotes.
NOTE. Consider the following if you are using the e*Scope™ control software. If
you don't enter a port address in the URL, then the ETHERnet:HTTPPort value
must be set to "80", which is the default port for HTTP protocol. If you use a
URL with a port address (for example: http://DPO2004-04WKL4:1234), the port
number is specified by the number after the colon. Set the ETHERnet:HTTPPort
value to this same number.
Examples
ETHERNET:HTTPPORT “80” sets the HTTP port value to 80.
ETHERnet:IPADDress
Sets or returns the IP address assigned to the oscilloscope.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:IPADDress <QString>
ETHERnet:IPADDress?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is a standard IP address value, enclosed in quotes.
ETHERNET:IPADDRESS “123.121.13.214” sets the oscilloscope's IP address.
ETHERnet:NAME
Sets or returns the network name assigned to the oscilloscope.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:NAME <QString>
ETHERnet:NAME?
Arguments
2-150
<QString> is the network name assigned to the oscilloscope, enclosed in quotes.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
ETHERNET:NAME “labscope1” sets the oscilloscope's network name.
ETHERnet:PASSWord
Sets or returns the HTTP Ethernet access password. If a password is set, the user
must enter the password before the user's Web browser can access the oscilloscope.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:PASSWord <new>
ETHERnet:PASSWord?
Arguments
Examples
<new> is a new password, enclosed in quotes.
ETHERNET:PASSWORD ”ZEN53” replaces the current Ethernet password with the
new password ZEN53.
ETHERNET:PASSWORD? might return :ETHERNET:PASSWORD “ZEN53”.
ETHERnet:PING (No Query Form)
Causes the oscilloscope to ping the gateway IP address.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:PING EXECute
Examples
ETHERNET:PING EXECUTE causes the oscilloscope to ping the gateway IP
address.
ETHERnet:PING:STATUS? (Query Only)
Returns the results from sending the ETHERnet:PING command to ping the
gateway IP address.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:PING:STATUS?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-151
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Returns
OK is returned if the computer at the gateway IP address answers.
NORESPOnsE is returned if the computer at the gateway IP address does not
answer.
INPROGRESS is returned if the ping operation is still executing.
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask
Sets or returns the remote interface subnet mask value.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask <QString>
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is the subnet mask value, enclosed in quotes.
ETHERNET:SUBNETMASK “255.255.255.0” sets the subnet mask value using
standard IP address notation format.
EVENT? (Query Only)
Returns an event code from the Event Queue that provides information about the
results of the last *ESR? read. EVENT? also removes the returned value from
the Event Queue.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
EVENT?
Related Commands
Examples
2-152
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
EVENT? might return :EVENT 110, showing that there was an error in a
command header. (See page 3-12, Messages.)
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
EVMsg? (Query Only)
Removes a single event code from the Event Queue that is associated with the
results of the last *ESR? read and returns the event code along with an explanatory
message. For information, see Event Handling.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
EVMsg?
Related Commands
ALLEv?
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, *SRE, *STB?
Returns
The event code and message in the following format:
<Event Code><Comma><QString>[<Event
Code><Comma><QString>...]<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>] where
<Command> is the command that caused the error and may be returned when a
command error is detected by the oscilloscope. As much of the command will be
returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit of the <Message>
and <Command> string combined. The command string is right-justified.
Examples
EVMSG? might return :EVMSG 110,"Command header error".
EVQty? (Query Only)
Returns the number of event codes in the Event Queue. This is useful when using
the ALLEv? query, which returns the exact number of events.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
EVQty?
Related Commands
Examples
ALLEv?, EVENT?, EVMsg?
EVQTY? might return :EVQTY 3, indicating that the number of event codes in
the Event Queue.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-153
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
FACtory (No Query Form)
Resets the oscilloscope to its factory default settings.
This command does the following:
Clears the Event Status Enable Register
Clears the Service Request Enable Register
Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 255
Purges all defined aliases
Enables all Command Headers
Sets the macro defined by *DDT to a "zero-length field"
Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations
This command does not reset the following:
Communication settings
Sate of the VXI-11 (Ethernet IEEE Std 488.2) interface.
Calibration data that affects device specifications
Protected user data
Stored settings
Power On Status Clear Flag
Oscilloscope password
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
FACtory
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
2-154
*PSC, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp
None
FACTORY resets the oscilloscope to its factory default settings.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
FILESystem
Returns the directory listing of the current working directory and the number of
bytes of free space available. This query is the same as the FILESystem:DIR?
query and the FILESystem:FREESpace? query.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem
FILESystem?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DELEte, FILESystem:DIR?,
FILESystem:REName
None
FILESYSTEM? might return
:FILESYSTEM:DIR "TEK00000.BMP","GLITCH1.PNG","TEMP.TMP",
"FILE1.WFM","FILE2.WFM", "MATH1.WFM"," REF1.WFM","REF2.WFM"
FILESystem:CWD
Sets or returns the current working directory (CWD) for FILESystem commands.
The default working directory is "E:/". Anytime you use this command to change
the directory, the directory that you specify is retained as the current working
directory until you either change the directory or you delete the directory. If
you delete the current working directory, the oscilloscope resets current working
directory to the default directory (E:) the next time the oscilloscope is powered on
or the next time you execute a file system command.
This command supports the permutations of file and directory names supported
by Microsoft Windows:
Relative path names; for example, "./temp"
Absolute path names; for example, "E:/Wfms"
Implied relative path names; for example "NEWFILE.TXT" becomes
"E:/TEKSCOPE/NEWFILE.TXT" if the current working directory is
"E:/TEKSCOPE"
Group
File System
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-155
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
FILESystem:CWD {<new working directory path>}
Arguments
<new working directory path> is a quoted string that defines the current
working; a directory name can have up to 8 characters with an extension of up to
3 characters.
Examples
FILESYSTEM:CWD "E:/TEKSCOPE/IMAGES" sets the current working directory
to images.
FILESYSTEM:CWD? might return
:FILESYSTEM:CWD "E:/TEKSCOPE/WAVEFORMS" indicating that the current
working directory is set to waveforms.
FILESystem:DELEte (No Query Form)
This command deletes a named file. If you specify a directory name, it will delete
the directory and all of its contents, the same as the RMDir command. You can
also specify the filename as *.* to delete all of the files in the current or specified
directory.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:DELEte <file path>
Related Commands
FILESystem:CWD
FILESystem:RMDir
Arguments
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.
The argument *.* will delete all files and subdirectories within the current
working directory.
Examples
FILESYSTEM:DELETE "NOT_MINE.SET" deletes the file named
NOT_MINE.SET from the current working directory.
FILESystem:DIR? (Query Only)
Returns a list of quoted strings. Each string contains the name of a file or directory
in the current working directory.
2-156
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:DIR?
Related Commands
Arguments
Returns
Examples
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:MKDir
None
FILESystem:DIR? returns a list of files and directories in the current working
directory.
FILESYSTEM:DIR? might return
:FILESYSTEM:DIR
"TEK00000.PNG","CANSETUP.SET","WFM1.ISF","MYIMAGES"
FILESystem:FORMat (No Query Form)
Formats a mass storage device. This command should be used with extreme
caution as it causes all data on the specified mass storage device to be lost.
Drive letters (e.g., E:) are case sensitive and must be upper case. For all other
FILESYSTEM commands, drives letters are not case sensitive. Example:
FILES:FORMAT "E:/" Formats the USB flash drive installed in the oscilloscope's
front panel USB port.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:FORMat
Arguments
Examples
<drive name> is a quoted string that defines the drive to format.
FILESYSTEM:FORMAT "E:/"
Formats the USB flash drive installed in the oscilloscope's front panel USB port.
FILESystem:FREESpace? (Query Only)
Returns the number of bytes of free space on the current drive.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-157
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:FREESpace?
Related Commands
FILESystem:FREESpace?, FILESystem:CWD
FILESystem:MKDir (No Query Form)
Creates a new folder.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:MKDir <directory path>
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DIR?
<directory path> is a quoted string that specifies the directory to create
FILESYSTEM:MKDIR "E:/NewDirectory" creates the directory named
NEWDIRECTORY at the root of the E drive.
These two commands create the directory MYNEWSUBDIRECTORY within the
existing directory mydirectory at the root of the E drive:
FILESYSTEM:CWD "E:/MyDirectory";:FILESYSTEM:MKDIR
"MyNewSubDirectory"
This, of course, assumes that E:/MYDIRECTORY already existed and was not
a read-only directory.
FILESystem:READFile (No Query Form)
Writes the contents of the specified file to the specified interface. If the file does
not exist or is not readable, an appropriate error event is posted.
2-158
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:READFile <QString>
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
FILESystem:CWD
Arguments
<QString> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file path is
Examples
FILESYSTEM:READFILE “E:/TEST_DATA/TEK00016CH1.CSV” reads the
content of the specified file, if the file exists and is readable, and sends the content
of the file to the current interface.
within the current working directory, specify only the file name.
FILESystem:REName (No Query Form)
Assigns a new name to an existing file.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:REName <old file path>,<new file path>
Related Commands
Arguments
FILESystem:CWD
<old file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.
<new file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.
Examples
FILESYSTEM:RENAME "E:/TEK00000.SET","D:/MYSETTING.SET" gives the
file named TEK00000.SET the new name of MYSETTING.SET. The file remains
in the root directory on the D drive.
FILESystem:RMDir (No Query Form)
Deletes a named directory. This command deletes the specified directory and all
of its contents. The directory must not be a read-only directory.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:RMDir <directory path>
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-159
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
FILESystem:CWD
<directory path> is a quoted string that defines the directory name and path.
If the file path is within the current working directory, you need only specify
the file name.
FILESYSTEM:RMDIR "E:/OldDirectory" removes the directory named
olddirectory from the root of the E drive.
FILESystem:WRITEFile (No Query Form)
Writes the specified block data to a file in the oscilloscope current working
directory. If the specified file does not exist or is not readable, an appropriate error
event is posted. The maximum length of the block data is 262144 bytes.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:WRITEFile <file path>, <data>
Related Commands
Arguments
FILESystem:CWD
<file path> is the quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the path
is within the current working directory, specify the file name only.
<data> can be either DEFINITE LENGTH encoding or INDEFINITE LENGTH
ARBITRARY BLOCK PROGRAM DATA encoding as described in IEEE488.2.
FILTERVu:FREQuency
Sets or queries the FilterVu frequency to the closest value supported with the
current acquisition settings.
Group
FilterVu
Syntax
FILTERVu:FREQuency?
FILTERVu:FREQuency <NR3>
Related Commands
2-160
FILTERVu:FREQuency:AVAILable?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the integer format for the current FilterVu frequency setting.
FILTERVU:FREQUENCY? might return FILTERVU:FREQUENCY 100000000
indicating that the FilterVu frequency is 100 MHz.
FILTERVu:FREQuency:AVAILable? (Query Only)
Returns a comma separated list of filter frequencies available based on the current
instrument settings. The source waveform (as specified by the DATa:SOUrce)
must be turned on for this query to generate a response.
Group
FilterVu
Syntax
FILTERVu:FREQuency:AVAILable?
Related Commands
Examples
FILTERVu:FREQuency
FILTERVU:FREQUENCY:AVAILABLE? might
return FILTERVU:FREQUENCY:AVAILABLE
200000000,150000000,75000000,42000000,21000000 indicating
that the available FilterVu frequencies are 200 MHz, 150 MHz, 75 MHz, 42
MHz and 21 MHz.
FPAnel:PRESS (No Query Form)
Simulates the action of pressing a specified front-panel button.
When the front panel is locked, the front-panel button and multipurpose
knob operations are suspended. The FPAnel:PRESS and the FPAnel:TURN
commands will also not work. You can work around this by using the appropriate
programmatic interface commands, instead of the front-panel commands.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
FPAnel:PRESS <button>
Arguments
<button> is the name of a front-panel button. Most of the argument names
associate directly with their front panel buttons. For example, AUTOSet is for
the Autoset button. The <button> enumeration arguments and their associations
with the front panel buttons are listed below.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-161
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Table 2-37: FPAnel:PRESS arguments
Argument
2-162
Description
ACQuire
Acquire button
SAVERecall
Save/Recall Menu button
MEASurement
Measure button
UTILity
Utility button
SEArch
Search button
TESt
Test button
MATh
M button
REF
R button
TRIGger
Trigger Menu button
CH1
Channel1 select button
CH2
Channel2 select button
CH3
Channel2 select button
CH4
Channel4 select button
B1
Bus1 select button
B2
Bus2 select button
D15D0
Digital channels select buttons
DEFaultsetup
Default Setup button
MENUOff
Menu Off button
SELect
Select button
FINe
Fine button
CURsor
Cursors button
INTensity
Intensity button
MARk
Mark Set/Clear button
PREv
Previous arrow button
PAUse
Play/pause button
NEXt
Next arrow button
RUnstop
Run/Stop button
SINGleseq
Single button
AUTOset
Autoset button
SETTO50
Set Trigger to 50%
FORCetrig
Force Trig button
HARDcopy
Hardcopy button
SAVEBUtton
Save button
BMENU1
Screen left-most bottom menu button
BMENU2
Screen bottom menu button
BMENU3
Screen bottom menu button
BMENU4
Screen bottom menu button
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Table 2-37: FPAnel:PRESS arguments (cont.)
Examples
Argument
Description
BMENU5
Screen bottom menu button
BMENU6
Screen bottom menu button
BMENU7
Screen right-most bottom menu button
RMENU1
Screen top-most side menu button
RMENU2
Screen side menu button
RMENU3
Screen side menu button
RMENU4
Screen side menu button
RMENU5
Screen bottom-most side menu button
MAGnify
Magnify (zoom) button (not the zoom/pan
knob)
FITERVu (2000/B series only)
FilterVu frequency button
WFMOnly (2000/B series only)
Waveform data button
FPANEL:PRESS AUTOSET executes the oscilloscope Autoset function.
FPAnel:TURN (No Query Form)
Simulates the action of turning a specified front-panel control knob.
When the front panel is locked, the front-panel button and multipurpose knob
operations are suspended. The FPAnel:PRESS and FPAnel:TURN commands
will also not work, and, they will not generate an error. You can work around
this by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands, instead of the
front-panel commands. For example, to set the trigger level to 50%, you could
use TRIGger:A SETLevel. To force a trigger, you could use TRIGger FORCe.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
FPAnel:TURN <knob>,[<n>]
Arguments
<knob> is the name of a rotating control.
A comma (,) separates the control knob argument from the numeric optional
rotation value argument. In the absence of the numeric rotation value argument,
the default is 1 (clockwise). You do not need a white space between the arguments
and the comma.
<n> represents the rotation direction and magnitude of rotation. Negative values
represent a counterclockwise knob rotation, and positive values represent a
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-163
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
clockwise rotation. The magnitude of <n> specifies the amount of the turn, where
<n> = 1 represents turning the knob one unit, <n> = 2 represents turning the knob
two units, <n> = 4 represents turning the knob four units, and so on. The range of
units depends on which front panel knob is specified.
Table 2-38: FPAnel:TURN arguments
Examples
Argument
Description
GPKNOB1
Multipurpose a knob
GPKNOB2
Multipurpose b knob
HORZPos
Horizontal Position knob
HORZScale
Horizontal Scale knob
PANKNOB1
Outer pan knob
TRIGLevel
Trigger Level knob
VERTPOS<n>
Vertical Position knob
VERTSCALE<n>
Vertical Scale knob
ZOOM
Inner zoom knob
FPANEL:TURN TRIGLEVEL,10 duplicates turning the front-panel Trigger Level
knob clockwise by 10 units.
GPIBUsb:ID? (Query Only)
Returns the identification string of the connected TEK-USB-488 adaptor module
and firmware version. If a TEK-USB-488.2 module is not connected, the system
returns “Not detected”.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
GPIBUsb:ID?
HARDCopy (No Query Form)
Sends a hard copy of the screen display to the currently active printer using the
current palette and layout settings.
2-164
Group
Hard Copy
Syntax
HARDCopy {START}
HARDCopy?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
*WAI, *CLS
START sends a block of data representing the current screen image to the requested
port. The data sent is in the image format specified by SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat,
and the compression level is controlled by whatever format has been selected
(BMP and TIFF are uncompressed, while PNG is compressed).
HARDCOPY initiates a screen copy to the active printer.
HARDCopy:INKSaver
Changes hard copy output to print traces and graticule on a white background
while retaining waveform color information (except for channel 1, which prints as
dark blue because yellow does not show up well and is difficult to see on a white
background). This option can significantly reduce print time and quantities of ink
required compared with WYSIWYG dark background images.
Group
Hard Copy
Syntax
HARDCopy:INKSaver?
Arguments
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 sets the ink saver mode on.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 sets the ink saver mode off.
Examples
HARDCOPY:INKSAVER ON will cause subsequent hard copy output to display the
screen on a white background.
HARDCopy:PREVIEW (No Query Form)
Displays a preview of the current screen contents with the InkSaver palette
applied.
Group
Hard Copy
Syntax
HARDCopy:PREVIEW {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-165
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 turns preview mode on.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns preview mode off.
HEADer
Sets or returns the Response Header Enable State that causes the oscilloscope to
either include or omit headers on query responses.
NOTE. This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands
(those starting with an asterisk); these commands never return headers. This
command does affect the Response Header Enable State of both the USBTMC and
VXI-11 interfaces. Refer to the Introduction for additional information.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
HEADer {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
HEADer?
Related Commands
Arguments
VERBose
OFF sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This causes the oscilloscope
to omit headers on query responses, so that only the argument is returned.
ON sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This causes the oscilloscope
to include headers on applicable query responses. You can then use the query
response as a command.
<NR1> = 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false; any other value sets
this state to true.
Examples
HEADER OFF specifies that the oscilloscope omits headers on query responses,
so that only the argument is returned.
HEADER? might return :HEADER 1 indicating that the oscilloscope is including
headers on applicable query responses.
HORizontal? (Query Only)
Returns all settings for the horizontal commands.
Group
2-166
Horizontal
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Examples
HORizontal?
HORIZONTAL? might return the following horizontal
settings :HORIZONTAL:DIGITAL:RECORDLENGTH:MAIN
100.0000E+3;:HORIZONTAL:DIGITAL:SAMPLERATE:MAIN
1.0000E+9;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS "s";:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SAMPLERATE 1.0000E+9;SCALE 4.0000E-6;RECORDLENGTH
100000;DELAY:MODE 1;TIME 0.0E+0
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH? (Query Only)
Returns the record length.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?
Related Commands
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
Examples
HORIZONTAL:ACQLENGTH? might return HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?
:HORIZONTAL:ACQLENGTH 1.0000E+6 indicating that the record length is
1 million points.
HORizontal:DELay:MODe
Sets or returns the horizontal delay mode.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:DELay:MODe {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
HORizontal:DELay:MODe?
Related Commands
Arguments
HORizontal:POSition
OFF sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off. This causes the HORizontal:POSition
command to horizontally position the waveform.
ON sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to on. This causes the HORizontal:DELay:
TIMe command to horizontally position the waveform.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-167
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
<NR1> = 0 sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off; any other value sets this mode
to on.
Examples
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE OFF sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off, allowing
the HORizontal:POSition command to horizontally position the waveform.
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE? might return HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE OFF
indicating that the HORizontal:POSition command horizontally positions the
waveform.
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe
Sets or returns the horizontal delay time. The amount of time the acquisition is
delayed depends on sample rate and record length.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe <NR3>
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe?
Arguments
Examples
NR3 is the delay in seconds.
HORizontal:DELay:TIME 0.3 sets the delay of acquisition data so that the
resulting waveform is centered 300 ms after the trigger occurs.
HORizontal:DIGital:RECOrdlength:MAIN? (Query Only)
Returns the record length of the main digital acquisition.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:DIGital:RECOrdlength:MAIN?
HORizontal:DIGital:SAMPLERate:MAIN? (Query Only)
Returns the sample rate of the main digital acquisition.
Group
2-168
Horizontal
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
HORizontal:DIGital:SAMPLERate:MAIN?
HORizontal:POSition
Sets or returns the horizontal position. If Horizontal Delay Mode is turned off,
this command is equivalent to adjusting the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on
the front panel. When Horizontal Delay Mode is on, this command stores a new
horizontal position that is used when Horizontal Delay Mode is turned off.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
HORizontal:POSition?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the horizontal position expressed as the percentage of the waveform
displayed left of the center of the graticule.
HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50 sets the horizontal position to 50%.
HORIZONTAL:POSITION? might return :HORIZONTAL:POSITION 100
indicating that the horizontal position is set to 100%.
HORizontal:PREViewstate? (Query Only)
Returns a boolean value to indicate whether the acquisition system is in the
preview state.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:PREViewstate?
Returns
<NR1> = 1 if the acquisition system is in the preview state.
<NR1> = 0 if the acquisition system is not in the preview state.
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
Sets the horizontal record length of acquired waveforms. The query form of this
command returns the current horizontal record length.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-169
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:RECOrdlength <NR1>
HORizontal:RECOrdlength?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> represents the supported values for horizontal record lengths, which are:
100000 or 1000000.
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 100000 specifies that 100000 data points will
be acquired for each record.
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH? might return :HORIZONTAL:RECOrdlength
100000 indicating that the horizontal record length is equal to 100000 data points.
HORizontal:RESOlution
Sets or returns the horizontal record length of acquired waveforms. The sample
rate is automatically adjusted at the same time to maintain a constant time per
division. The query form of this command returns the current horizontal record
length.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:RESOlution <NR1>
HORizontal:RESOlution?
Arguments
<NR1> represents the supported values for horizontal record lengths.
HORizontal:SAMPLERate
Returns the current horizontal sample rate.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:SAMPLERate?
HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the time base horizontal scale.
2-170
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
HORizontal:SCAle?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the range from 2 ns to 100 s, depending on the oscilloscope model.
HORIZONTAL:SCALE 2E-6 sets the main scale to 2µs per division.
HORIZONTAL:SCALE? might return :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 2.0000E-06
indicating that the main scale is currently set to 2 µs per division.
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition
Sets the horizontal position when delay mode is OFF. It is similar to
HORizontal:POSition.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition?
Examples
HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION? might return
HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION 50 indicating that the horizontal trigger
position is set to 50%.
ID? (Query Only)
Returns identifying information about the oscilloscope and related firmware.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
ID?
Related Commands
Examples
*IDN?
ID? might return TEK/DPO2024,CF:91.1CT,FV:v1.0000. This indicates the
oscilloscope model number, configured format, and firmware version number.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-171
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
*IDN? (Query Only)
Returns the oscilloscope identification code.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*IDN?
Related Commands
Examples
ID?
*IDN? might return :TEKTRONIX,DPO2024,SN123456789,CF:91.1CT
FV:v1.00000 indicating that the oscilloscope model number, serial number,
configured number, and firmware version number.
LANGuage
Sets or returns the user interface display language. This command only affects
the oscilloscope displayed language. Remote commands and their responses
are always in English.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
LANGuage
{ENGLish|FRENch|GERMan|ITALian|SPANish|PORTUguese|JAPAnese|
KOREan|RUSSian|SIMPlifiedchinese|TRADitionalchinese}
LANGuage?
Examples
LANGUAGE? might return :LANGUAGE ENGLISH.
LOCk
Enables or disables all front-panel buttons and knobs. There is no front panel
equivalent.
When the front panel is locked, neither theFPAnel:PRESS nor the FPAnel:TURN
commands will work. They will not generate an error event either. You can work
around this by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands, instead of
the front-panel commands. For example, to set the trigger level to 50%, you could
use TRIGger:A SETLevel. To force a trigger, you could use TRIGger FORCe.
2-172
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
LOCk {ALL|NONe}
LOCk?
Related Commands
Arguments
UNLock
ALL disables all front-panel controls.
NONe enables all front-panel controls. This is equivalent to the UNLock ALL
command.
Examples
LOCK ALL locks the front-panel controls.
LOCK? might return :LOCK NONE indicating that the front-panel controls are
enabled by this command.
*LRN? (Query Only)
Returns the commands that list the oscilloscope settings except for configuration
information for the calibration values, the WFMInpre? query, and the
WFMOutpre? query. This query allows you to record or "learn" the current
oscilloscope settings. You can use these commands to return the oscilloscope to
the state it was in when you made the *LRN? query. This command is identical
to the SET? Command.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*LRN?
Related Commands
Examples
SET?
*LRN? might return a long response, part of which could be as follows:
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUnsTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV
INFINITE;NUMAVG 16;SAMPLINGMODE RT;:HEADER 1;:LOCK
NONE;:LANGUAGE ENGLISH;:VERBOSE 1;:ALIAS:STATE
0;:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE NORMAL;:DISPLAY:STYLE:DOTSONLY
0;:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE 0.0000;CLOCK 1;GRATICULE
FULL;INTEnsITY:WAVEFORM 30;GRATICULE 75;BACKLIGHT
HIGH;:HARDCOPY :INKSAVER OFF;LAYOUT LANDSCAPE;PREVIEW
0;:SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT BMP;:SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-173
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
INTERNAL;:SAVE:ASSIGN:TYPE SETUP;:TRIGGER:A:MODE
AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LE VEL 20.0000E-3;LEVEL:CH1
20.0000E-3;CH2 0.0000;CH3 0.0000;CH4 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:
UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1 1.4000;CH2 800.0000E-3;CH3
800.0000E-3;CH4 800.0000E-3;:TRIGG ER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1
20.0000E-3;CH2 0.0000;CH3 0.0000;CH4 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:H
OLDOFF:TIME 20.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE
CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS
SETHOLD;FUNCTION AND;THRESHOLD:CH1 20.0000E-3;CH2
0.0000;CH3 0.0 000;CH4 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
X;CH2 X;CH3 X;CH4 X;CLOCK:SOURCE NONE; EDGE
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH1 X;CH2
X;CH3 X;CH4 X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT 4.0000E-9;LIMIT
4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1;EDGE
RISE;THRESHOLD 20.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE
CH2;THRESHOLD 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME
4.0000E-9;SETTIME 4.0000E-9; :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS
TRAnsITION;:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE
CH1;POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN LESSTHAN;WIDTH
4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE CH1;POLARITY POSITIVE; WHEN
OCCURS;WIDTH 4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:TRAnsITION:SOURCE CH1
...
MARK
Moves to the next or previous reference mark on the waveform. Returns the
current mark position.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK {NEXT|PREVious}
MARK?
Arguments
NEXT moves to the next reference mark on the right.
PREVious moves to the next reference mark on the left.
MARK:CREATE (No Query Form)
Creates a mark on a specified waveform or all waveforms in a column.
Group
2-174
Mark
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
MARK:CREATE {CH<x>|MATH|B<x>|REF<x>|COLUMN|DIGItal}
CH<x> creates the mark on a channel waveform, where <x> is the channel number.
MATH creates the mark on the math waveform.
B<x> creates the mark on a bus waveform, where <x> is the bus number.
REF<x> creates the mark on a reference waveform, where <x> is the reference
waveform number.
COLUMN creates marks on all waveforms in the current zoom pixel column.
DIGItal creates marks on a digital waveform. (An error will result if no digital
channel is turned on.)
MARK:DELEte (No Query Form)
Deletes a mark on a particular waveform, all waveforms in a column, the selected
mark, or all marks.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:DELEte {CH<x>|MATH|B<x>|REF<x>|COLUMN|DIGItal}
Arguments
CH<x> deletes the mark on a channel waveform, where <x> is the channel number.
MATH deletes the mark on the math waveform.
B<x> deletes the mark on a bus waveform, where <x> is the bus number.
REF<x> deletes the mark on a reference waveform, where <x> is the reference
waveform number.
COLUMN deletes marks on all waveforms in the current zoom pixel column.
DIGItal deletes all marks on all digital channels.
MARK:FREE? (Query Only)
Returns how many marks are available for use.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:FREE?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-175
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MARK:SELected:END? (Query Only)
Returns the end of the selected mark, 0 to 100% of the waveform.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:END?
MARK:SELected:FOCUS? (Query Only)
Returns the focus of the selected mark, 0 to 100% of the waveform.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:FOCUS?
MARK:SELected:MARKSINCOLumn? (Query Only)
Returns the number of marks in the current zoom pixel column.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:MARKSINCOLumn?
MARK:SELected:OWNer? (Query Only)
Returns the owner of the selected mark.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:OWNer?
Returns
Examples
2-176
<QString> is the owner of the mark.
MARK:SELECTED:OWNER? might return: USER, SEARCH1
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MARK:SELected:SOURCE? (Query Only)
Returns the source waveform for the selected mark.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:SOURCE?
MARK:SELected:STARt? (Query Only)
Returns the starting point of the selected mark, 0 to 100% of the waveform.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:STARt?
MARK:SELected:STATe? (Query Only)
Returns the on or off state of the selected mark. The selected mark is at or near
the center of the screen. If you press the front-panel Set/Clear button, this mark
will disappear.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:STATe?
MARK:SELected:ZOOm:POSition? (Query Only)
Returns the position of the selected mark, 0 to 100% of the zoom overview
window.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:ZOOm:POSition?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-177
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MARK:TOTal? (Query Only)
Returns how many marks are currently in use.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:TOTal?
MATH[1]:LABel
Sets or queries the waveform label for the math waveform.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:LABel <QString>
MATH[1]:LABel?
Arguments
<QString> is the quoted string used as the label for the math waveform.
Examples
MATH:LABEL “Output” sets the label for the math waveform to Output.
MATH:LABEL? might return MATH:LABEL "Sum of channel 1 and
channel 2" indicating that the current label for the math waveform.
MATH[1]? (Query Only)
Returns the definition of the math waveform. The returned data depends on the
setting of the MATH[1]:TYPe command.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]?
Related Commands
Examples
2-178
MATH[1]:TYPe
MATH? or MATH1? might return :MATH:TYPE DUAL;DEFINE
"CH1+CH2";VERTICAL:SCALE 100.0000E-3;POSITION 0.0000;UNITS
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
"V";:MATH:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 4.0000E-6;POSITION 50.0000;UNITS
"s";:MATH:SPECTRAL:MAG DB;WINDOW HANNING;:MATH:LABEL“”
MATH[1]:DEFine
Sets or returns the current math function as a text string.
Dual math is defined if the string is of the form <wfm> <operation> <wfm>,
where the <wfm>s are any combination of live channels or reference waveforms,
<operation> is any of +, -, or *, and the MATH[1]:TYPe is DUAL.
FFT math is defined if the string is in the form FFT(<wfm>), where <wfm> is any
live channel or reference waveform, and theMATH[1]:TYPe is FFT.
On the front panel, the Dual Wfm Math, and FFT menus contain controls that
allow building equivalent math expressions to those described above.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:DEFine <QString>
MATH[1]:DEFine?
Related Commands
Arguments
MATH[1]:TYPe
<QString> quoted string argument is the mathematical expression that defines
the waveform.
Table 2-39: Advanced Math expression elements
Expression
Description
CH1–CH4, REF1, REF2
Specifies a waveform data source.
FFT(
Executes a Fast Fourier Transform. The FFT
operator must be the first (left-most) operator
in an expression. All these operations must
end with a right parenthesis.
AMPlitude( , AREa( , BURst( , CARea(
Executes the selected measurement
operation on the waveform (active or
reference) that follows. All these operations
must end with a right parenthesis.
+,-,*
Executes an addition, subtraction, or
multiplication operation on the following
expression.
<, >, <=, >=, ==, ≠, ||, &&
Executes relational and logical operations.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-179
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
MATH1:DEFINE "CH1+CH2" adds the Ch 1 waveform and Ch 2 waveform,
storing the results in Math 1.
MATH:DEFINE? might return :MATH1:DEFINE "CH2*REF2" as the expression
that defines Math 1.
MATH[1]:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or returns the math horizontal display position for FFT or (non-live), live
math reference waveforms.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
MATH[1]:HORizontal:POSition?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the % of the math waveform that precedes center screen. It can vary
from 0.0 to 100.0.
MATH:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 10 sets the horizontal position to 10% pretrigger
MATH[1]:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the math horizontal display scale for FFT or (non-live), live math
waveforms. The horizontal scale of a dual math waveform with a channel source
waveform is set through the HORizontal:SCAle command.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
MATH[1]:HORizontal:SCAle?
Arguments
Examples
2-180
<NR3> is the math horizontal scale in seconds.
MATH:HORIZONTAL:SCALE? might return MATH:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 2.0E-4
indicating that the math horizontal scale is 200 μ
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MATH[1]:HORizontal:UNIts
Returns the math waveform horizontal measurement unit value.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:HORizontal:UNIts?
Examples
MATH:HORIZONTAL:UNITS? might return MATH:HORIZONTAL:UNITS "?"
indicating that the math horizontal unit label for unknown values is the default
question mark unit.
MATH[1]:SPECTral:GATing:INDICators
Enables or disables the display of indicators that show the portion of the source
waveform record used to compute the math FFT waveform.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:SPECTral:GATing:INDICators {<NR1>|OFF|ON}
MATH[1]:SPECTral:GATing:INDICators?
Arguments
OFF turns off the display of indicators.
ON turns on the display of indicators.
<NR1> = 0 turns off the display of indicators. Any other value turns on the display
of indicators.
MATH[1]:SPECTral:GATing:INDICators:END? (Query Only)
Returns the ending point in the source waveform record used for computing the
FFT
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:SPECTral:GATing:INDICators:END?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-181
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Returns
A value between 0 and 1, which represents the fractional portion of the source
record.
MATH[1]:SPECTral:GATing:INDICators:STARt? (Query Only)
Returns the starting point in the source waveform record used for computing the
FFT math waveform.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:SPECTral:GATing:INDICators:STARt?
Returns
A value between 0 and 1, which represents the fractional portion of the source
record.
MATH[1]:SPECTral:MAG
Sets or returns the units of the Spectral Magnification function in the math string.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:SPECTral:MAG {LINEAr|DB}
MATH[1]:SPECTral:MAG?
Arguments
LINEAR sets the SpectralMag units to linear.
DB sets the SpectralMag units to decibels.
Examples
MATH1:SPECTRAL:MAG DB sets the SpectralMag units for Math1 to decibels.
MATH1:SPECTRAL:MAG? might return :MATH1:SPECTRAL:MAG DB indicating
that the SpectralMag units for Math1 are set to decibels.
MATH[1]:SPECTral:NYQUISTFreq? (Query Only)
Returns the Nyquist frequency of the FFT math waveforms.
Group
2-182
Math
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
MATH[1]:SPECTral:NYQUISTFreq?
MATH[1]:SPECTral:WINdow
Sets or returns the window function for the spectral analyzer input data for the
specified math waveform. A spectral window determines what the filter shape
of the spectral analyzer will be in the frequency domain. It can be described by
a mathematical function that is multiplied point-by-point times the input data to
the spectral analyzer.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:SPECTral:WINdow
{RECTangular|HAMming|HANning|BLAckmanharris}
MATH[1]:SPECTral:WINdow?
Arguments
RECTangular window function is equivalent to multiplying all gate data by one.
HAMming window function is based on a cosine series.
HANning window function is based on a cosine series.
BLAckmanharris window function is based on a cosine series.
Examples
MATH1:SPECTRAL:WINDOW HANNING applies a Hanning window to the spectral
analyzer input data.
MATH1:SPECTRAL:WINDOW? might return :MATH1:SPECTRAL:WINDOW
HAMMING indicating that the window function used to multiply the spectral
analyzer input data is the Hamming window.
MATH[1]:TYPe
This command specifies the math waveform type - either dual or FFT. This
command is typically used along with MATH[1]:DEFine, which specifies the
current mathematical expression as a text string which defines the waveform.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:TYPe {DUAL|FFT}
MATH[1]:TYPe?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-183
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
MATH[1]:DEFine
DUAL sets the math waveform mode to dual waveform math.
FFT sets the math waveform mode to FFT math.
Examples
MATH:TYPE FFT sets the math waveform mode to FFT.
MATH:TYPE FFT;:MATH:DEFINE “FFT( CH1 )” sets the math type to FFT
and displays an FFT waveform of the channel 1 waveform, using the current
FFT scale and window settings.
MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition
Sets or returns the vertical position of the currently selected math type.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition <NR3>
MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CH<x>:POSition, REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
<NR3> is the desired position in divisions from the center graticule.
MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION 1.3E+00 positions the Math 1 input signal
1.3 divisions higher than a position of 0.
MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION? might return :MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION
-1.3000E+00 indicating that the current position of Math 1 is 1.3 divisions
below the center graticule.
MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or returns the vertical scale of the currently selected math type.
2-184
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>
MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CH<x>:SCAle, REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
<NR3> is the scale-per-division in the current math vertical units. The range is
from 1.0E-09 through 5.0.
MATH1:VERTICAL:SCALE 100E-03 sets the Math scale to 100 mV per division.
MATH:VERTICAL:SCALE? might return :MATH:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000E+00 indicating that the current scale setting of Math is 1 V per division.
MATH[1]:VERTical:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns the math waveform vertical measurement unit value.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:VERTical:UNIts?
Examples
MATH:VERTICAL:UNITS? might return MATH:VERTICAL:UNITS "V"
indicating that the math vertical unit label is volts.
MEASUrement? (Query Only)
Returns all measurement parameters.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement?
Examples
MEASUREMENT? might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION
FORWARDS;EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE
PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH2;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS;EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE 1;TYPE
FREQUENCY;UNITS "Hz";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH2;COUNT
0;MAXIMUM 0.0000;MEAN 0.0000;MINIMUM 0.0 000;STDDEV
0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS;EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE 1;TYPE PERIOD;UNITS
"s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH2;COUNT 0;MAXIMUM 0.0000;MEAN
0.0000;MINIMUM 0.0000;STDDEV 0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-185
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS;EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:STATE 1;TYPE PK2PK;UNITS "V";SOURCE1
CH1;SOURCE2 CH2;COUNT 0;MAXIMUM 0.0000;MEAN 0.0000;MINIMUM
0.0000;STDDEV 0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:DELAY:DIRECTION
FORWARDS;EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:STATE
0;TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH2;COUNT
0;MAXIMUM 0.0000;MEAN 0.0000;MINIMUM 0.0000;STDDEV
0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:METHOD AUTO;REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1
0.0000;MID2 0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH
90.0000;LOW 10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2
50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE
OFF;NUMHORZ 0;NUMVERT 0;HORZ1 99.0000E +36;HORZ2
99.0000E+36;HORZ3 99.0000E+36;HORZ4 99.0000E+36;VERT1
99.0000E+36;VERT2 99.0000E+36;VERT3 99.0000E+36;VERT4
99.0000E+36;:MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE OFF;WEIGHTING
32;:MEASUREMENT:GATING SCREEN.
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot (No Query Form)
Removes the measurement snapshot display.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot
Related Commands
CLEARMenu
MEASUrement:GATing
Specifies or returns the measurement gating setting.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:GATing {OFF|SCREen|CURSor}
MEASUrement:GATing?
Arguments
OFF turns off measurement gating (full record).
SCREen turns on gating, using the left and right edges of the screen.
2-186
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CURSor limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the vertical
bar cursors, even if they are off screen.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:GATING CURSOR turns on measurement gating using the cursors
as limits.
MEASUREMENT:GATING? might return :MEASUREMENT:GATING CURSOR
indicating that measurements are limited to the portion of the waveform between
the vertical bar cursors.
MEASUrement:IMMed? (Query Only)
Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED? might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS;EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1
CH1;SOURCE2 CH2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay? (Query Only)
Returns information about the immediate delay measurement. This command is
equivalent to viewing the delay measurement settings on the measurement readout.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY? might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS; EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-187
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIRection
Sets or returns the starting point and direction that determines the delay "to" edge
when taking an immediate delay measurement.
NOTE. Use the MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce2 command to specify the delay
"to" waveform.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIRection {BACKWards|FORWards}
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIRection?
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce2
BACKWards starts the search at the end of the waveform and looks for the last
rising or falling edge in the waveform.
FORWards starts the search at the beginning of the waveform and looks for the
first rising or falling edge in the waveform.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS starts searching from the
beginning of the waveform record and looks for the first rising or falling edge.
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION? might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS indicating
that searching begins at the end of the waveform record and looks for the last
rising or falling edge.
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE<x>
Sets or returns the slope of the edge the oscilloscope uses for the delay "from" or
"to" waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement.
2-188
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE<x> {FALL|RISe}
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE<x>?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce1
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce2
Arguments
<x> specifies which waveform to use, where <x> = 1 is the "from" waveform, and
<x> = 2 is the "to" waveform.
FALL specifies the falling edge.
RISe specifies the rising edge.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE specifies that the "from" waveform
rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement.
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1? returns either RISE or FALL.
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce1
Sets or returns the source for all single source immediate measurements
and specifies the source to measure "from" when taking an immediate delay
measurement or phase measurement.
Digital channels (D<x>) are available as a measurement source for time, edge and
pulse measurements such as Period, Frequency, Pos Width, Neg Width, Pos Duty
Cycle, Neg Duty Cycle, Pos/Neg Edges and Pos/Neg Pulses, Delay and Phase.
NOTE. If you do not specify a numerical suffix, the source is assumed to be
SOURCE 1.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce1 {CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>}
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce1?
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce2
CH<x> is an input channel waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an
integer, where x is the channel number.
MATH<y> is a math waveform. The y variable can be expressed as an integer of 1.
REF<X> is a reference waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an integer,
where x is the reference channel number.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-189
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1 MATH1
specifies Math1 as the immediate measurement source.
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1? might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1 CH3 indicating that channel 3 is the
immediate measurement source.
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce2
Sets or returns the source to measure "to" for phase or delay immediate
measurements.
NOTE. Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types,
which require both a target (Source1) and reference (Source2) source.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce2 {CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>}
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce2?
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce1
CH<x> is an input channel waveform, where x is the channel number.
MATH<y> is a math waveform. The y variable can be expressed as an integer of 1.
REF<X> is a reference waveform, where x is the reference channel number.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2 REF2 sets the waveform in reference memory
location 2 as the delay "to" source when making delay measurements.
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2? might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2 MATH1 indicating that Math1 is the
immediate measurement source.
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>
For SOURce1: Sets or returns the source for all single channel measurements. For
delay or phase measurements, sets or returns the waveform to measure "from".
2-190
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
For SOUrce2: Sets or returns the waveform to measure "to" when taking a delay
measurement or phase measurement.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x> {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH}
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>?
Arguments
CH1–CH4 or MATH is the source waveform.
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
Sets or returns the immediate measurement type.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
{AMPlitude|AREa|BURst|CARea|CMEan|CRMs|DELay|FALL|FREQuency
|HIGH|LOW|MAXimum|MEAN|MINImum|NDUty|NEDGECount|NOVershoot
|NPULSECount|NWIdth|PEDGECount|PDUty
|PERIod|PHAse|PK2Pk|POVershoot|PPULSECount|PWIdth|RISe|RMS}
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe?
Arguments
AMPlitude measures the amplitude of the selected waveform. In other words, it
measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or
gated region. This measurement is available only on DPO models.
Amplitude = High – Low
AREa measures the voltage over time. The area is over the entire waveform or
gated region and is measured in volt-seconds. The area measured above the
ground is positive, while the area below ground is negative. This measurement is
available only on DPO models.
BURst measures the duration of a burst. The measurement is made over the entire
waveform or gated region.
CARea (cycle area) measures the voltage over time. In other words, it measures, in
volt-seconds, the area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the
gated region. The area measured above the common reference point is positive,
while the area below the common reference point is negative. This measurement
is available on DPO and MSO models.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-191
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CMEan (cycle mean) measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the
waveform or the first cycle in the gated region. This measurement is available
only on DPO and MSO models.
CRMs (cycle rms) measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first
cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region. This measurement is
available only on DPO and MSO models.
DELay measures the time between the middle reference (default = 50%) amplitude
point of the source waveform and the destination waveform.
FALL measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the
waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value (default is 90%) to
a low reference value (default is 10%). This measurement is available only on
DPO models.
FREQuency measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region. Frequency
is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz (Hz), where 1 Hz = 1
cycle per second.
HIGH measures the High reference (100% level, sometimes called Topline) of a
waveform. This measurement is available only on DPO models.
LOW measures the Low reference (0% level, sometimes called Baseline) of a
waveform. This measurement is available only on DPO models.
MAXimum finds the maximum amplitude. This value is the most positive peak
voltage found. It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region. This
measurement is available only on DPO models.
MEAN amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform
or gated region. This measurement is available only on DPO models.
MINImum finds the minimum amplitude. This value is typically the most negative
peak voltage. It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region. This
measurement is available only on DPO models.
NDUty (negative duty cycle) is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal
period, expressed as a percentage. The duty cycle is measured on the first cycle in
the waveform or gated region.
Negative Duty Cycle = ((Negative Width) / Period) × 100%
NEDGECount is the count of falling edges.
NOVershoot (negative overshoot) finds the negative overshoot value over the
entire waveform or gated region. This measurement is available only on DPO
models.
Negative Overshoot = ((Low – Minimum) / Amplitude) × 100%)
NPULSECount is the count of negative pulses.
2-192
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
NWIdth (negative width) measurement is the distance (time) between the middle
reference (default = 50%) amplitude points of a negative pulse. The measurement
is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region.
PDUty (positive duty cycle) is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal
period, expressed as a percentage. It is measured on the first cycle in the
waveform or gated region.
Positive Duty Cycle = ((Positive Width / Period) × 100%
PEDGECount is the count of rising edges.
PERIod is the time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or gated
region. Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds.
PHAse measures the phase difference (amount of time a waveform leads or lags
the reference waveform) between two waveforms. The measurement is made
between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in
degrees, where 360° represents one waveform cycle.
PK2Pk (peak-to-peak) finds the absolute difference between the maximum and
minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region. This measurement is
available only on DPO models.
POVershoot is the positive overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated
region. This measurement is available only on DPO models.
Positive Overshoot = ((Maximum – High) / Amplitude) ×100%
PPULSECount is the count of positive pulses.
PWIdth (positive width) is the distance (time) between the middle reference
(default = 50%) amplitude points of a positive pulse. The measurement is made
on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region.
RISe timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform. The rise time is
the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a
low reference value (default is 10%) to a high reference value (default is 90%).
This measurement is available only on DPO models.
RMS amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage in the entire
waveform or gated region. This measurement is available only on DPO models.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE FREQUENCY defines the immediate measurement to
be a frequency measurement.
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE? might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPe RMS
indicating that the immediate measurement is the true Root Mean Square voltage.
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns the units of the immediate measurement:
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-193
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
VOLTS, VOLTS SQUARED, SEC, HERTZ, PERCENT, DIVS, SAMPLES,
OHMS, AMPS, WATTS, MINUTES, DEGREES, UNKNOWN, AMPS
SQUARED, HOURS, DAYS, DB, BYTES, INVERSE HERTZ, IRE, V OVER V,
V OVER A, VOLTS WATTS, V OVER W, VOLTS DB, V OVER DB, A OVER
V, A OVER A, AMPS WATTS, A OVER W, AMPS DB, A OVER DB, WATTS
VOLTS, W OVER V, WATTS AMPS, W OVER A, WATTS SQUARED, W
OVER W, WATTS DB, W OVER DB, DB VOLTS, DB OVER V, DB AMPS, DB
OVER A, DB WATTS, DB OVER W, DB SQUARED, DB OVER DB, VOLTS
SEC, AMPS SEC, WATTS SEC, V OVER S, A OVER S, W OVER S
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNITS? might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNIts "s"
indicating that units for the immediate measurement are in seconds.
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue? (Query Only)
Returns the value of the measurement specified by the MEASUrement:IMMed:
TYPe command. The measurement is immediately taken on the source(s)
specified by a MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce1 command.
NOTE. A change to HORizontal:MAIn:SCALe or CH<x>:SCALe will not
necessarily have taken affect if immediately followed by this command.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
Related Commands
Examples
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe, MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce1, *ESR?,
ALLEv?
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE? might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE
9.9000E+37. If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it,
then an item is added to the error queue. The error can be checked for with the
*ESR? and ALLEv? commands.
2-194
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:INDICators? (Query Only)
Returns all measurement indicator parameters.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:INDICators?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS? might return
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE MEAS1;NUMHORZ 0;NUMVERT 4;HORZ1
7.5E0;HORZ2 -3.400000095367E0;HORZ3 0.0E0;HORZ4 0.0E0;VERT1
-6.351123E-6;VERT2 -3.179753E-6;VERT3 -6.40943E-6;VERT4
-6.403E-6
MEASUrement:INDICators:HORZ<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the position of the specified horizontal measurement indicator <x>, where
<x> can be 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:INDICators:HORZ<x>?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:HORZ1? might return
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:HORZ1 -2.0E-3 indicating that horizontal
indicator1 has a value of –2 mV.
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMHORZ? (Query Only)
Returns the number of horizontal measurement indicators currently being
displayed.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMHORZ?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:NUMHORZ? might return
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:NUMHORZ 2 indicating that there are currently
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-195
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
2 horizontal lines drawn on the graticule. The indicators show where the
measurement specified by MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE is being
performed.
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMVERT? (Query Only)
Returns the number of vertical measurement indicators currently being displayed.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMVERT?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:NUMVERT? might return
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:NUMVERT 2 indicating that there are currently 2
vertical lines drawn on the graticule. The indicators show where the measurement
specified by MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE is being performed.
MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE
Sets or returns the state of visible measurement indicators.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE {OFF|MEAS<x>}
MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE?
Arguments
OFF turns the visible measurement indicators off.
MEAS<x> displays the visible measurement indicators for measurement <x>,
where <x> can be 1, 2, 3, or 4.
NOTE. There must be an active measurement before you can activate an indicator
for a specified measurement.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE MEAS2 turns on the display of visible
measurement indicators for measurement 2.
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE? might return
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE OFF indicating that no measurement
indicators are active.
2-196
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:INDICators:VERT<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the value of the specified vertical measurement indicator <x> from the
trigger point, where <x> can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. A negative value means that the
indicator is positioned earlier in the waveform record than the trigger point.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:INDICators:VERT<x>?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:VERT2? might return
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:VERT2 -3.724507E-6 indicating that the
second measurement indicator is positioned 3.72 μs before the trigger point.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? (Query Only)
Returns all measurement parameters for the specified active measurement <x>.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt? (Query Only)
Returns the number of values accumulated for this measurement since the last
statistical reset. Values may be ignored if they generated an error. Measurements
are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:COUNT? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:COUNT
3247.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-197
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay? (Query Only)
Returns the delay measurement parameters for the measurement specified by
<x>, which ranges from 1 through 4.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS;EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIRection
Sets or returns the starting point and direction that determines the delay "to" edge
when taking a delay measurement. Use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
command to specify the waveform.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIRection {BACKWards|FORWards}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIRection?
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
BACKWards means the search starts at the end of the waveform and
looks for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform. Use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x> command to specify the slope
of the edge.
FORWards means the search starts at the beginning of the waveform
and looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform. Use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x> command to specify the slope
of the edge.
Examples
2-198
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS starts searching from
the end of the waveform record.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:DIRECTION? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS indicating
that the current search direction is backwards.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>
Sets or returns the slope of the edge used for the delay "from" or "to" waveform
when taking an immediate delay measurement. The waveform is specified by
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1].
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x> {FALL|RISe}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>?
Arguments
<x> specifies which waveform to use, where <x> = 1 is the "from" waveform, and
<x> = 2 is the "to" waveform.
FALL specifies the falling edge.
RISe specifies the rising edge.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE specifies that the "from" waveform
rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1? returns either RISE or FALL.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum? (Query Only)
Returns the maximum value found for this measurement since the last statistical
reset. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:MAXIMUM? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:MAXIMUM 4.18E-9.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-199
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN? (Query Only)
Returns the mean value accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical
reset. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEAN? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEAN
514.71E-09.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum? (Query Only)
Returns the minimum value for this measurement since the last statistical reset.
Measurements are specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 4.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MINIMUM? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MINIMUM 1.75E-09.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
Sets or returns the source for all single source measurements and specifies
the source to measure "from" when taking a delay measurement or phase
measurement. Measurements are specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 4.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1] {CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]?
Arguments
CH<x> is an input channel waveform, where x is the channel number.
MATH<y> is a math waveform, where y is 1.
REF<x> is a reference waveform, where x is the reference channel number.
2-200
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE1 MATH1 specifies Math 1 as the measurement
2 source.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE1? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE[1] MATH1 indicating that Math1 is the
measurement 2 source.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
Sets or returns the reference source to measure "to" when taking a delay
measurement or phase measurement. Measurements are specified by <x>, which
ranges from 1 through 4.
NOTE. Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types,
which require both a target (Source1) and reference (Source2) source.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2 {CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2?
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
CH<x> is an input channel waveform, where x is the channel number.
MATH<y> is the math waveform, which is always 1.
REF<x> is a reference waveform, where x is the reference channel number.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:SOURCE2 CH1 specifies CH1 as the delay "to" source
when making delay measurement.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2 MATH1 indicating that Math 1 is the
measurement 2 source.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>
For SOURce1: Sets or returns the source for all single channel measurements. For
delay or phase measurements, sets or returns the waveform to measure "from".
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-201
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
For SOUrce2: Sets or returns the waveform to measure "to" when taking a delay
measurement or phase measurement.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x> {CH<x>|MATH|}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>?
Arguments
CH<x> is an input channel waveform, where x is the channel number.
MATH is the math waveform.
REF<x> is a reference waveform, where x is the reference channel number.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE
Sets or returns whether the specified measurement slot is computed and displayed.
The measurement slot is specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 4.
For a measurement to display, you must have selected a source waveform
and defined the measurement you want to take and display. You select the
measurement using the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1] command.
You define the measurement type using the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
command.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE?
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1], MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
OFF disables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot.
ON enables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot.
<NR1> = 0 disables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot; any
other value enables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot.
Examples
2-202
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE ON computes and displays the measurement
defined as measurement 2.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE 0
indicating that measurement defined for measurement slot 1 is disabled.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev? (Query Only)
Returns the standard deviation of values accumulated for this measurement since
the last statistical reset. Measurements are specified by <x>, the measurement
slots, from 1 through 4.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STDDEV? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STDDEV
21.0E-12.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Sets or returns the measurement type defined for the specified measurement slot.
The measurement slot is specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 4.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
{AMPlitude|AREa|BURst|CARea|CMEan|CRMs|DELay|FALL|FREQuency
|HIGH|LOW|MAXimum|MEAN|MINImum|NDUty|NEDGECount|NOVershoot
|NPULSECount|NWIdth|PDUty|PEDGECount|PERIod|PHAse|PK2Pk
|POVershoot|PPULSECount|PWIdth|RISe|RMS}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe?
Arguments
AMPlitude measures the amplitude of the selected waveform. In other words, it
measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or
gated region. This measurement is available only on DPO models.
Amplitude = High – Low
AREa measures the voltage over time. The area is over the entire waveform or
gated region and is measured in volt-seconds. The area measured above the
ground is positive, while the area below ground is negative. This measurement is
available only on DPO models.
BURst measures the duration of a burst. The measurement is made over the entire
waveform or gated region.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-203
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CARea (cycle area) measures the voltage over time. In other words, it measures, in
volt-seconds, the area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the
gated region. The area measured above the common reference point is positive,
while the area below the common reference point is negative. This measurement
is available only on DPO models.
CMEan (cycle mean) measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the
waveform or the first cycle in the gated region. This measurement is available
only on DPO models.
CRMs (cycle rms) measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first
cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region. This measurement is
available only on DPO models.
DELay measures the time between the middle reference (default = 50%) amplitude
point of the source waveform and the destination waveform. This measurement is
available only on DPO models.
FALL measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the
waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value (default is 90%) to
a low reference value (default is 10%). This measurement is available only on
DPO models.
FREQuency measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region. Frequency
is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz (Hz), where 1 Hz = 1
cycle per second.
HIGH measures the High reference (100% level, sometimes called Topline) of a
waveform. This measurement is available only on DPO models.
LOW measures the Low reference (0% level, sometimes called Baseline) of a
waveform. This measurement is available only on DPO models.
MAXimum finds the maximum amplitude. This value is the most positive peak
voltage found. It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region. This
measurement is available only on DPO models.
MEAN amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform
or gated region. This measurement is available only on DPO models.
MINImum finds the minimum amplitude. This value is typically the most negative
peak voltage. It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region. This
measurement is available only on DPO models.
NDUty (negative duty cycle) is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal
period, expressed as a percentage. The duty cycle is measured on the first cycle in
the waveform or gated region.
Negative Duty Cycle = ((Negative Width) / Period) × 100%
NEDGECount is the count of negative edges.
2-204
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
NOVershoot (negative overshoot) finds the negative overshoot value over the
entire waveform or gated region. This measurement is available only on DPO
models.
Negative Overshoot = ((Low – Minimum) / Amplitude) × 100%)
NPULSECount is the count of negative pulses.
NWIdth (negative width) measurement is the distance (time) between the middle
reference (default = 50%) amplitude points of a negative pulse. The measurement
is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region.
PDUty (positive duty cycle) is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal
period, expressed as a percentage. It is measured on the first cycle in the
waveform or gated region.
Positive Duty Cycle = ((Positive Width) / Period) × 100%
PEDGECount is the count of positive edges.
PERIod is the time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or gated
region. Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds.
PHAse measures the phase difference (amount of time a waveform leads or lags
the reference waveform) between two waveforms. The measurement is made
between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in
degrees, where 360° represents one waveform cycle.
PK2Pk (peak-to-peak) finds the absolute difference between the maximum and
minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region. This measurement is
available only on DPO models.
POVershoot is the positive overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated
region. This measurement is available only on DPO models.
Positive Overshoot = ((Maximum – High) / Amplitude) ×100%
PPULSECount is the count of positive pulses.
PWIdth (positive width) is the distance (time) between the middle reference
(default = 50%) amplitude points of a positive pulse. The measurement is made
on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region.
RISe timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform. The rise time is
the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a
low reference value (default is 10%) to a high reference value (default is 90%).
This measurement is available only on DPO models.
RMS amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage in the entire
waveform or gated region. This measurement is available only on DPO models.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE FREQUENCY defines measurement 2 as a
measurement of the frequency of a waveform.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-205
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE RMS
indicating that measurement 1 is defined to measure the RMS value of a waveform.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? (Query Only)
Returns the units associated with the specified measurement. The measurement
slots are specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 4.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?
Related Commands
Examples
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:UNITS? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:UNIts %
indicating units for measurement 1 are set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? (Query Only)
Returns a calculate value for the measurement specified by <x>, which ranges
from 1 through 4.
NOTE. This is the same value as displayed on-screen. If measurement statistics
are enabled, a new value is calculated with every waveform. In addition, this
value is updated approximately every 1/3 second. If you are acquiring a long
acquisition record, the oscilloscope may take longer to update.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
Related Commands
Examples
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?, *ESR?, ALLEv?
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:VALUE? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:VALue
2.8740E-06. If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it,
then an item is added to the error queue. The error can be checked for with the
*ESR? and ALLEv? commands.
2-206
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:METHod
Sets or returns the method used to calculate the 0% and 100% reference level.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:METHod {Auto|HIStogram|MINMax}
MEASUrement:METHod?
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH, MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:
LOW, MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID, MEASUrement:REFLevel:
PERCent:MID2
Auto selects the best method for each data set.
HIStogram sets the high and low waveform levels statistically using a histogram
algorithm.
MINMax uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record. This selection
is best for examining waveforms with no large, flat portions of a common value,
such as sine waves and triangle waves.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:METHOD? might return :MEASUREMENT:METHOD MINMAX
indicating that the reference levels are set to MIN and MAX.
MEASUrement:REFLevel? (Query Only)
Returns the current reference level parameters.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL? might return these reference
level settings :MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1 0.0000 ;MID2
0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW
10.0000;MID1 50.0000 ;MID2 50.0000
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-207
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
Sets or returns the high reference level, and is the upper reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. This command affects the
results of rise and fall measurements.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all
MEASurements:IMMed and the four periodic measurements.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
<NR3> is the high reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 1.71 sets the high reference level
to 1.71 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 1.7100E+00 indicating that the
absolute high reference level is set to 1.71 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
Sets or returns the low reference level, and is the lower reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all
MEASurements:IMMed and the four periodic measurements.
2-208
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
<NR3> is the low reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0 sets the low reference level
to 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0000E+00 indicating
that the absolute low reference level is set to 0.0 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]
Sets or returns the mid reference level, and is the 50% reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. This command affects the
results of period, frequency, delay, and all cyclic measurements.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all
MEASurements:IMMed and the four periodic measurements.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1] <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
<NR3> is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID 1 .71 sets the mid reference level
to 0.71 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID 0.7100E+00 indicating
that the absolute mid1 reference level is set to 0.71 V.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-209
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
Sets or returns the mid reference level for the "to" waveform when
taking a delay measurement, and is the 50% reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. This command affects the
results of delay measurements.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all
MEASurements:IMMed and the four periodic measurements.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
<NR3> is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.5 sets the mid reference level for
the delay waveform to 0.5 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.5000E+00 indicating that the
absolute mid2 reference level is set to 0.5 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID<x>
Sets or returns the mid reference level for channel <x>, where x is the
measurement channel.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID<x> <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID<x>?
Arguments
2-210
<NR3> is the mid reference level in volts.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Specifies or returns the reference level units used for measurement calculations.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod {ABSolute|PERCent}
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod?
Arguments
ABSolute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is useful when
precise values are required (for example, when designing to published interface
specifications, such as RS-232-C).
PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent
relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent commands.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD ABSOLUTE specifies that explicit
user-defined values are used for the reference levels.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT indicating that the reference
level units used are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
Sets or returns the percent (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the
high reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent.
This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements.
NOTE. This command affects the associated reference level parameter for all
MEASurements:IMMed and the four periodic measurements.
Group
Measurement
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-211
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH?
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Arguments
<NR3> is the high reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default high
Examples
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 95 sets the high reference level
reference level is 90%.
to 95% of HIGH.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90 indicating that the
percentage high reference level is set to 90% of HIGH.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
Sets or returns the percent (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the
low reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent.
This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all
MEASurements:IMMed and the four periodic measurements.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
2-212
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
<NR3> is the low reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default low
reference level is 10%.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 15 sets the high reference level to
15% of HIGH.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 10 indicating that the
percentage high reference level is set to 10% of HIGH.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]
Sets or returns the percent (where 100% is equal to HIGH) that is used to calculate
the mid reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to
Percent. This command affects the results of period, frequency, delay, and all
cyclic measurements.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all
MEASurements:IMMed and the four periodic measurements.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1] <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
<NR3> is the mid reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default mid
reference level is 50%.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID 1 60 sets the mid reference level
to 60% of HIGH.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID 65 indicating that the
percentage mid reference level is set to 65% of HIGH.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
Sets or returns the percent (where 100% is equal to HIGH) that is used to
calculate the mid reference level for the second waveform specified when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command affects the
results of delay measurements.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all
MEASurements:IMMed and the four periodic measurements.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-213
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
<NR3> is the mid reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default mid
reference level is 50%.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 40 sets the mid2 reference level
to 40% of HIGH.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 45 indicating that the
percentage mid2 reference level is set to 45% of HIGH.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x>
Sets or returns the mid reference level for channel <x>, where x is the
measurement channel.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x> <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> is the mid reference level in percent.
MEASUrement:SNAPShot (No Query Form)
Displays the measurement snapshot list on the oscilloscope screen. The list
contains the immediate values for all available measurements of the active signal.
2-214
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:SNAPShot
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MESSage
This command sets or queries message parameters.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
MESSage
MESSage?
Examples
MESSAGE? might return MESSAGE:SHOW "TP401";BOX
271,82,292,114;STATE 0 indicating that the message parameters.
MESSage:BOX
Sets or returns the size and position of the message window. This command does
not display the message unless MESSage:STATE is on.
X1 and Y1 are the screen coordinates of the top left corner of the message box.
X2 and Y2 are the screen coordinates of the bottom right corner of the message
box. All four coordinates are returned by the query.
Changing the text in the message box, using the MESSAGE:SHOW command,
automatically resizes the message box. If you want a custom message box
size, send the MESSAGE:BOX command after changing the text using the
MESSAGE:SHOW command.
Message box settings and data are saved and restored in saved setups.
Group
Display
Syntax
MESSage:BOX <X1>,<Y1>[,<X2>,<Y2>]
MESSage:BOX?
Related Commands
Arguments
MESSage:STATE, MESSage:SHOW, MESSage:CLEAR
<X1> and <X2> = 0 to 1023, and are pixel positions along the horizontal axis.
<X1> defines the left and <X2> defines the right side of the window.
<Y1> and <Y2> = 0 to 767, and are pixel positions along the vertical axis. <Y1>
defines the top and <Y2> defines the bottom of the window. The reserved height
of all characters is 16 pixels so the window must be at least that high to fully
display characters. <X2> and <Y2> are optional because the MESSAGE:SHOW
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-215
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
command automatically sizes the box to fit the message. All four values are
returned in a query.
MESSage:CLEAR (No Query Form)
Removes the message text from the message window.
Group
Display
Syntax
MESSage:CLEAR
Related Commands
Examples
MESSage:BOX, MESSage:SHOW, MESSage:STATE
MESSage:CLEAR
removes the message from the message window.
MESSage:SHOW
Clears the contents of the message window and displays the new message in the
window. Changing the string length causes the message box to automatically
resize to fit the text. The box may be resized using the MESSage:BOX command.
Group
Display
Syntax
MESSage:SHOW <QString>
MESSage:SHOW?
Related Commands
Arguments
MESSage:BOX, MESSage:CLEAR, MESSage:STATE
<QString> is the message and can include any of the characters shown in
the Character Set, Appendix A. The maximum length of the message is 1000
characters; the instrument ignores longer strings.
The message box size is set to fit the message. You can also set the message area
height and width using the MESSage:BOX command. The length of the message
that fits in the message area depends on the contents of the message because
the width of characters varies.
If the message exceeds the limits of the message box, either horizontally or
vertically, the portion of the message that exceeds the limits will not be displayed.
2-216
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
The message string itself is not altered. The entire message can be returned as a
query response regardless of what is displayed in the message box.
The message is left-justified, and is displayed on a single line starting with the
top most line in the window. A new line character can be embedded in the string
to position the message on multiple lines. You can also use white space and tab
characters to position the message within a line. Text which does not fit within
the message box is truncated. Defining a message box text string erases any
previously displayed text within the message box.
You can send a tab by transmitting a tab character (\t or \x09) followed characters
representing the most significant eight bits followed by significant eight bits of a
16-bit number. The number specifies the position relative to the left margin of
the message area. For example, to tab send TAB (\t or \x09), NUL (decimal 0),
and CR (decimal 13).
For example, using hexadecimal escape sequences, MESSAGE:SHOW
'\x09\x01\x17Hello' when sent as a command would cause the 'Hello' to be
displayed starting at pixel position 279 relative to the left margin set by the
MESSAGE:BOX command. If you want to display characters starting at position
279, then 279 = 0x0117; split the hexadecimal number into two characters 0x01
and 0x17 and send \x09\x01\x17.
Special characters which control decoration are two character sequences where the
first character is an escape (0x1b) and the second character is as described below.
Bit 7
0
Bit 6
If set, inverse video is toggled from current state and the following text
is displayed in the new inverse state until the state is toggled again.
Remaining bits are ignored
Bit 5
If set, the color index in the four LSB’s (bits 0 through 3) is applied to
the foreground or background color depending on the fg/bg bit (bit 4).
Bit 4
If set, color change is applied to the background, otherwise applies to
the foreground.
Bit 0 – 3
Specifies the color index (0 through 15) to change color as specified
below:
Index 0
Black (background)
Index 1
Yellow (Ch 1)
Index 2
Cyan (Ch 2)
Index 3
Magenta (Ch 3)
Index 4
Green (Ch 4)
Index 5
Red (math)
Index 6
White (reference)
Index 7
Orange
Index 8
Gray (Graticule)
Index 9
White (text)
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-217
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Index 10
Tek blue
Index 11
Bright blue
Index 12
Undefined
Index 13
Blue
Index 14
Undefined
Index 15
Dark blue
Bit 4
If set, the foreground color is set to the default foreground color.
Bit 3
If set, the background color is set to the default background color.
Bit 2
Undefined
Bit 1
Undefined
Bit 0
Undefined
The ESC (escape) character followed by the @ character turns inverse video on or
off and can be embedded in the message string. Example: “[email protected]@
ghi” specifies the string “abcdefghi” where the “def” portion is displayed in
inverse video.
Example: “abcESC#defESC)[email protected]” specifies the string “abcdefghi” where
the “def” portion appears in the channel 3 color (magenta) and the “ghi” portion
appears in the normal text color except it’s in inverse video.
An alternate way to enter characters is octal escape sequences. This consists of a
backslash followed by numerals in the standard C language printf fashion.
Another way to enter characters is \xnn where the nn is the hexadecimal value of
the character to display.
An advantage of these methods is that any controller program can be used.
Another advantage is it’s easy to access characters with the high bit set, that is,
those characters with a decimal value greater than 127.
An alternate way to enter certain characters is with a backslash followed by a
single character (following “standard” Unix) as described in the table below.
n
Newline (carriage return and line feed)
\
Backslash (\\ is required to get a backslash character)
t
Horizontal tab; the next 2 characters specify the pixel column to tab to
as explained earlier
If a backslash is followed by an undefined special character, the backslash is
ignored and the character following it is accepted as is.
NOTE. The use of any escape codes other than those described above may
produce unpredictable results.
2-218
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
MESSage:SHOW “Hello World”
displays “Hello world” in the upper left corner of the box (you can define the box
size with the MESSAGE BOX command).
MESSage:SHOW “Í@Hello WorldÍ@ ... hello”
displays “Hello world ... hello” in the upper left corner of the box and the word
“world” is displayed in inverse video. In this example, Í stands for the escape
character. The escape character may appear differently for you depending on
your controller program.
MESSage:STATE
Controls the display of the message window on the screen.
Group
Display
Syntax
MESSage:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
MESSage:STATE?
Related Commands
MESSage:BOX
MESSage:SHOW, MESSage:CLEAR
Arguments
OFF or <NR1> = 0 removes the message window from the screen.
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 displays the message window and its contents on the screen.
NEWpass (No Query Form)
This command changes the password that enables access to password protected
data. The PASSWord command must be successfully executed before using this
command or an execution error will be generated.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
NEWpass <QString>
Related Commands
*PUD
PASSWord
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-219
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is the new password, which can contain up to 16 characters.
NEWPASS "mypassword" creates a new password (mypassword) for accessing
your protected data.
*OPC
Generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR) when all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete.
The *OPC? query places the ASCII character "1" into the output queue when all
such OPC commands are complete. The *OPC? response is not available to read
until all pending operations finish. (See page 3-1, Status and Events.)
The *OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope
with your application program. (See page 3-7, Synchronization Methods.)
Table 2-40: Commands that Generate an OPC Message
Command
Single sequence acquisition
ACQuire:STATE {ON|NR 1}
AUXin:PRObe:DEGAUss EXECute
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss EXECute
DIAg:STATE EXECute
RECAll:SETUp <file path>
RECAll:WAVEform <file path>,REF<x>
SAVe:IMAGe <file path>
SAVe:SETUp <file path>
SAVe:WAVEform <wfm>, {REF<x>}
TEKSecure
Hard copy operation
HARDCopy START
Calibration step
CALibrate:FACtory {STARt|PREVious|CONTinue}
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*OPC
*OPC?
Related Commands
Examples
2-220
Operation
BUSY?, *WAI
*OPC generates the operation complete message in the SESR at the completion of
all pending OPC operations.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
*OPC? might return 1 to indicate that all pending OPC operations are finished.
PASSWord(No Query Form)
Enables the *PUD and NEWpass set commands. Sending PASSWord without any
arguments disables these same commands. Once the password is successfully
entered, the *PUD and NEWpass commands are enabled until the oscilloscope
is powered off, or until the FACtory command or the PASSWord command with
no arguments is issued.
To change the password, you must first enter the valid password with the
PASSWord command and then change to your new password with the NEWpass
command. Remember that the password is case sensitive.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
PASSWord <QString>
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
NEWpass, *PUD
<QString> is the password and can include up to 10 characters. The factory
default password is “XYZZY” and is always valid.
PASSWORD “XYZZY” enables the *PUD and NEWpass set commands.
PASSWORD disables the *PUD and NEWpass set commands. You can still use the
query version of *PUD.
PICTBridge:DATEPrint
Enables or disables printing the date on the print output.
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
PICTBridge:DATEPrint {DEFLT|OFF|ON}
Arguments
DEFLT is the default setting of the printer.
ON enables the date print on the print output.
OFF disables the date print on the print output.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-221
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
PICTBRIDGE:DATEPRINT? might return PICTBRIDGE:DATEPRINT DEFLT
indicating that the default setting of the printer.
PICTBRIDGE:DATEPRINT ON enables the date print on the print output.
PICTBridge:DEFault (No Query Form)
Sets the arguments for all PictBridge commands to their default values. The
default values are the same as printer default settings.
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
PICTBridge:DEFault
Examples
PICTBRIDGE:DEFAULT sets all the PictBridge commands to their default values.
PICTBridge:IDPrint
Enables or disables printing the oscilloscope model and serial number on the
print output.
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
PICTBridge:IDPrint {DEFLT|OFF|ON}
PICTBridge:IDPrint?
Related Commands
Arguments
OFF disables the oscilloscope model and serial number print on the print output.
ON enables the oscilloscope model and serial number print on the print output.
Default is provided for compatibility with TDS instruments that support
pictbridge.
Examples
PICTBRIDGE:IDPRINT? might return PICTBRIDGE:IDPRINT 0 indicating that
the ID print is disabled on the print output.
PICTBRIDGE:IDPRINT ON enables the printing of oscilloscope model and serial
number on the print output.
2-222
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
PICTBridge:IMAGESize
Sets or returns the image print size.
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
PICTBridge:IMAGESize {DEFLT|IN2P5BY3P25|L|IN4BY6|L2|
IN8BY10|L4|E|CARD|HAGAKIPC|CM6BY8|CM7BY10|CM9BY13|
CM10BY15|CM13BY18|CM15BY21|CM18BY24| A4|LETTER}
Arguments
DEFLT for a default image print size.
IN2P5BY3P25 for a 2_5*3_25 image print size.
L for a 3_5*5 image print size.
IN4BY6 for a 4*6 image print size.
L2 for a 5*7 image print size.
IN8BY10 for a 8*10 image print size.
L4 for a 254 MM*178 MM image print size.
E for a 110 MM*74 MM image print size.
CARD for a 89 MM*55MM image print size.
HAGAKIPC for a 100 MM*148 MM image print size.
CM6BY8 for a 6 CM*8 CM image print size.
CM7BY10 for a 7 CM*10 CM image print size.
CM9BY13 for a 9 CM*13 CM image print size.
CM10BY15 for a 10 CM*15 CM image print size.
CM13BY18 or a 13 CM*18 CM image print size.
CM15BY21 for a 15 CM*21 CM image print size.
CM18BY24 for a 18 CM*24 CM image print size.
A4 for a A4 image print size.
LETTER for a Letter image print size.
Examples
PICTBRIDGE:IMAGESIZE? might return PICTBRIDGE:IMAGESIZE DEFLT
indicating that the default image print size.
PICTBRIDGE:IMAGESIZE CARD sets the image print size to 89 MM* 55 MM.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-223
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
PICTBridge:PAPERSize
Sets the output print paper size.
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
PICTBridge:PAPERSize
{DEFLT|L|L2|HAGAKIPCARD|MM54BY86|MM100BY150
|IN4BY6|IN8BY10|LETTER|IN11BY17|A0|A1|A2|A3|A4|A5|A6|A7|A8|A9|
B0|B1|B2|B3|
B4|B5|B6|B7|B8|B9|ROLL89MM|ROLL127MM|ROLL100MM|ROLL210MM}
Arguments
DEFLT for a default paper size.
L for a paper size L
L2 for a paper size 2L.
HAGAKIPCARD for a paper size Hagaki.
MM54BY86 for a card paper size.
MM100BY150 for paper size of 100*150 MM.
IN4BY6 for a paper size of 4*6.
IN8BY10 for a paper size of 8*10.
LETTER for a letter paper size.
IN11BY17 for a paper size of 11*17.
A0 for a A0 paper size.
A1 for a A1 paper size.
A2 for a A2 paper size.
A3 for a A3 paper size.
A4 for a A4 paper size.
A5 for a A5 paper size.
A6 for a A6 paper size.
A7 for a A7 paper size.
A8 for a A8 paper size.
A9 for a A9 paper size.
B0 for a B0 paper size.
B1 for a B1 paper size.
2-224
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
B2 for a B2 paper size.
B3 for a B3 paper size.
B4 for a B4 paper size.
B5 for a B5 paper size.
B6 for a B6 paper size.
B7 for a B7 paper size.
B8 for a B8 paper size.
B9 for a B9 paper size.
ROLL89MM for a 89 MM Roll paper size.
ROLL127MM for a 127 MM Roll paper size.
ROLL100MM for a 100 MM Roll paper size.
ROLL210MM for a 210 MM Roll paper size.
Examples
PICTBRIDGE:PAPERSIZEL sets the paper size to L.
PICTBRIDGE:PAPERSIZE? might return PICTBRIDGE:PAPERSIZE DEFLT
indicating that the paper size is set to Default.
PICTBridge:PAPERType
Sets or returns the paper type.
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
PICTBridge:PAPERType {DEFLT|PLAIN|PHOTO|FASTPHOTO}
Arguments
DEFLT for a default print paper type.
PLAIN for a plain print paper type.
PHOTO for a photo print paper type.
FASTPHOTO for a fastphoto print paper type.
Examples
PICTBRIDGE:PAPERTYPE? might return PICTBRIDGE:PAPERTYPE DEFLT
indicating that the default paper type.
PICTBRIDGE:PAPERTYPE PLAIN sets the paper type to Plain.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-225
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
PICTBridge:PRINTQual
Sets or returns the output print quality.
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
PICTBridge:PRINTQual {DEFLT|NRMAL|FINE|DRAFT}
Arguments
DEFLT for the default quality print.
NRMAL for a normal quality print.
FINE for a fine quality print.
DRAFT for a draft quality print.
Examples
PICTBRIDGE:PRINTQUAL? might return PICTBRIDGE:PRINTQUAL DEFLT
indicating that the default quality print.
PICTBRIDGE:PRINTQUAL FINE sets the print quality to Fine.
*PSC
Sets or returns the power-on status flag that controls the automatic power-on
handling of the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers. When *PSC is true, the
DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at
power-on. When *PSC is false, the current values in the DESER, SRER, and
ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is shut off and
are restored at power-on.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*PSC {OFF|ON|NR1>}
*PSC?
Related Commands
Arguments
DESE, *ESE, FACtory, *RST, *SRE
OFF sets the power-on status clear flag to false.
ON sets the power-on status clear flag to true.
<NR1> = 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false. This disables the power-on
clear allowing the oscilloscope to possibly assert SRQ after power-on; any other
2-226
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
value sets the power-on status clear flag to true, enabling the power-on status clear
preventing any SRQ assertion after power on.
Examples
*PSC 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false.
*PSC? might return 1 to indicate that the power-on status clear flag is set to true.
*PUD
Sets or returns a string of Protected User Data. This data is protected by the
PASSWord command. You can modify it only by first entering the correct
password. This password is not necessary to query the data.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*PUD {<Block>|<QString>}
*PUD?
Related Commands
Arguments
PASSWord
<Block> is a block containing up to 300 ASCII characters.
<QString> is a string containing up to 300 ASCII characters.
Examples
*PUD #229This oscilloscope belongs to me stores the string "This
oscilloscope belongs to me" in the user protected data area.
*PUD? might return #221PROPERTY OF COMPANY X
*RCL (No Query Form)
This command restores the state of the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings
stored in memory (The settings are stored using the *SAV command).
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
*RCL <NR1>
Related Commands
FACtory, *LRN?, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-227
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 10, which specifies a saved setup storage
location.
*RCL 3 restores the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory
location 3.
RECAll:SETUp (No Query Form)
Restores the state of the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory.
The settings are stored using the *SAV command.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
RECAll:SETUp {FACtory|<NR1>|<file path>}
Related Commands
Arguments
FACtory, *RCL, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp, FILESystem:CWD
FACtory restores the factory setup.
<NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 10, which specifies a saved setup storage
location.
<file path> specifies a location for an oscilloscope setup file. <file path> is
a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the
form <drive>:/<dir>/<filename>.<extension> and one or <dir>s are
optional. If you do not specify them, the oscilloscope will read the file from the
default directory (see FILESystem:CWD). <filename> stands for a filename; the
use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported. Filename extensions are
not required, but highly recommended.
Examples
RECALL:SETUP FACTORY recalls (and makes current) the oscilloscope setup
to its factory defaults.
RECALL:SETUP 2 recalls the oscilloscope setup from setup storage location 2.
RECALL:SETUP "TEK00000.SET" recalls the setup from the file TEK00000.SET
in the default directory for setups (E:/tekScope/setups).
RECAll:WAVEform (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) recalls a stored waveform to a reference location.
2-228
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
RECAll:WAVEform <file path>,REF<x>
Related Commands
Arguments
SAVe:WAVEform, FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem
REF<x> specifies a location in internal reference memory. Reference memory
location values range from 1 through 4.
<file path> specifies a location for an oscilloscope setup file. <file path> is
a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the
form <drive>:/<dir>/<filename>.<extension> and one or <dir>s are
optional. If you do not specify them, the oscilloscope will read the file from the
default directory (see FILESystem:CWD). <filename> stands for a filename; the
use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported. Filename extensions are
not required, but highly recommended.
Examples
RECALL:WAVEFORM "tek00000.isf",REF1 recalls the waveform stored in the
file named tek00000.isf from the current directory for waveforms to the reference
location 1.
REF<x>? (Query Only)
Returns reference waveform data for the channel specified by <x>, where x is
the reference channel number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
REF<x>?
REF<x>:DATE? (Query Only)
Returns the date that reference waveform data for channel <x> was copied into
the internal reference memory, where x is the reference channel number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
REF<x>:DATE?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-229
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
REF<x>:HORizontal:DELay:TIMe
Sets or returns the horizontal delay time for reference waveform <x>, where x
is the reference channel number. The delay time is expressed in seconds and is
limited to ±5 times the reference horizontal scale.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
REF<x>:HORizontal:DELay:TIMe <NR3>
REF<x>:HORizontal:DELay:TIMe?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the delay time in seconds.
REF2:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 4.0E-6 sets the horizontal delay time for
the REF2 waveform to 4 μs.
REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the horizontal scale for reference waveform <x>, where x is the
reference channel number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the horizontal scale in seconds.
REF1:HORIZONTAL:SCALE? might return REF1:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 4.0E-4.
REF<x>:LABel
Sets or returns the reference waveform label for the channel specified by <x>,
where x is the reference channel number.
Group
2-230
Vertical
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
Examples
REF<x>:LABel <Qstring>
REF<x>:LABel?
<Qstring> is an alpha-numeric string of text, enclosed in quotes, that contains
the label text for the reference channel <x> waveform. The text string is limited
to 30 characters.
REF2:LABEL? might return :REF2:LABEL “Clk Wfm 2”.
REF<x>:POSition
Sets or returns the vertical position for channel <x>, where x is the reference
channel number.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
REF<x>:POSition <NR3>
REF<x>:POSition?
Arguments
<NR3> is the vertical position in volts.
REF<x>:SCAle
Sets or returns the vertical scale for the channel specified by <x>, where x is
the reference channel number.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
REF<x>:SCAle <NR3>
REF<x>:SCAle?
Arguments
NR3 is the vertical scale in volts
REF<x>:TIMe? (Query Only)
Returns the time that reference waveform data was copied into the internal
reference memory for reference channel <x>, where x is the reference channel
number.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-231
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Vertical
Syntax
REF<x>:TIMe?
Examples
REF2:TIME? might return “16:54:05”.
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
Sets or returns the vertical position of the reference waveform specified by <x>,
where x is the reference channel number.
Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up,
and decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down. Position
adjusts only the display position of a waveform. The position value determines the
vertical graticule coordinate at which signal values are displayed. For example, if
the position for Reference 3 is set to 2.0, the signal represented by that reference
will be displayed at 2.0 divisions above the center of the screen.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition?
Related Commands
CH<x>:POSition, MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition
Arguments
<NR3> is the desired position, in divisions from the center horizontal graticule.
Examples
REF2:VERTICAL:POSITION 1.3E+00 positions the Reference 2 input signal
The range is from –5.0 to 5.0 divisions.
1.3 divisions above the center horizontal graticule.
REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION? might return :REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION
-1.3000E+00 indicating that the current position of Reference 1 is 1.3 divisions
below the center horizontal graticule.
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or returns the vertical scale for the reference waveform specified by <x>,
where x is the reference channel number.
2-232
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter. For a signal with constant
amplitude, increasing the Scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller.
Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger.
Scale affects all waveforms, but affects reference and math waveforms differently
from channel waveforms:
For reference and math waveforms, this setting controls the display only,
graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition
hardware.
For channel waveforms, this setting controls the vertical size of the acquisition
window as well as the display scale. The range and resolution of scale
values depends on the probe attached and any other external factors you have
specified.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle?
Related Commands
CH<x>:SCAle, MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle
Arguments
<NR3> is the gain in user units-per-division.
Examples
REF2:VERTICAL:SCALE 100E-03 sets the Reference 2 scale to 100 mV per
division.
REF2:VERTICAL:SCALE? might return :REF2:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000e+00 indicating that the current vertical scale setting for Reference 2 is
1 V per division.
REM (No Query Form)
Embeds a comment within programs as a means of internally documenting the
programs. The oscilloscope ignores these embedded comment lines.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
REM <QString>
Arguments
<QString> is a string that can contain a maximum of 80 characters.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-233
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
REM "This is a comment" is a comment string that the oscilloscope will
ignore.
*RST (No Query Form)
Resets the oscilloscope to the factory default settings. The *RST command does
not alter the following:
Calibration data that affect device specifications
The Output Queue
The Service Request Enable Register setting
The Power-on status clear flag setting
Alias definitions
Stored settings
The *PUD? Response
Any of the values associated with the DATA command.
Oscilloscope password
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*RST
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
FACtory, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp, *PSC, *RCL, *SAV
None
*RST resets the oscilloscope settings to factory defaults.
*SAV (No Query Form)
Stores the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location. You can use
the *RCL command to restore the oscilloscope to this saved state at a later time.
2-234
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
*SAV <NR1>
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
*RCL, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp
<NR1> specifies a location in which to save the state of the oscilloscope. Location
values range from 1 through 10. Using an out-of-range location value causes an
execution error. Any settings that have been stored previously at this location
will be overwritten.
*SAV 2 saves the current oscilloscope state in memory location 2.
SAVe:ASSIgn:TYPe
Sets or returns the assignment of the data to be saved when the front-panel Save
button is pressed.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:ASSIgn:TYPe {IMAGe|WAVEform|SETUp}
SAVe:ASSIgn:TYPe?
Arguments
IMAGe assigns the Save button to save screen images.
WAVEform assigns the Save button to save waveforms.
SETUp assigns the Save button to save setups.
SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS<x> (No Query Form)
Saves the data from bus<x> to a specified file and location; where x is the bus
number
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS<x> <file path>
Arguments
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path location
where the event table will be stored.
NOTE. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 125 characters, followed by a
period (".") and the three-character extension. Waveform files should have a .csv
extension for comma-separated spreadsheet format files.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-235
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SAVe:IMAGe (No Query Form)
Saves a capture of the screen image into the specified file. Supported image
formats are PNG, Windows Bitmap, and TIFF. If an extension for a supported file
type is added to the file name, then the corresponding format will be used. If no
supported extension is added to the file, the format to use will be determined by
the value obtained from the :SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat? query.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:IMAGe <file path>
Related Commands
Arguments
SAVe:ASSIgn:TYPe
<file path> is a filename, including path, where the image will be saved.
If you do not specify a directory, the oscilloscope will store the file in the
current working directory. File name extensions are not required but are highly
recommended. The images will be saved in E:/.
SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat
Sets or returns the file format to use for saving screen images when the file
type cannot be determined from the given file name or when screen images are
captured by using the front panel.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat {PNG|BMP|TIFf}
SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat?
Related Commands
Arguments
SAVe:IMAGe
PNG saves the file in Portable Network Graphics format.
BMP saves the file in Microsoft Windows bitmap format.
TIFf saves the file in Tagged Image File Format.
2-236
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SAVe:IMAGe:LAYout
Sets or returns the layout to use for saved screen images.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:IMAGe:LAYout {LANdscape|PORTRait}
SAVe:IMAGe:LAYout?
Arguments
LANdscape specifies that screen images are saved in landscape format.
PORTRait specifies that screen images are saved in portrait format.
SAVe:SETUp (No Query Form)
Stores the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location. You can later
use the *RCL command to restore the oscilloscope to this saved state.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:SETUp {<file path>|<NR1>}
Related Commands
Arguments
*RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *SAV
<file path> is the target location for storing the setup file. <file path> is a
quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the
form <drive>:<dir>/<filename>. <extension> and one or <dir>s are optional.
If you do not specify them, the oscilloscope will store the file in the current
working directory. <filename> stands for a filename. (Use of wildcard characters
in filenames is not supported.) Filename extensions are not required but are highly
recommended. For setups, use the extension ".SET".
<NR1> specifies a location for saving the current front-panel setup. The
front-panel setup value ranges from 1 to 10. Using an out-of-range value causes
an execution error. Any settings that have been stored previously at this location
will be overwritten.
Examples
SAVE:SETUP 5 saves the current oscilloscope setup in memory location 5.
SAVE:SETUP "TEK00000.SET" saves the current oscilloscope setup in the file
TEK00000.SET in the current working directory.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-237
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SAVe:WAVEform (No Query Form)
This command saves a specified waveform or all displayed waveforms (excluding
serial bus waveforms). Only individual analog waveforms (CH<x>, MATH and
REF<x>) can be saved to reference memory locations.
You can save all displayed waveforms, excluding serial bus waveforms, to a
single CSV file when the SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT is set to SPREADSHEET.
You can save all displayed waveforms, excluding serial bus
waveforms to consecutive ISF (internal save format) files when the
SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT is set to INTERNAL.
NOTE. For MSO models, reduced resolution waveform data is not available for
the digital channels.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:WAVEform[<wfm>,{REF<x>}] | [<wfm>, <QString>] | [ALL,
<QString>]
Related Commands
Arguments
RECAll:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
<wfm>, <REF<x>> saves the specified waveform to the specified reference
memory location. <wfm> can be any live analog channel (where <x> is the
channel number), the MATH1 waveform, or another reference waveform (such
as REF1).
<wfm>, <QString> saves the specified waveform to the file specified in the
quoted string argument. Any live channel (such as CH1), the MATH1 waveform,
any reference waveform can be saved to a file.
ALL, <QString> saves all displayed waveforms, excluding serial bus
waveforms, to a single CSV file specified by the quoted string argument when the
SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT is set to SPREADSHEET, or saves all displayed
waveforms, excluding serial bus waveforms to individual ISF (internal save
format) files with a file name prefix specified by the argument with an underscore
(_) and the waveform ID (such as CH1, REF1, MATH) appended to the file
name(s).
Examples
2-238
SAVE:WAVEFORM CH1,REF1 saves the CH1 waveform in reference memory
location 1.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
:SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT SPREADSHEET; :SAVE:WAVEFORM ALL,
"E:/test_folder/test1_all.csv" saves all displayed waveforms
(excluding serial bus waveforms) to E:/test_folder/test1_all.csv.
:SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat INTERNal; :SAVe:WAVEform ALL,
"E:/test_folder/test1" saves all displayed waveforms (excluding serial bus
waveforms) to individual files named E:/test_folder/test1_<wfm>.isf
(for example test1_CH1.isf).
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
Specifies or returns the file format for saved waveforms. Waveform header and
timing information is included in the resulting file of non-internal formats.
The oscilloscope saves DPO waveforms as a 500 x 200 matrix, with the first
row corresponding to the most recently acquired data. The values specified by
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP determine the range of waveform data to output.
In the event that DATa:STOP value is greater than the current record length, the
current record length determines the last output value.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat {INTERNal|SPREADSheet}
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat?
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Arguments
INTERNal specifies that waveforms are saved in an internal format, using a .isf
filename extension. These files can be recalled as reference waveforms. When this
argument is specified, the settings specified via the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP
commands have no meaning as the entire waveform is saved.
SPREADSheet specifies that waveform data is saved in a format that contains
comma delimited values. These waveform data files are named using the .csv
filename extension. Saving waveforms in CSV format enables spreadsheet
programs to import the data.
Examples
SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT INTERNAL specifies that the internal file format
is the format used for saving waveforms.
SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT? might return :SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT
INTERNAL indicating that waveforms are saved using the internal format.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-239
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SAVe:WAVEform:GATIng
Specifies whether save waveform operations should save the entire waveform
(NONe) or a specified portion of the waveform.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:WAVEform:GATIng {NONe|CURSors|SCREEN}
SAVe:WAVEform:GATIng?
Arguments
CURSors turns on cursors and the gates are the waveform record points at the
cursor positions.
NONe saves the entire waveform.
SCREEN, if zoom is on, the gates are the start and end waveform record points of
the zoom (upper) graticule, otherwise the gates are the start and end waveform
record points of the main graticule.
Examples
SAVE:WAVEFORM:GATING CURSors specifies that, when the waveform gating
is set to cursors, save waveform operations should save the waveform points
between the cursors. If cursors are turned off, waveform gating automatically
reverts to NONE.
SAVe:WAVEform:SPREADSheet:RESOlution
Specifies whether to save the full (LRL) or reduced (thumb) resolution waveform
to a CSV file.
Group
Waveform Enhanced
Syntax
SAVe:WAVEform:SPREADSheet:RESOlution {FULL|REDUced}
SAVe:WAVEform:SPREADSheet:RESOlution?
Arguments
FULL specifies that full resolution waveform is saved to a CSV file.
REDUced specifies that reduced resolution waveform is saved to a CSV file.
Examples
SAVE:WAVEFORM:SPREADSHEET:RESOLUTION? might return
SAVE:WAVEFORM:SPREADSHEET:RESOLUTIONFULL indicating that full
resolution waveform is saved to a CSV file.
2-240
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SAVE:WAVEFORM:SPREADSHEET:RESOLUTIONREDUced sets the reduced
resolution waveform to be saved to a CSV file.
SEARCH? (Query Only)
Returns all search-related settings.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH?
Examples
SEARCH? might return:
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:CONDITION SS;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:CONDITION SS;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:MOSI:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:MOSI:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:MISO:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:MISO:VALUE
“XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:CONDITION TXSTART;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:CONDITION TXSTART;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:RX:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C: RX:DATA:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:DATA:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:DATA:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:DATA:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION START;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:T RIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:CONDITION START;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1;
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-241
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE USER;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE USER;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE
"XXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE
"XXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION SOF;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:CONDITION SOF;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A: BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:QUALIF IER EQUAL;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE
STANDARD;
:SEARCH: SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE
STANDARD;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRI GGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIG GER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE
"XXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE
"XXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC;
2-242
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:PARALLEL:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE
B1;:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TYPE EDGE;
LEVEL 0.0E+0;LEVEL:CH1 0.0E+0; CH20.0E+0;CH30.0E+0;CH4
0.0E+0;MATH 0.0E+0;
REF1 0.0E+0 ;REF2
0.0E+0;:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1 1.4000;
CH2 1.4000; CH3 1.4000;CH4 1.4000;MATH 492.0000E-3;REF1
492.0000E-3;REF2 492.0000E-3;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0;CH2
0.0E+0; CH30.0E+0;
CH4 0.0E+0;MATH 0.0E+0;REF1 0.0E+0;REF2 0.0E+0;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE RISE;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION AND;
THRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0;CH2 0.0E+0; CH3 0.0E+0;CH4 0.0E+0;MATH
0.0E+0;REF1 0.0E+0; REF20.0E+0;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGE R:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 X;CH2 X;CH3 X;CH4
X;MATH X;REF1 X;REF2 X;
REF3 X;REF4 X;CLOCK:SOURCE NONE;EDGE RISE;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D0 X;D1 X;D2 X;
D3 X ;D4 X;D5 X;D6 X;D7 X;D8 X;D9 X;D10 X;D11 X;D12 X;D13
X;D14 X;D15 X;
:SEARCH: SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH1 X;CH2
X;CH3 X;
CH4 X;MATH X;REF1 X;REF2 X;RE F3 X;REF4 X;D0 X;D1 X;D2 X;D3
X;D4 X;
D5 X;D6 X;D7 X ;D8 X;D9X;D10 X;D11 X;D12 X; D13 X;D14 X;D15
X;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT 2.0000E-9;MORELIMIT 2.0000E-9;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN
LESSTHAN;WIDTH 8.0000E-9;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN
OCCURS;WIDTH 8.0000E-9;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN
SLOWER;DELTATIME 8.0000E-9;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1;EDGE
RISE;THRESHOLD 0.0E+0;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE NONE;THRESHOLD
9.9100E+37;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.000
0E-9;SETTIME 2.0000E-9;
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-243
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
THRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0;CH2 0.0E+0;CH3 0.0E+0;CH4 0.0E+0; MATH
0.0E+0;REF1 0.0E+0;REF2 0.0E+0;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:STATE 0
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy (No Query Form)
Copies the search criteria to the trigger, or the trigger criteria to a search. <x>
is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy {SEARCHtotrigger|TRIGgertosearch}
Arguments
SEARCHtotrigger copies the search criteria to the trigger
TRIGgertosearch copies the trigger criteria to the search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:STATE
Sets the search state to on or off. <x> is the search number, which is always 1.
The query form returns the search state.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:STATE?
Arguments
OFF or <NR1> = 0 sets the search state to off.
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 sets the search state to on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL? (Query Only)
Returns the total number of matches for the search. The total number of matches
may be more than the number of marks placed. <x> is the search number, which
is always 1.
Group
2-244
Search
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Returns
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL?
<NR1> is the total number of matches.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS? (Query Only)
Queries the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS? settings.
Group
Bus
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS?
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS??
Examples
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:CONDITION SS;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:CONDITION SS;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:MOSI:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:MOSI:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:MISO:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:MISO:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:CONDITION TXSTART;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:CONDITION TXSTART;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:RX:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1 :TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:RX:DATA:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:DATA:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:DATA:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:DATA:VALUE "
XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION START;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:CONDITION START;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX";
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-245
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C: DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR 7;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE USER;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE USER;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE
"XXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE
"XXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION SOF;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:CONDITION SOF;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2: CAN:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE
STANDARD;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE
STANDARD;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX
";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE
"XXXXXX";
2-246
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE
"XXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC;
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:PARALLEL:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX";
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B1
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
Sets or returns the search condition for a CAN trigger search. SEARCH<x> is the
search number and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
{SOF|FRAMEtype|IDentifier|DATA|IDANDDATA|EOF|ACKMISS|ERROR}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition?
Arguments
SOF specifies a search based on the start of frame.
FRAMEtype specifies a search based on the frame type.
IDentifier specifies a search based on the frame identifier.
DATA specifies a search based on the frame data.
IDANDDATA specifies a search based on the frame identifier and data.
EOF specifies a search base on the end of frame.
ACKMISS specifies a search based on the missing ACK field.
ERROR specifies a search based on a bit stuffing error.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
Sets or returns the CAN search to be valid for Read, Write, or Either condition if
the criteria is IDentifier. SEARCH<x> is the search number and B<x> is the bus
number. This only applies if the search condition is IDentifier.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-247
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
{READ|WRITE|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection?
Related Commands
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
READ specifies the read condition.
WRITE specifies the write condition.
NOCARE specifies either a read or write condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier for a search. SEARCH<x> is the search
number and B<x> is the bus number. This only applies if the trigger condition is
IDANDDATA or DATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
{LESSThan|MOREThan|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|EQual}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier?
Related Commands
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
LESSThan searches for bus data less than the value specified by
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue.
MOREThan searches for bus data more than the value specified by
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue.
UNEQual searches for bus data not equal to the value specified by
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue.
2-248
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
LESSEQual searches for bus data less than or equal to the value specified by
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue.
MOREEQual searches for bus data more than or equal to the value specified by
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue.
EQual searches for bus data equal to the value specified by SEARCH:
SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for a CAN search if
the search condition is DATA or IDANDDATA. SEARCH<x> is the search number
and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe <NR1>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR1> is the data string length in bytes.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a CAN search if the search
condition is ID or IDANDDATA. SEARCH<x> is the search number and B<x>
is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue <bin>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue?
Related Commands
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
<bin> is the data in binary format.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-249
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
Sets or returns the CAN Frame Type to be used if the trigger search condition is
Frame Type. SEARCH<x> is the search number and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
{DATA|REMote|ERRor|OVERLoad}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype?
Arguments
DATA specifies a data frame.
REMote specifies a remote frame.
ERRor specifies an error frame.
OVERLoad specifies an overload frame.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe
Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode for a trigger search to a standard or
extended format. SEARCH<x> is the search number and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:
ADDRess}:MODe {STandard|EXTended}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:
ADDRess}:MODe?
Arguments
STandard specifies an 11-bit identifier field.
EXTended specifies a 29-bit identifier field.
2-250
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue
Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for a CAN trigger search if
the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA. SEARCH<x> is the search number
and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:
ADDRess}:VALue <bin>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:
ADDRess}:VALue?
Arguments
<bin> is the address in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
Sets or returns the I2C address mode to 7 or 10-bit. SEARCH<x> is the search
number and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
{ADDR7|ADDR10}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe?
Arguments
ADDR7 specifies 7-bit addresses.
ADDR10 specifies 10-bit addresses.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
Sets or returns the I2C address type. SEARCH<x> is the search number and B<x>
is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-251
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
{GENeralcall|STARtbyte|HSmode|EEPROM|USER}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe?
Arguments
GENeralcall specifies the GENeralcall address type.
STARtbyte specifies the STARtbyte address type.
HSmode specifies the HSmode address type
EEPROM specifies the EEPROM address type.
USER specifies a user address.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for an I2C trigger search if
the search condition is ADDR or ADDRANDDATA. SEARCH<x> is the search
number and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue <bin>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue?
Arguments
<bin> is the address in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
Sets or returns the search condition for an I2C trigger search. SEARCH<x> is the
search number and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
Group
2-252
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Search
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
{STARt|STOP|REPEATstart|ACKMISS|ADDRess|DATA|ADDRANDDATA}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition?
STARt specifies a search based on a start condition.
STOP specifies a search based on a stop condition.
REPEATstart specifies a search based on a repeat of start condition.
ACKMISS specifies a search based on a missing acknowledgement condition.
ADDRess specifies a search based on an address.
DATA specifies a search based on a data condition.
ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on an address and data condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
Sets or returns the I2C search condition to be valid on a Read, Write, or Either
condition. SEARCH<x> is the search number and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
{READ|WRITE|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection?
Arguments
READ specifies a read condition.
WRITE specifies a write condition.
NOCARE specifies either a read or write condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an I2C trigger
search if the search condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA. SEARCH<x> is the
search number and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-253
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe <NR1>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR1> is the data string length in bytes.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for an I2C trigger search if the
search condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA. SEARCH<x> is the search
number and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue <bin>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue?
Arguments
<bin> is the data in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition
Sets or returns the search condition for a LIN search.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition
{SYNCField|IDentifier|DATA|IDANDDATA|WAKEup|SLEEP|ERROR}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition?
Arguments
SYNCField specifies to search on the sync field.
IDentifier specifies to search on the identifier.
DATA specifies to search on the data.
2-254
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
IDANDDATA specifies to search on the identifier and the data.
WAKEup specifies to search on wake up.
SLEEP specifies to search on sleep.
ERROR specifies to search on errors.
Examples
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD
indicating a search on the sync field.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN searches if the search
condition is ID or IDANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue?
Arguments
<QString> is a quoted string of 1s, 0s, or Xs representing the binary data string
Examples
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
to be used for LIN searches if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA.
indicating that the high value is don't care.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier. This only applies if the trigger condition is
IDANDDATA or DATA.
Conditions
Group
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Bus
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-255
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
{LESSThan|MOREThan|EQUal|UNEQual|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier?
LESSThan sets the LIN data qualifier to less than.
MOREThan sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than.
EQUal sets the LIN data qualifier to equal.
UNEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to not equal.
LESSEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to less than or equal.
MOREEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to more than or equal.
INrange sets the LIN data qualifier to in range.
OUTrange sets the LIN data qualifier to out of range.
Examples
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER LESSThan
sets the data qualifier to lessthan.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
indicating that the data qualifier is equal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN Search, if
search condition is DATA or IDANDDATA.
Conditions
Group
Bus
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe <NR1>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
Examples
2-256
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
<NR1> is the length of the data in bytes.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 8 sets the LIN data
size is 8 bytes.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1 indicating that
the LIN data size is 1 byte.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string used for a LIN search if the search condition
is ID or IDANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is the binary data string for the search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
indicating that the data value is don't care.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE
Sets or returns the error type used for a LIN Search.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE
{SYNC|PARity|CHecksum}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE?
Arguments
SYNC specifies a sync error type.
PARity specifies a parity error type.
CHecksum specifies a checksum error type.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-257
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC indicating a
SYNC error type.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN search if search condition is
ID or IDANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is a quoted string specifying the binary address string to be used for
LIN search if search condition is ID or IDANDDATA.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE
"XXXXXX" indicating that the binary address is undefined.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a parallel trigger search.
SEARCH<x> is the search number and B<x> is the bus number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:VALue <QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:VALue?
Arguments
2-258
<QString> is the binary data string.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition
Sets or returns the condition for a RS232 trigger search. SEARCH<x> is the search
number and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition
{RXSTArt|RXDATA|RXENDPacket|RXPARity|TXSTArt|
TXDATA|TXENDPacket|TXPARity}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition?
Arguments
RXSTArt specifies a search based on the RX Start Bit.
RXDATA specifies a search based on RX Data.
RXENDPacket specifies a search based on the RX End of Packet condition.
RXPARIty specifies a search based on the RX parity.
TXSTArt specifies a search base on the TX Start Bit.
TXDATA specifies a search based on TX Data.
TXENDPacket specifies a search based on the TX End of Packet condition.
TXPARIty specifies a search based on the TX parity.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string for a RS232 trigger search if the trigger
condition is RX. SEARCH<x> is the search number and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR1> is the length of the data string in Bytes.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-259
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string for a RS232 trigger search if the condition
involves RX. SEARCH<x> is the search number and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue?
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string to be used for a RS232 trigger search if
the Trigger condition is TX. SEARCH<x> is the search number and B<x> is the
bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR1> is the length of the data string in Bytes.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a RS232 trigger search if
the condition involves TX. SEARCH<x> is the search number and B<x> is the
bus number.
Conditions
Group
2-260
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Search
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:VALue?
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition
Sets or returns the search condition for a SPI trigger search. SEARCH<x> is the
search number and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition
{SS|MISO|MOSI|MISOMOSI}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition?
Arguments
SS specifies a search based on the Slave Selection condition.
MISO specifies a search based on the Master-In Slave-Out condition.
MOSI specifies a search based on the Master-Out Slave-In condition.
MISOMOSI specifies a search based on the Master-In Slave-Out and Master-Out
Slave-In conditions.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MISO|:IN}:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string for an SPI trigger search if the search
condition is MISO or MISOMOSI. SEARCH<x> is the search number and B<x>
is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MISO|:IN}:
VALue <bin>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MISO|:IN}:
VALue?
Arguments
<bin> is the data string in binary format.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-261
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string for an SPI trigger search if search the
condition is MOSI, or MISOMOSI. SEARCH<x> is the search number and B<x>
is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}:
VALue <bin>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}:
VALue?
Arguments
<bin> is the data in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string for an SPI trigger search if the search
condition is MISO, MOSI, or MISOMOSI. SEARCH<x> is the search number
and B<x> is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe <NR1>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR1> is the data string length in bytes.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce
Sets or returns a bus serial search. <x> is the search number.
Conditions
2-262
This command requires a DPO2AUTO or DPO2EMBD application module.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce {B1|B2}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce?
Arguments
B1 specifies the Bus 1 source.
B2 specifies the Bus 2 source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
Sets or returns the slope for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a
mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe?
Arguments
RISe specifies a rising edge.
FALL specifies a falling edge.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source waveform for an edge trigger search to determine where
to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one input channel as the edge source, where <x> is the channel
number.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-263
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel
Sets or returns the level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a
mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel {<NR3>|TTL|ECL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the trigger level, in volts.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>
Sets or returns the level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a
mark. SEARCH<x> is the search number and CH<x> is the channel number. Each
channel can have an independent level.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x> {<NR3>|TTL|ECL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the trigger level in volts.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:MATH[1]
Sets or returns the math waveform level for an edge trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. <x> is the search number. The value of MATH is 1 for
all oscilloscopes.
Group
2-264
Search
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:MATH {TTL|ECL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:MATH?
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:REF<x>
Sets or returns the specified reference waveform level for an edge trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. SEARCH<x> is the search number and REF<x>
is the reference channel number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:REF<x> {TTL|ECL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:REF<x>?
Arguments
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
Sets or returns the logic operator for a logic trigger search to determine where to
place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion {AND|NANd}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion?
Arguments
AND places a mark if all conditions are true.
NANd places a mark if any of the conditions is false.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. SEARCH<x> is the search number and CH<x> is the
channel number.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-265
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> {HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>?
Arguments
HIGH specifies the logic high.
LOW specifies the logic low.
X specifies a "don't care" state.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets or returns whether the clock edge is a rising or falling for a logic search to
determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE
{FALL|RISe|EITher}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE?
Arguments
RISe specifies a rising edge.
FALL specifies a falling edge.
EITher specifies either a falling or rising edge.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns the clock source definition for a logic trigger search. <x> is the
search number. If a clock source is defined, then the logic search is determined by
the state of the other inputs at the clock transition. If no clock source is defined,
then the logic search is determined only by the state of the inputs.
2-266
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce
{CH<x>|MATH|REF|D<x>|NONe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
CH<x> specifies a channel input as the clock source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3, or 4.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the clock source.
REF specifies the reference waveform as the clock source.
D<x> specifies the digital waveform as the clock source, where <x>=0–15
NONe specifies no clock source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:D<x>
Sets or returns the waveform logic criteria for a trigger search. SEARCH<x> is the
search number and D<x> is the digital channel number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:D<x> {HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:D<x>?
Arguments
HIGH specifies a high logic level.
LOW specifies a low logic level.
X specifies a “don't care” condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:MATH
Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:MATH {HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:MATH?
Arguments
HIGH specifies a high logic level.
LOW specifies a low logic level.
X specifies a “don't care” condition.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-267
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:REF<x>
Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. SEARCH<x> is the search number and REF<x> is the
reference channel number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:REF<x> {HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:REF<x>?
Arguments
HIGH specifies a high logic level.
LOW specifies a low logic level.
X specifies a “don't care” condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH<x>
Sets or returns the logic criteria for a logic pattern trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. SEARCH<x> is the search number and CH<x> is the
channel number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH<x>
{HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH<x>?
Arguments
HIGH specifies a high logic level.
LOW specifies a low logic level.
X specifies a “don't care” condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:D<x>
Sets or returns the logic criteria for a logic pattern search to determine where to
place a mark. SEARCH<x> is the search number and D<x> is the digital channel
number.
Group
2-268
Search
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:D<x>
{HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:D<x>?
HIGH specifies a high logic level.
LOW specifies a low logic level.
X specifies a “don't care” condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:MATH
Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic pattern trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:MATH
{HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:MATH?
Arguments
HIGH specifies a high logic level.
LOW specifies a low logic level.
X specifies a “don't care” condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:REF<x>
Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a pattern trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. SEARCH<x> is the search number and REF<x> is the
reference channel number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:REF<x>
{HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:REF<x>?
Arguments
HIGH specifies a high logic level.
LOW specifies a low logic level.
X specifies a “don't care” condition.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-269
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
Sets or returns the condition for generating a logic pattern trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
{TRUe|FALSe|LESSThan|MOREThan|Than|EQUal|UNEQual}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn?
Arguments
TRUe places a mark when the pattern becomes true.
FALSe places a mark when the pattern becomes false.
LESSThan places a mark if the specific pattern is true less than the time set by
the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
command.
MOREThan places a mark if the specific pattern is true more than the time set
by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
command.
EQUal places a mark if the specific pattern is true longer than the time set by
the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
command, but less than the specified time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit command.
UNEQual places a mark if the specific pattern is true less than the time set by
the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
command, or longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit command.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still
generate an A logic pattern search to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit?
Arguments
2-270
<NR3> specifies the maximum amount of time to hold the pattern true.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still
generate an A logic pattern search to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the minimum amount of time to hold the pattern true.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the channel threshold level for a logic trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. SEARCH<x> is the search number and CH<x> is the
channel number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
{<NR3>|TTL|ECL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the threshold voltage level.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:MATH
Sets or returns the math waveform threshold level for a logic trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:MATH
{TTL|ECL|<NR3>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:MATH?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-271
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
<NR3> specifies the threshold voltage level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:REF<x>
Sets or returns the reference waveform threshold level for a logic trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. SEARCH<x> is the search number and REF<x>
is the reference channel number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:REF<x>
{TTL|ECL|<NR3>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:REF<x>?
Arguments
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
<NR3> specifies the threshold voltage level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the channel waveform lower threshold to determine where to place
a mark. This setting is applied to all channel searches that use a lower threshold.
SEARCH<x> is the search number and CH<x> is the channel number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
{TTL|ECL|<NR3>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>?
Arguments
TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECLlevel of –1.3 V.
2-272
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:MATH
Sets or returns the math waveform lower threshold to determine where to place a
mark. This setting is applied to all math searches that use a lower threshold.
<x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:MATH
{TTL|ECL|<NR3>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:MATH?
Arguments
TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL level of –1.3 V.
<NR3> specifies the threshold voltage level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:REF<x>
Sets or returns the reference waveform lower threshold to determine where to
place a mark. This setting is applied to all reference searches that use a lower
threshold.
SEARCH<x> is the search number and REF<x> is the reference channel number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:REF<x>
{TTL|ECL|<NR3>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:REF<x>?
Arguments
TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL level of –1.3 V.
<NR3> specifies the threshold voltage level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity for a pulse trigger search to determine where to place a
mark. <x> is the search number.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-273
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
{NEGative|POSitive}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity?
Arguments
POSITIVe places a mark only when the polarity of the pulse is positive.
NEGative places a mark only when the polarity of the pulse is negative.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source waveform for a pulse trigger search to determine where
to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH|REF}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one input channel as the edge source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source.
REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
Sets or returns the condition for generating a pulse width search to determine
where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn?
Arguments
2-274
LESSThan places a mark if the pulse width is less than the time set by the
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth command.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MOREthan places a mark if the pulse width is more than the time set by the
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth command.
EQUal places a mark if the pulse width is equal to the time set by the
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth command within a
tolerance of ±5%.
UNEQual places a mark if the pulse width is unequal to the time the time set by
the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth command within a
tolerance of ±5%.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
Sets or returns the pulse width setting for a pulse width trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth <NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth?
Arguments
<NR3> is the pulse width.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to
place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
{EITher|NEGative|POSitive}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity?
Arguments
POSitive places a mark when the rising edge crosses the low threshold and
the falling edge re-crosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing
the high threshold.
NEGative places a mark when the falling edge crosses the high threshold and
the rising edge re-crosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing
the low threshold.
EITher places a mark on a runt of either polarity.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-275
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to
place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH|REF}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1–CH4 specifies an input channel as the edge source.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source.
REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
Sets or returns the condition setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to
place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|OCCURS}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn?
Arguments
OCCURS argument specifies a trigger event if a runt of any detectable width occurs.
LESSthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected
with width less than the time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
RUNT:WIDth command.
MOREthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected
with width more than the time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
RUNT:WIDth command.
EQUal argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the pattern is true for a time
period equal to the time period specified in SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
RUNT:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.
NOTEQual argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the pattern is true for a
time period greater than or less than (but not equal) the time period specified in
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.
2-276
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth
Sets or returns the width setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to
place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the minimum width, in seconds.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets or returns the clock slope setting for a setup/hold trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL|RISe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?
Arguments
FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge.
RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns the clock source setting for an setup/hold trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH|REF}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?
Related Commands
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-277
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
CH1–CH4 specifies an input channel as the edge source.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source.
REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
Sets or returns the clock threshold setting for an setup/hold trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
{<NR3>|TTL|ECL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold?
Arguments
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
<NR3> is the clock level, in volts.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
Sets or returns the data source setting for an setup/hold trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. <x> is the search number. You cannot specify the same
source for both clock and data.
Group
Search
Syntax
DPO Models:
Related Commands
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH|REF|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce?
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
DPO Models:
CH1–CH4 specifies an input channel as the search source.
2-278
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source.
REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source.
D0–D15 specifies the digital waveform as the search source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
Sets or returns the data threshold setting for an setup/hold trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
{<NR3>|TTL|ECL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold?
Arguments
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
<NR3> is the clock level, in volts.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime
Sets or returns the hold time setting for an setup/hold trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the hold time setting in seconds. Positive values for hold time
occur after the clock edge. Negative values occur before the clock edge.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime
Sets or returns the setup time setting for an setup/hold trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-279
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold lower threshold to determine
where to place a mark. Search<x> is the search number, which is always 1.
CH<x> is the channel number.
Conditions
MSO oscilloscopes only.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:CH<x> <NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:CH<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> is the lower threshold in volts.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold{:MATH|:MATH1}
Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold lower threshold to determine
where to place a mark. Where <x> is the search number, which is always 1.
Conditions
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold{:MATH|:MATH1}
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold{:MATH|:MATH1}?
Arguments
2-280
MSO oscilloscopes only.
<NR3> is the lower threshold in volts.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:REF<x>
Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold lower threshold to determine
where to place a mark. Search<x> is the search number, which is always 1.
REF<x> is the reference waveform number.
Conditions
MSO oscilloscopes only.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:REF<x> <NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:REF<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> is the lower threshold in volts.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime
Sets or returns the transition time setting for an transition trigger search to
determine where to place a mark.<x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the transition time, in seconds.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity setting for an transition trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity
{EITher|NEGative|POSitive}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-281
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
POSitive specifies that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower (most
negative) to higher (most positive) level for transition triggering to occur.
NEGative specifies that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper (most positive)
to lower (most negative) level for transition triggering to occur.
EITher specifies either positive or negative polarity.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source setting for an transition trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1–CH4 specifies one input channel as the edge source.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn
Sets or returns the condition setting for an transition trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn
{SLOWer|FASTer|EQual|UNEQual}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn?
Arguments
FASTer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is faster than the set
volts/second rate.
SLOWer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is slower than
the set volts/second rate.
EQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is equal to the set
volts/second rate within a ±5% tolerance.
2-282
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is not equal to
the set volts/second rate ±5%.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe
Sets or returns the trigger type setting for a search to determine where to place a
mark. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe
{EDGe|SETHold|PULSEWidth|RUNt|TRAnsition|LOGIc|BUS (with the
appropriate application module installed)}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe?
Arguments
RUNt triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not
cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first. The thresholds are
set with the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> and
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> commands.
PULSEWIdth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified
polarity and is either inside or outside the limits as specified by
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit and
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit.
The polarity is selected using the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
POLarity command.
TRAnsition triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction
as the specified polarity and the transition time between the two threshold
crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the channel waveform upper threshold to determine where to
place a mark. This setting is applied to all channel searches that uses an upper
threshold.SEARCH<x> is the search number and CH<x> is the channel number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> {TTL|ECL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-283
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:MATH
Sets or returns the math waveform upper threshold to determine where to place a
mark. This setting is applied to all math waveform searches that uses an upper
threshold. <x> is the search number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:MATH {TTL|ECL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:MATH?
Arguments
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:REF<x>
Sets or returns the reference waveform upper threshold to determine where to
place a mark. This setting is applied to all reference waveform searches that uses
an upper threshold. SEARCH<x> is the search number and REF<x> is the reference
channel number.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:REF<x> {TTL|ECL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:REF<x>?
Arguments
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
SELect
Sets or returns the selected waveform display (controlled by the front-panel)
on or off.
Group
2-284
Vertical
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
SELect {ON|OFF}
ON turns the selected waveform display on.
OFF turns the selected waveform display off.
Examples
SELECT? might return the following
:SELECT:BUS1 0;BUS2 0;CH1 1;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;MATH 0;REF1
0;REF2 0;D0 0;D1 0;D2 0;D3 0;D4 0;D5 0;D6 0;D7 0;D8 0;D9
0;D10 0;D11 0;D12 0;D13 0;D14 0;D15 0,CONTROL CH1
SELect:BUS<x>
This command turns on and off the display of the waveform for <x>, where x is
the bus number. The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does not
indicate whether it is the selected waveform.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect:BUS<x> {<NR1>|OFF|ON}
SELect:BUS<x>?
SELect:CH<x>
Turns the display of the channel <x> waveform on or off, where <x > is the
channel number. This command also resets the acquisition. The query returns
whether the channel is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected
waveform.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect:CH<x> {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
SELect:CH<x>?
Arguments
ON turns on the display of the specified waveform. This waveform also becomes
the selected waveform.
OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform.
<NR1> = 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform; any other value turns
on the display of the specified waveform.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-285
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
SELECT:CH2 ON turns the channel 2 waveform display on, and selects channel 2.
SELECT:CH1? might return :SELECT:CH1 1 indicating that channel 1 is being
displayed.
SELect:CONTROl
Sets or returns the waveform that is the recipient of future channel-related
commands, for example, the cursor commands. The command form also performs
the equivalent of a SELect:CH<x> ON command, as well as the Math, Reference,
and Bus variations of that command.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect:CONTROl {CH<x>|MATH|BUS<x>}
SELect:CONTROl?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies a channel waveform as the waveform affected by the front-panel
controls. <x> is the channel number.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the waveform that is affected by the
front-panel controls.
BUS<x> specifies a bus waveform as the waveform affected by the front-panel
controls. <x> specifies the bus number.
Returns
Examples
NONE if all the channels are turned off. NONE is ignored on input.
SELECT:CONTROL CH2 resets acquisition displays on channel 2, and causes the
selected waveform to be the implied object of waveform commands.
SELECT:CONTROL? might return :SELECT:CONTROL MATH indicating that math
is the implied object of waveform commands.
SELect:D<x>
Turns on the display of the digital channel <x> and resets the acquisition. <x > is
the channel number. The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does
not indicate whether it is the selected waveform.
Group
2-286
Vertical
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
SELect:D<x> {<NR1>|OFF|ON}
SELect:D<x>?
ON turns on the display of the specified waveform. This waveform also becomes
the selected waveform.
OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform.
<NR1> = 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform; any other value turns
on the display of the specified waveform.
Examples
SELECT:D2 ON turns the digital channel 2 waveform display on, and selects
digital channel 2.
SELECT:D2? might return :SELECT:D2 1 indicating that digital channel 2 is
being displayed.
SELect:MATH[1]
Turns on and off the display of the math waveform. The query returns whether
the math waveform is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected
waveform.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect:MATH[1] {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
SELect:MATH[1]?
Arguments
ON turns on the display of the specified waveform. This waveform also becomes
the selected waveform.
OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform.
<NR1> = 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform; any other value turns
on the display of the specified waveform.
Examples
SELECT:MATH ON turns the math waveform display on, and selects it.
SELECT:MATH? might return :SELECT:MATH 1 indicating that the math
waveform is being displayed.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-287
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SELect:REF<x>
Turns on and off the display of the reference waveform <x>. The <x > variable
represents the reference channel number. The query returns whether the channel
is on or off.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect:REF<x> {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
SELect:REF<x>?
Arguments
ON turns on the display of the specified waveform. This waveform also becomes
the selected waveform.
OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform.
<NR1> = 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform; any other value turns
on the display of the specified waveform.
Examples
SELECT:REF2 ON turns the channel 2 waveform display on, and selects reference
waveform 2.
SELECT:REF2? might return :SELECT:REF2 1 indicating that reference
waveform 2 is being displayed.
SET? (Query Only)
Returns the commands that list the oscilloscope settings except for configuration
information for the calibration values, the WFMInpre? query, and the
WFMOutpre? query. This query allows you to record or "learn" the current
oscilloscope settings. You can use these commands to return the oscilloscope to
the state it was in when you made the SET? query. The SET? query always returns
command headers, regardless of the setting of the HEADer command. This is
because the returned commands are intended to be sent back to the oscilloscope as
a command string. The VERBose command can still be used to specify whether
the returned headers should be abbreviated or full-length.
This command is identical to the *LRN? command.
2-288
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
SET?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Examples
HEADer, *LRN?, VERBose
SET? returns a long response, part of which could be as follows: :SET
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUnsTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV
INFINITE;NUMAVG 16;SAMPLINGMODE RT;:HEADER 1;:LOCK
NONE;:LANGUAGE ENGLISH;:VERBOSE 1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE NORMAL;:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE
0.0000;CLOCK 1;GRATICULE FULL;INTEnsITY:WAVEFORM
30;GRATICULE 75;BACKLIGHT HIGH;:HARDCOPY:INKSAVER
OFF;LAYOUT LANDSCAPE;PREVIEW 0; :SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT
BMP;:SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT INTERNAL;:SAVE:ASSIGN:TYPE
SETUP;:TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL
20.0000E-3;LEVEL:CH1 20.0000E-3;CH2 0.0000;CH3
0.0000;CH4 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1
1.4000;CH2 800.0000E-3;CH3 800.0000E-3;CH4 800.0000E-3;:
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1 20.0000E-3;CH2
0.0000;CH3 0.0000;CH4 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME
20.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING
DC;SLOPE RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS SETHOLD;FUNCTION
AND;THRESHOLD:CH1 20.0000E-3;CH2 0.0000;CH3
0.0000;CH4 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
X;CH2 X;CH3 X;CH4 X;CLOCK:SOURCE NONE;EDGE
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH1 X;CH2
X;CH3 X;CH4 X;:TRIGGER:A :LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT 4.0000E-9;LIMIT 4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A
:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1;EDGE RISE;THRESHOLD
20.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH2;
SETUP<x>:DATE? (Query Only)
Returns the date when the oscilloscope setup was saved for the specified channel
<x>.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SETUP<x>:DATE?
Examples
SETUP4:DATE? might return SETUP4:DATE: 04–18–06 which is the setup
date for channel 4.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-289
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SETUP<x>:LABEL
Sets or returns the setup label for the specified channel <x>.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SETUP<x>:LABEL <Qstring>
Arguments
Examples
<Qstring> is an alpha-numeric string of characters, enclosed in quotes, that
defines the label text for SETUP<x>. The length of the string is limited to 30
characters.
SETUP:LABEL? might return SETUP1:LABEL: TEST 2 which is the label setup
for channel 1.
SETUP<x>:TIME? (Query Only)
Returns the time when the oscilloscope setup was saved for the specified channel
<x>.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SETUP<x>:TIME?
Examples
SETUP2:TIME? might return “SETUP2:TIME: 15:24:07 which is the setup
time for channel 2.
*SRE
The *SRE (Service Request Enable) command sets or returns the bits in the
Service Request Enable Register. For information, refer to Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*SRE <NR1>
*SRE?
Related Commands
2-290
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, FACtory, *STB?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> is a value in the range from 0 through 255. The binary bits of the SRER
are set according to this value. Using an out-of-range value causes an execution
error. The power-on default for SRER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the SRER
maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.
*SRE 48 sets the bits in the SRER to binary 00110000.
*SRE? might return 32, showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary value
of 00100000.
*STB? (Query Only)
*STB? (Read Status Byte) returns the contents of the Status Byte Register (SBR)
using the Master Summary Status (MSS) bit. For information, refer to Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*STB?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, FACtory, *SRE
<NR1>
*STB? might return 96, showing that the SBR contains the binary value 01100000.
TEKSecure (No Query Form)
This command initializes both waveform and setup memories, overwriting
any previously stored data. These are the WFMInpre?, WFMOutpre?,
DATa, DATa:RESOlution and DATa:COMPosition command values after the
TEKSecure operation.
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 1 :WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8 :WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG BIN
:WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT RI :WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR MSB :WFMOUTPRE:WFID
"Ch1, DC coupling, 100.0mV/div, 4.000us/div, 10000 points,
Sample mode" :WFMOUTPRE:NR_PT 10000 :WFMOUTPRE:PT_FMT
Y :WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT "s" :WFMOUTPRE:XINCR 4.0000E-9
:WFMOUTPRE:XZERO -20.0000E-6 :WFMOUTPRE:PT_OFF 0
:WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT "V" :WFMOUTPRE:YMULT 4.0000E-3
:WFMOUTPRE:YOFF 0.0000 :WFMOUTPRE:YZERO 0.0000
:WFMINPRE:BYT_NR 1 :WFMINPRE:BIT_NR 8 :WFMINPRE:ENCDG BIN
:WFMINPRE:BN_FMT RI :WFMINPRE:BYT_OR MSB :WFMINPRE:NR_PT
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-291
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
10000 :WFMINPRE:PT_FMT Y :WFMINPRE:XUNIT "s" :WFMINPRE:XINCR
4.0000E-9 :WFMINPRE:XZERO 0.0000 :WFMINPRE:PT_OFF 0
:WFMINPRE:YUNIT "V" :WFMINPRE:YMULT 4.0000E-3 :WFMINPRE:YOFF
0.0000 :WFMINPRE:YZERO 0.0000 DATA:DESTINATION REF1
DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY DATA:SOURCE CH1 DATA:START 1 DATA:STOP
10000 DATA:WIDTH 1 :DATA:RESOLUTION FULL :DATA:COMPOSITION
COMPOSITE_YT
NOTE. The TEKSecure command can take up to five minutes to complete. The
oscilloscope is inoperable during this period.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
TEKSecure
Examples
TEKSECURE initializes both waveform and setup memories.
This is a program example of how to generate an SRQ when TEKSECURE
completes:
# Bit 0 of the DESE (Device Event Status Enable Register)
# enables OPC to be reported to the SESR (Standard Event
# Status Register)
DESE 255
# Bit 0 of the ESER (Event Status Enable Register)
# enables OPC to be summarized in the ESB (Event Status #
Bit) of the SBR (Status Byte Register)
*ESE 255
# Bit 5 of the SRE (Service Request Enable Register)
enables
# the generation of SRQ when the ESB bit of the SBR
becomes # TRUE
*SRE 32
TEKSECURE;*OPC
When the TEKSECURE operation has completed, the OPC bit of the SESR will be
TRUE and SRQ will have been generated.
TIME
Sets or returns the time that the oscilloscope displays.
Group
2-292
Miscellaneous
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
TIME <QString>
TIME?
DATE
<QString> is a time in the form "hh:mm:ss" where hh refers to a two-digit hour
number, mm refers to a two-digit minute number from 00 to 59, and ss refers to a
two-digit second number from 00 to 59.
TIME "14:00:00" sets the time to exactly 2:00 p.m.
TIME? might return :TIME "14:05:17” indicating that the current time is set
to 2:05 p.m. and 17 seconds.
TOTaluptime? (Query Only)
This command returns the total number of hours that the oscilloscope has been
powered on since the nonvolatile memory was last programmed (usually since the
initial manufacturing process).
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
TOTaluptime?
*TRG (No Query Form)
Performs a group execute trigger on commands defined by *DDT.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*TRG
Related Commands
Examples
*DDT
*TRG immediately executes all commands that have been defined by *DDT.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-293
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger (No Query Form)
Forces a trigger event to occur.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger FORCe
TRIGger?
Arguments
Examples
FORCe creates a trigger event. If TRIGger:STATE is set to READy, the acquisition
will complete. Otherwise, this command will be ignored.
TRIGGER FORCE forces a trigger event to occur.
TRIGger:A
Sets the A trigger level automatically to 50% of the range of the minimum and
maximum values of the trigger input signal. The query returns current A trigger
parameters. The trigger level is the voltage threshold through which the trigger
source signal must pass to generate a trigger event. This command works for the
following cases: Edge Trigger (when source is Not Line), Logic Trigger (when
Clock Source is not Off or Logic Pattern is Don't Care), and Pulse Width Trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A SETLevel
TRIGger:A?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
TRIGger:A:EDGE?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc?, TRIGger:A:PULse?
SETLevel sets the A trigger level to 50% of the range of the minimum and
maximum values of the trigger input signal.
TRIGGER:A SETLEVEL sets the A trigger level to 50% of the range of the
minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal.
TRIGGER:A? might return a long response with A trigger parameters,
some of which could be as follows: :TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO;TYPE
EDGE;LEVEL 20.0000E-3;LEVEL:CH1 20.0000E-3;CH2 0.0000;
CH3 0.0000;CH4 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1
1.4000;CH2 800.0000E-3;CH3 8 00.0000E-3;CH4
2-294
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1 20.0000E-3;CH2
0.0000;CH3 0.0000;CH4 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME
20.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING
DC;SLOPE RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS SETHOLD;FUNCTION
AND;THRESHOLD: CH1 20.0000E-3;CH2 0.0000;CH3
0.0000;CH4 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
X;CH2 X;CH3 X;CH4 X;CLOCK:SOURCE NONE;EDGE
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH1 X; CH2
X;CH3 X;CH4 X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT 4.0000E-9;MO RELIMIT
4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1;EDGE
RISE;THRESHOLD 20.000 0E-3;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE
CH2;THRESHOLD 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLD TIME
4.0000E-9;SETTIME 4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS
TRAnsITION;:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE
CH1;POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN LESSTHAN;WIDTH
4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE CH1;POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN
OCCURS;WIDTH 4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:TRAnsITION:SOURCE
CH1;POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN SLOWER;DELTATIME
4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO :POLARITY POSITIVE;SOURCE
CH1;STANDARD NTSC;SYNC ALLLINES;HOLDOFF:FIELD 0.0000;:
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT PROGRESSIVE;SCAN
RATE15K;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 1;H DTV:FORMAT
HD1080I60;:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B1;B1:I2C:CONDITION
START;DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX";SIZE 1;START 0.0000;DIRECTION
NOCARE;:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE
ADDR7;TYPE USER;VALUE
"XXXXXXX";:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:CONDITION MOSI;DATA:OUT
:VALUE "XXXXXXXX";:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:IN:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX";:TRIGGER:A:BUS: B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1;START 0.0000;:
TRIGger:A:BUS
Sets or returns the trigger type: I2C, CAN, SPI, and RS232. There are up to
two serial buses, B1, B2, depending on your instrument model. Each can be
independently set to one of the serial trigger types. The serial parameters related
to the trigger are broken into two sections: Trigger:A:SERIAL xxx, consisting
of parameters the user will change frequently, and BUS:B1:xxx, consisting of
parameters the user will specify once (bus definition).
Conditions
Group
Requires a DPO2AUTO, DPO2EMBD, or DPO2COMP application module.
Trigger
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-295
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
TRIGger:A:BUS {I2C|SPI|CAN|RS232}
TRIGger:A:BUS?
I2C specifies the Inter-IC bus.
SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus.
CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
Sets or returns the CAN trigger condition for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
Requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
{SOF|FRAMEtype|IDentifier|DATA|IDANDDATA|EOF|ACKMISS}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition?
Arguments
SOF enables triggering on the start of frame.
FRAMEtype enables triggering on the type of frame.
IDentifier enables triggering on a matching identifier.
DATA enables triggering on matching data.
IDANDDATA enables triggering on a matching identifier and matching data.
EOF enables triggering on the end of frame.
ACKMISS enables triggering on a missing acknowledge.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION? might return :TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:
CAN:CONDITION EOF indicating an end of file condition.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION DATA enables triggering on matching
CAN data.
2-296
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
Sets or returns the CAN trigger data direction to be valid on a Read, Write,
or Either condition for bus <x>, where x is the bus number. This applies only,
if the trigger condition is ID.
Conditions
Requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection {READ|WRITE|NOCARE}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection?
Arguments
READ sets the CAN data direction to READ.
WRITE sets the CAN data direction to WRITE.
NOCARE sets the CAN data direction to either.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION WRITE sets the CAN data
direction to Write.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
This applies only, if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA.
Conditions
Requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
{LESSThan|MOREThan|EQUal|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier?
Arguments
LESSThan sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is less than the qualifier
value.
MOREThan sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is more than the qualifier
value.
EQUal sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is equal to the qualifier value.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-297
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
UNEQual sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is not equal to the qualifier
value.
LESSEQual sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is less than or equal
to the qualifier value.
MOREEQual sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is more than or equal
to the qualifier value.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the oscilloscope
to trigger when the data is less than the qualifier value.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER THAN, indicating that the
oscilloscope is set to trigger when the data is than the qualifier value.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes for a CAN trigger if the
condition is DATA or IDANDDATA. Applies to bus <x>, where x is the bus
number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe <NR1>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR1> is the length of the data string in bytes.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a CAN trigger if the trigger
condition is ID or IDANDDATA. Applies to bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
Group
2-298
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Trigger
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue <QString>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue?
Arguments
<QString> is the CAN data value in binary format. The only allowed characters
in the QString are 0, 1, and X.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE 1011 sets the CAN data value to 1011.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
Sets or returns the frame type for a CAN FRAMEType trigger. Applies to bus
<x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module. This command is
only valid when the TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition is FRAMETYPE.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
{DATA|REMote|ERRor|OVERLoad}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype?
Arguments
DATA specifies a data frame type.
REMote specifies a remote frame type.
ERRor specifies an error frame type.
OVERLold specifies an overload frame type.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA sets the CAN trigger frame type
to DATA.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe
Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode for bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Use this command to do the following:
Trigger on ID
Trigger in IDANDDATA
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-299
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe
{STandard|EXTended}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe?
Arguments
STandard specifies the standard addressing mode.
EXTended specifies the extended addressing mode.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue
Sets or returns the binary address string used for a CAN trigger if the trigger
condition is ID or IDANDDATA. Applies to bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue <QString>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue?
Arguments
<QString> is up to 29 bits specifying the binary CAN identifier value. The only
allowed characters in the QString are 0, 1, and X.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE 1011 sets the CAN trigger
identifier value to 1011.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
Sets or returns the I2C address mode to 7 or 10-bit. Applies to bus <x>, where x
is the bus number.
Conditions
Group
2-300
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Trigger
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe {ADDR7|ADDR10}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe?
ADDR7 specifies the 7-bit I2C address mode.
ADDR10 specifies the 10-bit I2C address mode.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR10 sets the I2C address mode
to 10-bit.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
Sets or returns the I2C address type. The only supported address type is USER.
Applies to bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
{GENeralcall|STARtbyte|HSmode|EEPROM|USER}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe?
Arguments
GENeralcall specifies a general call address.
STARtbyte specifies a start byte address.
HSmode specifies a high-speed mode address.
EEPROM specifies an EEPROM address.
USER specifies a user address.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
Sets or returns the binary address string used for the I2C trigger if the trigger
condition is ADDRESS or ADDRANDDATA. Applies to bus <x>, where x is the
bus number.
Conditions
Group
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Trigger
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-301
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
Examples
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue <QString>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue?
<QString> is up to 7 or 10-bits depending on the address mode that specifies the
address. The only allowed characters in the QString are 0, 1, and X.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE 1011 sets the I2C address value
to XXX1011.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
Sets or returns the trigger condition for an I2C trigger. Applies to bus <x>, where
x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
{STARt|STOP|REPEATstart|ACKMISS|ADDRess|DATA|ADDRANDDATA}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition?
Arguments
STARt specifies a search based on start condition.
STOP specifies a search based on stop condition.
REPEATstart specifies a search based on repeat of start condition.
ACKMISS specifies a search based on missing acknowledgement condition.
ADDRess specifies a search based on address.
DATA specifies a search based on data.
ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on address and data.
Examples
2-302
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION START specifies start as the I2C trigger
condition.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
Sets or returns the I2C trigger type to be valid on a Read, Write, or Either
condition. Read or write is indicated by the R/W bit in the I2C protocol. Applies
to bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection {READ|WRITE|NOCARE}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection?
Arguments
READ specifies read as the data direction.
WRITE specifies write as the data direction.
NOCARE specifies either as the data direction.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION WRITE specifies write as the
I2C data direction.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an I2C trigger if
the trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA. Applies to bus <x>, where x
is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe <NR1>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR1> is the length of the data string in bytes.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-303
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string used for I2C triggering if the trigger condition
is DATA or ADDRANDDATA. Applies to bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue <QString>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue?
Arguments
<QString> is the binary data string, where the number of bits is 8 times the
number of bytes specified. The only allowed characters in the string are 0, 1,
and X.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition
Sets or returns the trigger condition for LIN.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition
{SYNCField|IDentifier|DATA|IDANDDATA|WAKEup|SLEEP|ERROR}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition?
Arguments
SYNCField sets the LIN trigger condition to sync field.
IDentifier sets the LIN trigger condition to identifier.
DATA sets the LIN trigger condition to data.
IDANDDATA sets the LIN trigger condition to ID and data.
WAKEup sets the LIN trigger condition to wake up.
SLEEP sets the LIN trigger condition to sleep.
ERROR sets the LIN trigger condition to error.
2-304
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION ERROR sets the LIN trigger condition
to error.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD indicating that the LIN
trigger condition is sync field.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger if trigger condition
is ID or IDANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue <QString>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is a quoted string that is the binary data string used for LIN trigger if
the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "11001010" sets the high value
to 11001010.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX" indicating
that the high value is don't care.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier. This only applies if the trigger condition is
IDANDDATA or DATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
{LESSThan|MOREThan|EQUal|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-305
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
LESSThan sets the LIN data qualifier to less than.
MOREThan sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than.
EQUal sets the LIN data qualifier to equal.
UNEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to not equal.
LESSEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to less than or equal.
MOREEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than or equal.
INrange sets the LIN data qualifier to in range.
OUTrange sets the LIN data qualifier to out of range.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER OUTRANGE sets the data qualifier
to out of range.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating that the data
qualifier is set to equal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN trigger.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe <NR1>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> is the size of the data string in bytes.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 8 sets the data size to 8 bytes.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1 indicating that the data size is 1 byte.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger condition if trigger
condition is ID or IDANDDATA.
2-306
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue <QString>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is a quoted string that is the LIN trigger data value.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE “11001101”sets the data value to
11001101.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" indicating
that the data value is don't care.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE
Sets or returns the error type be used for LIN trigger.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE {SYNC|PARity|CHecksum}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE?
Arguments
SYNC sets the LIN error type to SYNC.
PARity sets the LIN error type to parity.
CHecksum sets the LIN error type to checksum.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE CHECKSUM sets the LIN error type to
checksum.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC indicating that the LIN error type
is SYNC.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-307
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN trigger if the trigger
condition is ID or IDANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2AUTO application module.
Group
Bus
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue <QString>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is the binary address string used for LIN trigger if the trigger
condition is ID or IDANDDATA.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "110010" sets the identifier
value to 110010.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXX" indicating that the
identifier value is XXXXXX.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a parallel trigger. Applies to
bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:VALue <QString>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:VALue?
Arguments
<QString> is the binary data string.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition
Sets or returns the condition for a RS232C trigger, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
2-308
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition
{RXSTArt|RXDATA|RXENDPacket|RXPARity|TXSTArt|
TXDATA|TXENDPacket|TXPARity|}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition?
Arguments
RXSTArt specifies a search based on the RX Start Bit.
RXDATA specifies a search based on RX Data.
RXENDPacket specifies a search based on the RX End of Packet condition.
RXPARity specifies a search based on the RX parity.
TXSTArt specifies a search base on the TX Start Bit.
TXDATA specifies a search based on TX Data.
TXENDPacket specifies a search based on the TX End of Packet condition.
TXPARity specifies a search based on the TX parity.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string in Bytes for a RS232 Trigger if the
trigger condition is RXDATA. Applies to bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe <NR1>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR1> is the length of the data string in bytes.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string for a RS232 trigger if the trigger condition
involves RX. Applies to bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-309
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue?
Arguments
<Qstring> is the binary data string to be used for the trigger.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string for a RS232 trigger if the trigger
condition is TXDATA. Applies to bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:SIZe <NR1>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR1> is the length of the data string in Bytes.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string for a RS232 trigger if the condition involves
TX. Applies to bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:VALue
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:VALue?
Arguments
2-310
This command requires a DPO2COMP application module.
<Qstring> is the binary data string to be used for the trigger.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition
Sets or returns the trigger condition for a SPI trigger. Applies to bus <x>, where x
is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition
{SS|STARTofframe|MISO|MOSI|MISOMOSI}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition?
Arguments
SS specifies the Slave Selection condition.
STARTofframe specifies the start of frame condition.
MISO specifies the Master-In Slave-Out condition.
MOSI specifies the Master-Out Slave-In condition.
MISOMOSI specifies the Master-In Slave-Out and Master-Out Slave-In conditions.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:IN|:MISO}:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger
condition is MISO or MISOMOSI. Applies to bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:IN|:MISO}:VALue <QString>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:IN|:MISO}:VALue?
Arguments
<QString> is the binary data string, where the number of bits is 8 times the
number of bytes specified. The only allowed characters in the string are 0, 1,
and X.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-311
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:MOSI}:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger
condition is MOSI or MISOMOSI. Applies to bus <x>, where x is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:MOSI}:VALue <QString>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:MOSI}:VALue?
Arguments
<QString> is the binary data string with the number of bits specified by the
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe command. The only allowed characters
in the QString are 0, 1, and X.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the
trigger condition is MISO, MOSI, or MISOMOSI. Applies to bus <x>, where x
is the bus number.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO2EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe <NR1>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR1> is the length of the data string in bytes.
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for a Serial bus trigger.
Conditions
Group
2-312
This command requires a DPO2AUTO or DPO2EMBD application module.
Trigger
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce {B1|B2}
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce?
B1 specifies the Bus 1 source.
B2 specifies the Bus 2 source.
TRIGger:A:EDGE? (Query Only)
Returns the trigger source, coupling, and slope for the A edge trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:EDGE?
Related Commands
Examples
TRIGger:A:PULse?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
TRIGGER:A:EDGE? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING
DC; SLOPE RISE indicating that the trigger source, coupling, and slope for
the A edge trigger.
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
Sets or returns the type of coupling for the A edge trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling {DC|HFRej|LFRej|NOISErej}
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
DC specifies DC trigger coupling, which passes all input signals to the trigger
circuitry.
HFRej specifies high-frequency rejection coupling, which attenuates signals
above 50 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry.
LFRej specifies low-frequency rejection coupling, which attenuates signals below
50 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-313
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
NOISErej specifies noise-rejection coupling, which provides stable triggering
by increasing the trigger hysteresis. Increased hysteresis reduces the trigger
sensitivity to noise but may require greater trigger signal amplitude.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING DC sets the A edge trigger coupling to DC.
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING
DC indicating that the A edge trigger coupling is set to DC.
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
Sets or returns the slope for the A edge trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL}
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.
FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE RISE sets the A edge trigger slope to positive, which
triggers on the rising edge of the signal.
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE FALL
indicating that the A edge trigger slope is negative.
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for the A edge trigger.
2-314
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce {{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|
D14|D15|EXT|LINE|AUX}
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe, TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
CH1–CH4 specifies an analog input channel as the A edge trigger source.
D0–D15 specifies a digital input channel as the A edge trigger source.
EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux In connector located on the front
panel of the oscilloscope.
LINE specifies the AC line as the trigger source.
AUX specifies the Auxiliary Input as the trigger source (if available on your
oscilloscope).
Examples
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the A edge trigger source.
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1
indicating that channel 1 is the A edge trigger source.
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff? (Query Only)
Returns the A trigger holdoff parameters. These parameters specify the time
period during which the trigger circuitry is not looking to generate a trigger event.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?
Related Commands
Examples
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF? might return :TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME
900.0000E-09;BY DEFAULT indicating that the A edge trigger holdoff time
(by default) is 900 ns.
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
Sets or returns the A trigger holdoff time.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe <NR3>
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-315
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the holdoff time in seconds. The range is from 20 ns through 8.0 s.
TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME ? might return :TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFFTIME
1.2000E-06 indicating that the A trigger holdoff time is set to 1.2 µs.
TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME 10 sets the A trigger holdoff time to 10 s.
TRIGger:A:LEVel
Sets or returns the trigger level for the A trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LEVel {ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
TRIGger:A:LEVel?
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4V.
<NR3> specifies the trigger level in user units (usually volts).
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL? might return :TRIGGER:A:LEVel 1.3000E+00
indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1.3 V.
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL TTL sets the A edge trigger to TTL high level, which is 1.4 V.
TRIGger:A:LEVel:AUXin
Sets or returns the trigger level for the AUXIN port.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LEVel:AUXin {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:A:LEVel:AUXin?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the trigger level, in volts.
ECL specifies a preset ECL trigger level of –1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL trigger level of 1.4 V.
2-316
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:AUXIN ECL sets the auxiliary input trigger level to -1.3
volts.
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:AUXIN? might return TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:AUXIN 0.0E+0
indicating that the auxiliary input trigger level is 0.0 volts.
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>
Sets or returns the trigger level for the specified channel. Each channel can have
an independent level.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x> {<NR3>|TTL|ECL}
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the trigger level in user units (usually volts).
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2? might return :TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2
1.3000E+00 indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1.3 V for channel 2.
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH3 TTL sets the A edge trigger to TTL high level for
channel 3.
TRIGger:A:LEVel:D<x>
Sets or returns the trigger level for the specified digital channel <x>, where x is
the channel number. The digital channels do not have independent trigger levels.
Channels D0–D7 share one common trigger level and D8–D15 share another
common trigger level. For example: Changing the trigger level for D3 changes
the levels for D0–D7.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LEVel:D<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:A:LEVel:D<x>?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-317
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> specifies the trigger level in volts.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc? (Query Only)
Returns all of the A logic trigger parameters.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
Related Commands
Examples
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS
SETHOLD;FUNCTION AND;THRESHOLD:CH1 20.0000E-3;CH2 0.0000;
CH3 0.0000;CH4 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
X;CH2 X;CH3 X;CH4 X;CLOCK:SOURCE NONE;EDGE
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH1 X;CH2 X;CH3
X;CH4 X;:TRIGGER :A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT
4.0000E-9;LIMIT 4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:DELTATIME
4.0000E-9
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
Sets or returns the class of the Logic Trigger. This command is used in conjunction
with the TRIGger:A:TYPe command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss {LOGIC|SETHold}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:TYPe, TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
LOGIC sets the oscilloscope to trigger on logical combinations of the channels.
When the TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce is NONE, LOGIC sets the
oscilloscope to trigger when the specified logical combinations of channels 1, 2,
2-318
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
3, and 4 are met on four-channel oscilloscopes. On two-channel oscilloscopes,
only channel 1 and channel 2 are available.
When the TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce is set to one of the channels,
LOGIC sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the specified logical combinations of
the remaining channels is true during a transition on the clock channel.
SETHold sets the oscilloscope to trigger on setup and hold violations between a
data source and a clock source. Use one channel input as the clock signal and a
second channel input as the data input. The clocking and data levels are used to
determine if a clock or data transition has occurred.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS LOGIC
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS LOGIC sets the trigger A logic class to LOGIc, which
causes the oscilloscope to trigger when the specified logical combinations of
channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are met.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
Sets or returns the logical combination of the input channels for the A pattern and
A state logic triggers.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion {AND|NANd}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
AND specifies to trigger if all conditions are true.
NANd specifies to trigger if any of the conditions is false.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION
NAND which indicates that the oscilloscope will trigger if the AND logic conditions
are false.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION AND sets the logical combination of channels to
be true when all conditions are true.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-319
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut? (Query Only)
Returns the logic input values for all channels. If a clock channel is defined,
it returns the clock source and edge.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X indicating that a logic high is expected on channel 1 while
channel 2 and channel three are “don't care.”
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
Sets or returns the logical input condition for the channel specified by <x>.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> {HIGH|LOW|X}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>?
Arguments
HIGH specifies the logic high.
LOW specifies the logic low.
X specifies a "don't care" state.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1? might return :TRIGGER:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
X indicating that the setting for the A logic trigger input to channel 1 does not
matter.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH2 HIGH sets the A logic trigger input to logic
HIGH for channel 2.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets the polarity of the clock channel.
Group
2-320
Trigger
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL|RISe|EITher}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE?
RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.
FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.
EITher specifies to trigger either on the falling or rising edge of a signal.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns the channel to use as the clock source. The clock can be selected as
NONE. A selection of None implies pattern trigger. Any other selection implies
state trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|NONE}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1–CH4 specifies the analog input channel source.
D0–D15 specifies the digital input channel source.
NONE specifies a Pattern trigger.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:D<x>
Sets or returns the logic pattern for a trigger on digital channel <x>, where x
is the channel number.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:D<x> {HIGH|LOW|X}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:D<x>?
Arguments
High specifies the logic high state.
Low specifies the logic low state.
X specifies a "don't care" state.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-321
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern? (Query Only)
Returns the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern trigger, with respect
to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the selected pattern may
be true and still generate the trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2
LOW;CH3 X;CH4 X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
LESSTHAN;WHEN:LESSLIMIT 16.0000E-9;LIMIT
16.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:DELTATIME 16.0000E-9
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:DELTatime
Sets or returns the pattern trigger delta time value. The time value is used as part
of the pattern trigger condition to determine if the duration of a logic pattern
meets the specified time constraints.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:DELTatime <NR3>
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:DELTatime?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is a floating point value with exponent that sets the pattern trigger time
value. This argument has a range of 39.6E–9 (39.6 ns) to 10.0E0 (10 s), in
increments of 13.2 ns. Values that are not an increment of 13.2 ns are rounded to
the nearest correct value.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:DELTATIME 71.28E-8 sets the pattern trigger
delta time value to 712.8 ns.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:D<x>
Sets or returns the A logic trigger input for the specified digital channel <x>,
where x is the channel number. This command species the logic value used when
the pattern trigger detects the threshold level.
2-322
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:D<x> {HIGH|LOW|X}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:D<x>?
Arguments
HIGH specifies a logic high.
LOW specifies a logic low.
X specifies a “do not care” state.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
Sets or returns the pattern logic condition on which to trigger the oscilloscope.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
{TRUe|FALSe|LESSThan|MOREThan|EQUal|UNEQual}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn?
Arguments
TRUE triggers the oscilloscope when the pattern becomes true.
FALSE triggers the oscilloscope when the pattern becomes false.
LESSTHAN triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time period
less than the time period specified in TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:DELTATIME.
MORETHAN triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true
for a time period more (greater) than the time period specified in
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:DELTATIME.
EQUAL triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time period
equal to the time period specified in TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:DELTATIME,
within a ±5% tolerance.
UNEQUAL triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time
period greater than or less than (not equal to) the time period specified in
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:DELTATIME, within a ±5% tolerance.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN LESSTHAN sets the oscilloscope to trigger
when the pattern is true for a time period less than the pattern trigger delta time
setting.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-323
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still
generate an A logic pattern trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit <NR3>
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the maximum amount of time to hold the pattern true.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT 10.0E+00 sets the
maximum time that the selected pattern may hold true (and generate an A logic
pattern trigger) to 10 s.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT? might return
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT 8.0000E-9 indicating that
the selected pattern may hold true for up to 8 ns and still generate an A logic
pattern trigger.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still
generate an A logic pattern trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit <NR3>
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the minimum amount of time to hold the pattern true.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT 10.0E+00 sets the minimum
time that the selected pattern may hold true (and generate an A logic pattern
trigger) to 10 s.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT? might return
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT 8.0000E-9 indicating that
the selected pattern must hold true for at least 8 ns to generate an A logic pattern
trigger.
2-324
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:(CH<x>|D<x>)
This command sets or queries the logic trigger threshold voltage for both analog
and digital channels (for MSO models), specified by x.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:(CH<x>|D<x>) {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:(CH<x>|D<x>)?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the threshold voltage, in volts.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH2 3.0E-3 sets the A logic trigger threshold
voltage for Channel 2 to 3 mV.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH3? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH3 1.2000E+00, indicating that the A
logic trigger threshold voltage for Channel 3 is 1.2 V.
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the lower threshold for the channel selected. Each channel can
have an independent level. Used in Runt and Slew Rate triggers as the lower
threshold. Used for all other trigger types as the single level/threshold.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> {ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> is the clock level, in volts.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-325
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 50E-3 sets the lower limit threshold for
CH2 of the pulse runt trigger to 50 mV.
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2? might return :TRIGGER:A:
LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 1.2000E-01 indicating that the lower limit threshold
for CH2 of the pulse runt trigger is set to 120 mV.
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold{:EXT|:AUX}
Sets or returns the lower threshold for the Auxiliary Input. It is similar to
TRIGger:A:LEVel:AUXin.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold{:EXT|:AUX} {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold{:EXT|:AUX}?
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> specifies the threshold level in volts.
TRIGger:A:MODe
Sets or returns the A trigger mode.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:MODe {AUTO|NORMal}
TRIGger:A:MODe?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:LEVel
AUTO generates a trigger if one is not detected within a specified time period.
NORMal waits for a valid trigger event.
Examples
2-326
TRIGGER:A:MODE NORMAL specifies that a valid trigger event must occur before
a trigger is generated.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGGER:A:MODE ? might return :TRIGGER:A:MODE NORMAL indicating that a
valid trigger event must occur before a trigger is generated.
TRIGger:A:PULse? (Query Only)
Returns the A pulse trigger parameters.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse?
Related Commands
Examples
TRIGger:A:EDGE?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
TRIGGER:A:PULSE? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS TRAnsITION
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
Sets or returns the type of pulse on which to trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss {RUNt|WIDth|TRANsition}
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:RUNT?, TRIGger:A:PULSEWIDth?, TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:
RISEFall}?, TRIGger:A:TYPe
RUNt triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not
cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first.
WIDth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and is either
inside or outside the specified time limits.
TRAnsition triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction
as the specified polarity and the transition time between the two threshold
crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-327
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS WIDTH specifies a width pulse for the A trigger.
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS WIDTH
indicating that a pulse was found that is of the specified polarity and width.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWIDth? (Query Only)
Returns the width parameters for the pulse width trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULSEWIDth?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH? might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN LESSTHAN;WIDTH
8.0000E-9
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity for the width trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity {NEGative|POSitive}
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity?
Arguments
NEGative specifies a negative pulse.
POSitive specifies a positive pulse.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the pulse polarity to
negative.
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:POLARITY? might return
:TRIGGER:A:WIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE indicating a positive pulse.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for the pulse-width trigger.
2-328
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce {{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|LINE|EXT}
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1–CH4 specifies an analog input channel as the A edge trigger source.
D0–D15 specifies an digital input channel as the A edge trigger source.
EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux In connector located on the front
panel of the oscilloscope.
LINE specifies AC line voltage.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the pulse width source.
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:
SOURCE CH1 indicating that channel 1 is the pulse width source.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
Sets or returns whether to trigger on a pulse that meets, falls outside, or within
the specified range of limits.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn {LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual}
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
LESSthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with
width less than the time set by the TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth command.
MOREthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with
width more than the time set by the TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth command.
EQUal argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with width
equal to the time period specified in TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth within
a ±5% tolerance.
UNEQual argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with
width greater than or less than (but not equal) the time period specified in
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-329
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WHEN LESSTHAN specifies that the duration of the A
pulse will fall within defined high and low limits.
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WHEN? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:
WHEN THAN indicating that the conditions for generating a width trigger.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
Sets or returns the width setting for the pulse width trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth <NR3>
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
<NR3> specifies the pulse width in seconds.
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WIDTH 5.0E-6 sets the pulse width to 5 µs.
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WIDTH? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:
WIDTH 2.0000E-9 indicating that the pulse width is set to 2 ns.
TRIGger:A:RUNT? (Query Only)
Returns the current A runt trigger parameters.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:RUNT?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:RUNT? might return :TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE CH1;POLARITY
POSITIVE;WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 4.0000E-9.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity for the runt trigger.
2-330
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity {EITher|NEGative|POSitive}
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity?
Arguments
POSitive indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling
edge recrosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high
threshold.
NEGative indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the
rising edge recrosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the
low threshold.
EITher triggers on a runt of either polarity.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY NEGATIVE specifies that the polarity of the A
pulse runt trigger is negative.
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY? might return :TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE indicating that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger is positive.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for the A runt trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4}
TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce?
Arguments
Examples
CH1–CH4 specifies the input channel number, depending on the model of the
oscilloscope.
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the source for the A pulse
trigger.
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE CH2
indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A pulse trigger.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
Sets or returns the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it detects a runt.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-331
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn {LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|OCCURS}
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth
OCCURS argument specifies a trigger event if a runt of any detectable width occurs.
LESSthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected
with width less than the time set by the TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth command.
MOREthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected
with width more than the time set by the TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth command.
EQUal argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a runt pulse is detected with
width equal to the time period specified in TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth within
a ±5% tolerance.
UNEQual argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a runt pulse is detected with
width greater than or less than (but not equal to) the time period specified in
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN THAN sets the runt trigger to occur when the
oscilloscope detects a runt in a pulse wider than the specified width.
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN
OCCURS indicating that a runt trigger will occur if the oscilloscope detects a runt
of any detectable width.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth
Sets or returns the width for a runt trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth?
Related Commands
Arguments
2-332
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
<NR3> specifies the minimum width, in seconds.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH 15E-6 sets the minimum width of the pulse runt
trigger to 15 µs.
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH
2.0000E-09 indicating that the minimum width of a pulse runt trigger is 2 ns.
TRIGger:A:SETHold? (Query Only)
Returns the clock edge polarity, voltage threshold and source input; data voltage
threshold and source; and both setup and hold times for setup and hold violation
triggering.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1;EDGE RISE;THRESHOLD
100.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH2;THRESHOLD
80.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 20.0000E-9;SETTIME
8.0000E-9
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk? (Query Only)
Returns the clock edge polarity, voltage threshold, and source input for setup
and hold triggering.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE EXT;EDGE FALL;THRESHOLD
1.4000
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets or returns the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-333
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL|RISe}
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?
Arguments
FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge.
RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE specifies the polarity as the clock
rising edge.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE? might return :TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:
CLOCK:EDGE RISE indicating that polarity is specified as the clock rising edge.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns the clock source for the setup and hold triggering.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
CH1–CH4 specifies the input channel number.
D0-D15 specifies the input digital channel number.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1 specifies channel 1 as the clock
input for setup and hold input.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:
CLOCK:SOURCE CH4 indicating that channel 4 is the clock source for the setup
and hold trigger input.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
Sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for the setup and hold trigger.
2-334
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold {<NR3>|TTL|ECL}
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold?
Arguments
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
<NR3> is the clock level, in volts.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset TTL value
of 1.4 V as the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 1.2000E+00
indicating that the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger is 1.2 V.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa? (Query Only)
Returns the voltage threshold and data source for the setup and hold trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa?
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH2;THRESHOLD 80.0000E-3
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
Sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger. You cannot specify
the same source for both clock and data.
For DPO models, you can specify only a single data source. Data sources for
DPO models may be one of CH1–CH4 or D0–D15.
Group
Trigger
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-335
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DPO Models:
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce?
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
DPO Models:
<wfm> specifies the source channel number and is one of CH1–CH4, and
D0–D15. You can specify only one waveform on a DPO.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the clock source
for the setup and hold trigger.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is
the current clock source for the setup and hold trigger.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger. The digital
channels do not have independent trigger levels. Channels D0–D7 share one
common trigger level and D8–D15 share another common trigger level. For
example changing the trigger level for D3 changes the levels for D0–D7.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold {<NR3>|TTL|ECL}
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold?
Arguments
TTL specifies the preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
ECL specifies the preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
<NR3> is the setup and hold data level, in V.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset high level of
1.4 V as the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.2000E+00 indicating
that 1.2 V is the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger.
2-336
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime
Sets or returns the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the hold time setting in seconds. Positive values for hold time
occur after the clock edge. Negative values occur before the clock edge.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 3.0E-3 sets the hold time for the setup and
hold trigger to 3 ms.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-09 indicating that the current
hold time for the setup and hold trigger is 2 ns.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime
Sets or returns the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME 3.0E-6 specifies that the current setup time for
setup and hold trigger is 3 µs.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME 2.0000E-09 indicating that the
current setup time for setup and hold trigger is 2 ns.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:CH<x>
Sets or queries the threshold for the channel specified by x. Affects all trigger
types using the channel.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-337
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:CH<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:CH<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the threshold voltage, in volts.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH1 1.5 sets the channel 1 threshold
to 1.5 volts.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH1? might return
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0 indicating that the
channel 1 threshold is set to 0.0 volts.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:D<x>
Sets the Threshold for the Selected Digital Channel. Affects all trigger types
using the Digital Channel.
Group
MSO
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:D<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:D<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the threshold voltage, in volts.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D1 ECL sets the threshold to ECL levels.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D1? might return
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D1 -1.3000 indicating that the
threshold is set to –1.3 volts.
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}? (Query Only)
Returns transition time trigger parameters.
2-338
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}?
Related Commands
Examples
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> , TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
TRIGGER:A::TRAnsITION? might return
:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN
SLOWER;DELTATIME 8.0000E-9
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime
Sets or returns the delta time used in calculating the transition value for the
transition trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime <NR3>
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the delta time, in seconds.
TRIGGER:A:TRAnsITION:DELTATIME 15E-6 sets the delta time of the
transition trigger to 15 µs.
TRIGGER:A:TRAnsITION:DELTATIME? might return :TRIGGER:A
:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E-09 indicating that the delta time of the
transition trigger is set to 2 ns.
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity for the transition trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity
{EITher|NEGative|POSitive}
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-339
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
POSitive indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower (most
negative) to higher (most positive) level for transition triggering to occur.
NEGative indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper (most positive)
to lower (most negative) level for transition triggering to occur.
EITher indicates either positive or negative polarity.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:TRAnsITION:POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the transition polarity to
negative.
TRIGGER:A:TRAnsITION:POLARITY? might return :TRIGGER:A:
TRANSITION:POLARITY EITHER indicating that the polarity can be either
positive or negative.
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for transition trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|
D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15}
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1–CH4 specifies one of the input channels.
D0–D15 specifies one of the input digital channels.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:TRAnsITION:SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the source for the
transition trigger.
TRIGGER:A:TRAnsITION:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:
SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A transition trigger.
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn
Sets or returns whether to check for a transitioning signal that is faster or slower
than the specified delta time.
Group
2-340
Trigger
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn
{SLOWer|FASTer|EQual|UNEQual}
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn?
FASTer sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is faster than the
time set by TRIGger:A{TRAnsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime.
SLOWer sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is slower than the
time set by.TRIGger:A{TRAnsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime.
EQual sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is equal to the time
set by TRIGger:A{TRAnsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime.
UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is not equal to
the time set by TRIGger:A{TRAnsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:TRAnsITION:WHEN SLOWER sets the trigger to
occur when the signal transition time is slower than the time set
by.TRIGger:A{TRAnsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime.
TRIGGER:A:TRAnsITION:WHEN? might return :TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:
WHEN FASTER
TRIGger:A:TYPe
Sets or returns the type of A trigger. The five types of triggers are of Edge,
Logic, Pulse, Serial, and Video. Logic and Pulse triggers contain classes. Logic
triggers consist of State, Pattern, and SetHold classes; Pulse triggers consist
of Runt, Width, and Transition logic classes. Once you have set the trigger
type, you may also need to identify the associated trigger class. For details on
selecting Logic and Pulse trigger classes, see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss and
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss respectively.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:TYPe {EDGe|LOGic|PULSe|BUS|VIDeo}
TRIGger:A:TYPe?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:EDGE?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss, TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
EDGe is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through
a specified voltage level in a specified direction and is controlled by the
TRIGger:A:EDGE? commands.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-341
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
LOGic specifies that a trigger occurs when specified conditions are met and is
controlled by the TRIGger:A:LOGIc? commands.
PULSe specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified pulse is found and is
controlled by the TRIGger:A:PULse? commands.
BUS specifies that a trigger occurs when a communications signal is found.
Supports CAN, I2C, SPI, and RS232 communications signals.
VIDeo specifies that the trigger occurs when a video signal is found.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:TYPE EDGE sets the A trigger type to EDGE.
TRIGGER:A:TYPE? might return :TRIGGER:A:TYPE PULSE indicating that the
A trigger type is a pulse trigger.
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets the upper threshold for channel <x>, where x is the channel number. Each
channel can have an independent level. Used only for runt and slew rate trigger
types.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> is the threshold level in volts.
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of –1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2 50E-3 sets the upper limit of the pulse
runt trigger to 50 mV for channel 2.
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2? might return :TRIGGER:A:
UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2 1.2000E-01 indicating that the upper limit of the pulse
runt trigger is set to 120 mV.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo? (Query Only)
Returns the A trigger video parameters.
2-342
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO? might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:POLARITY
POSITIVE;SOURCE CH1;STANDARD NTSC;SYNC
ALLLINES;HOLDOFF:FIELD 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT
PROGRESSIVE;SCANRATE15K;:TRIGGER: A:VIDEO:LINE 1;HDTV:FORMAT
HD1080I60
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLDoff:FIELD
Sets or returns the video trigger holdoff in terms of video fields.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLDoff:FIELD <NR3>
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLDoff:FIELD?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> argument is a real number from 0.0 to 8.5 in increments of 0.5. The
argument sets the number of fields that the oscilloscope waits before rearming
the video trigger.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:FIELD? might return
:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:FIELD 5 indicating that the oscilloscope is set
to wait 5 video fields before rearming the trigger.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:FIELD 4.5 sets the oscilloscope to wait 4.5 video
fields before rearming the trigger.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE
Sets or returns the video line number on which the oscilloscope triggers. Use the
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD} command to actually trigger the oscilloscope
on the line that you specify with this command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE <NR1>
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-343
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}
<NR1> argument is an integer that sets the video line number on which the
oscilloscope triggers. The following table lists the valid choices, depending on the
active video standard.
Table 2-41: Video Line Numbering Ranges
Examples
Video Standard
Line Number Range
525/NTSC
1–525
625/PAL, SECAM
1–625
SECAM
1–625
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 23 sets the oscilloscope to trigger on the line 23.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE ? might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 10
indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger on line 10.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity of the A video trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity {NEGative|POSitive|NORMal|INVERTed}
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity?
Arguments
POSitive argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a positive video sync pulse.
NEGative argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a negative video sync
pulse.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a
negative video pulse.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:POLARITY? might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:POLARITY
POSITIVE indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger on a positive video
sync pulse.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for the A video trigger.
2-344
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4}
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH1–CH4 specifies the input channel to use as the A video trigger.
D0–D15 specifies the input channel to use as the A video trigger.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1 sets the source for A video trigger to Channel 1.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SOURCE CH2
indicating that the source for the A video trigger is set to Channel 2.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard
Sets or returns the standard for the video trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard {NTSc|PAL|SECAM}
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard?
Arguments
NTSc sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video signals that meet the NTSC
525/60/2:1 standard (a line rate of 525 lines per frame and a field rate of 60 Hz).
PAL sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video signals that meet the NTSC
625/50/2:1 standard (a line rate of 625 lines per frame and a field rate of 50 Hz).
SECAM sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video signals that meet the SECAM
standard.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:STANDARD NTSC sets the oscilloscope to trigger on
NTSC-standard video signals.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:STANDARD? might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:STANDARD
HDTV indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger on an HDTV format.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}
Sets or returns the video field or line that the trigger detects.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-345
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}
{ODD|EVEN|ALLFields|ALLLines|NUMERic}
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}?
Arguments
ODD argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on interlaced video odd fields.
EVEN argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on interlaced video even fields.
ALLFields argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on all fields.
ALLLines argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on all video lines.
NUMERic argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on the video signal line
specified by the TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE command.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD EVEN sets the A video trigger so that it will trigger
on even fields.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD? might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD
ALLFIELDS indicating that the A video will trigger on all video fields.
TRIGger:EXTernal? (Query Only)
Returns all external trigger parameters.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:EXTernal?
TRIGger:EXTernal:PRObe
Sets or returns the attenuation factor value of the external probe connector.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:EXTernal:PRObe <NR3>
TRIGger:EXTernal:PRObe?
Arguments
2-346
<NR3> is the attenuation factor of the probe.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:EXTERNAL:PROBE? might return :TRIGGER:EXTERNAL:PROBE
1.0E1 for a 10X probe.
TRIGger:EXTernal:YUNIts? (Query Only)
Returns the external trigger vertical (Y) units value.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:EXTernal:YUNIts?
Examples
TRIGGER:EXTERNAL:YUNITS? might return TRIGGER:EXTERNAL:YUNITS
“V” if the vertical unit is volts.
TRIGger:FREQuency? (Query Only)
Returns the available trigger frequency in hertz. If the trigger frequency is not
currently available, the IEEE Not A Number (NaN = 9.9100E+37) value is
returned. The maximum precision of the returned frequency is 6 digits.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:FREQuency?
TRIGger:STATE? (Query Only)
Returns the current state of the triggering system: ARMED, AUTO, READY,
SAVE or TRIGGER.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:STATE?
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:MODe
Returns
ARMED indicates that the oscilloscope is acquiring pretrigger information.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-347
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
AUTO indicates that the oscilloscope is in the automatic mode and acquires data
even in the absence of a trigger.
READY indicates that all pretrigger information has been acquired and that the
oscilloscope is ready to accept a trigger.
SAVE indicates that the oscilloscope is in save mode and is not acquiring data.
TRIGGER indicates that the oscilloscope triggered and is acquiring the post trigger
information.
Examples
TRIGGER:STATE? might return :TRIGGER:STATE ARMED indicating that the
pretrigger data is being acquired.
*TST? (Query Only)
Tests (self-test) the interface and returns a 0.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*TST?
Examples
*TST? always returns 0.
UNLock (No Query Form)
Unlocks the front panel. The command is equivalent to LOCk NONe.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
UNLock ALL
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
2-348
LOCk
ALL specifies that all front-panel buttons and knobs are unlocked.
UNLOCK ALL unlocks all front-panel buttons and knobs.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
USBDevice:CONFigure
Enables or disables the rear USB port for use with Pictbridge printers.
Group
PictBridge
Syntax
USBDevice:CONFigure {DISabled|IMAge|USBTmc}
USBDevice:CONFigure?
Arguments
DISabled disables the rear USB port.
IMAge enables the rear USB port as an SIC device.
USBTmc enables the rear USB port as a USBTMC device.
Examples
USBDEVICE:CONFIGURE? might return USBDEVICE:CONFIGURE USBTMC
indicating a USBTMC device.
USBDEVICE:CONFIGURE IMAGE enables the rear USB port as an SIC device
USBTMC
Returns the USBTMC information used by the USB hosts to determine the
instrument interfaces.
Group
Misc
Syntax
USBTMC?
USBTMC:PRODUCTID:DECimal? (Query Only)
Returns the product ID of the USBTMC device in decimal format.
Group
Misc
Syntax
USBTMC:PRODUCTID:DECimal?
Examples
USBTMC:PRODUCTID:DECIMAL? might return USBTMC:PRODUCTID:DECIMAL
882 indicating that the product ID is 882 in decimal format.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-349
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
USBTMC:PRODUCTID:HEXadecimal? (Query Only)
Returns the product ID of the USBTMC device in hexadecimal format.
Group
Misc
Syntax
USBTMC:PRODUCTID:HEXadecimal?
Examples
USBTMC:PRODUCTID:HEXADECIMAL? might return
USBTMC:PRODUCTID:HEXADECIMAL 0x0372 indicating that the product ID in
hexadecimal format is 0x0372.
USBTMC:SERIALnumber? (Query Only)
Returns the serial number of the USBTMC device.
Group
Misc
Syntax
USBTMC:SERIALnumber?
Examples
USBTMC:SERIALNUMBER? might return USBTMC:SERAILNUMBER NO_SERIAL
indicating that there is no serial number for the instrument.
USBTMC:VENDORID:DECimal? (Query Only)
Returns the vendor ID of the USBTMC device in decimal format.
Group
Misc
Syntax
USBTMC:VENDORID:DECimal?
Examples
USBTMC:VENDORID:DECIMAL? might return USBTMC:VENDORID:DECIMAL
1689 indicating that 1689 is the Vendor ID in decimal format.
USBTMC:VENDORID:HEXadecimal? (Query Only)
Returns the vendor ID of the USBTMC device in hexadecimal format.
2-350
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Misc
Syntax
USBTMC:VENDORID:HEXadecimal?
Examples
USBTMC:VENDORID:HEXADECIMAL? might return
USBTMC:VENDORID:HEXADECIMAL 0x0699 indicating that 0x0689 is the
Vendor ID in hexadecimal format.
VERBose
Sets or returns the Verbose state that controls the length of keywords on query
responses. Keywords can be both headers and arguments.
NOTE. This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands
(those starting with an asterisk). This command does affects the verbose state
of both the USBTMC and VXI-11 interfaces. Refer to the Introduction for
information.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
VERBose {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Related Commands
Arguments
HEADer, *LRN?, SET?
OFF sets the Verbose state to false, which returns minimum-length keywords
for applicable setting queries.
ON sets the Verbose state to true, which returns full-length keywords for applicable
setting queries.
<NR1> a 0 returns minimum-length keywords for applicable setting queries; any
other value returns full-length keywords.
Examples
VERBOSE ON enables the Verbose state.
VERBOSE ? might return :VERB 0 indicating that the Verbose state is disabled.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-351
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
*WAI (No Query Form)
Prevents the oscilloscope from executing further commands or queries until all
pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete. This command
allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application
program.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*WAI
Related Commands
Examples
BUSY?, *OPC
*WAI prevents the oscilloscope from executing any further commands or queries
until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete.
WAVFrm? (Query Only)
Returns WFMOutpre? and CURVe? data for the waveform as specified by
the DATA:SOUrce command. This command is equivalent to sending both
WFMOutpre? and CURVe?, with the additional provision that the response to
WAVFrm? is guaranteed to provide a synchronized preamble and curve. The
source waveform, as specified by :DATA:SOURCE, must be active or the query
will not return any data and will generate an error indicator.
NOTE. For MSO models, reduced resolution waveform data is not available for
the digital channels.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WAVFrm?
Related Commands
Examples
2-352
CURVe, DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre?
WAVFRM? might return the waveform data as: :WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR
1;BIT_NR 8;ENCDG ASCII;BN_FMT RI;BYT_OR MSB;WFID
“Ch1, DC coupling, 100.0mV/div, 4.000us/div,
10000 points, Sample mode”;NR_PT 20;PT_FMT Y;XUNIT
“s”;XINCR 4.0000E-9;XZERO -20.0000E-6;PT_OFF 0;YUNIT
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
“V”;YMULT 4.0000E-3;YOFF 0.0000;YZERO 0.0000;:CURVE
2,1,4,2,4,3,0,3,3,3,3,3,3,4,3,5,6,6,7,3
WFMInpre? (Query Only)
Returns the waveform formatting and scaling specifications to be applied to the
next incoming CURVe command data.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre?
Related Commands
Examples
WFMOutpre?
WFMINPRE? might return the waveform formatting as :WFMINPRE:BIT_NR
8;BN_FMT RI;BYT_NR 1; BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG BIN;NR_PT 500;PT_FMT
Y; PT_OFF 0;XINCR 2.0000E-6;XZERO 1.7536E-6; XUNIT "s";YMULT
1.0000E-3;YOFF 0.0000; YZERO 0.0000;YUNIT "V"
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr
Sets or returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the incoming
waveform. Changing the value of WFMInpre:BIT_Nr also changes the value of
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr <NR1>
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr
<NR1> number of bits per data point can be 8 or 16.
WFMINPRE:BIT_NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16, for
incoming data.
WFMINPRE:BIT_NR? might return :WFMINPRE:BIT_NR 8 indicating that
incoming waveform data uses 8 bits per waveform point.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-353
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt
Sets or returns the format of binary data for incoming waveforms.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP}
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt?
Related Commands
Arguments
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
RI specifies signed integer data point representation.
RP specifies positive integer data point representation.
Examples
WFMINPRE:BN_FMT RP specifies positive integer data point representation.
WFMINPRE:BN_FMT? might return :WFMINPRE:BN_FMT RI indicating that the
incoming data is currently interpreted as signed integers.
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr
Sets or returns the data width for the incoming waveform. Changing the value of
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr also changes the value of WFMInpre:BIT_Nr.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr <NR1>
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr
<NR1> is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1 or 2.
WFMINPRE:BYT_NR 1 sets the number of bytes per incoming waveform data
point to 1, which is the default setting.
WFMINPRE:BYT_NR? might return :WFMINPRE:BYT_NR 2 indicating that there
are 2 bytes per incoming waveform data point.
2-354
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WFMInpre:BYT_Or
Sets or returns which byte of binary waveform data is expected first for incoming
waveform data when data points require than one byte. This specification only has
meaning when WFMInpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is 2.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:BYT_Or {LSB|MSB}
WFMInpre:BYT_Or?
Related Commands
Arguments
WFMInpre:ENCdg, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMInpre:FILTERFreq
LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be expected first.
MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be expected first.
Examples
WFMINPRE:BYT_OR MSB sets the most significant incoming byte of incoming
waveform data to be expected first.
WFMINPRE:BYT_OR? might return :WFMINPRE:BYT_OR LSB indicating that the
least significant incoming CURVe data byte will be expected first.
WFMInpre:COMPosition
Sets and queries the type of waveform data to be transferred to the instrument with
the CURVe command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:COMPosition
{COMPOSITE_YT|COMPOSITE_ENV|SINGULAR_YT}
WFMInpre:COMPosition?
Related Commands
Arguments
DATa:COMPosition
COMPOSITE_YT uses the sample part of the composite waveform.
COMPOSITE_ENV uses the peak-detect part of the composite waveform.
SINGULAR_YT uses the sample part of the singular waveform.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-355
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
WFMINPRE:COMPOSITION? might return :WFMINPRE:COMPOSITION
SINGULAR_YT indicating that the sample part of singular waveform is transferred
to the instrument.
WFMINPRE:COMPOSITIONCOMPOSITE_YT sets the sample part of composite
waveform to be transferred to the instrument.
WFMInpre:ENCdg
Sets or returns the type of encoding for incoming waveform data.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:ENCdg {ASCii|BINary}
WFMInpre:ENCdg?
Related Commands
Arguments
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
ASCii specifies that the incoming data is in ASCII format.
BINary specifies that the incoming data is in a binary format whose further
interpretation requires knowledge of BYT_NR, BIT_NR, BN_FMT, and
BYT_OR.
Examples
WFMINPRE:ENCDG ASC sets the format of incoming waveform data to ASCII
format.
WFMINPRE:ENCDG ? might return :WFMINPRE:ENCDG BIN indicating that the
incoming waveform data is in binary format.
WFMInpre:FILTERFreq
Specifies or returns the FilterVu low pass filter frequency, which was applied to
the waveform being sent to the instrument.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:FILTERFreq {NR1}
WFMInpre:FILTERFreq?
Arguments
2-356
<NR1> is an signed integer.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
WFMINPRE:FILTERFREQ? might return :WFMINPRE:FILTERFREQ 200000000
indicating that the FilterVu frequency for the incoming waveform is 200 MHz.
WFMINPRE:FILTERFREQ 3000000000 sets the FilterVu frequency for the
incoming waveform to 300 MHz.
WFMInpre:NR_Pt
Sets or returns the number of data points that are in the incoming waveform record.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:NR_Pt <NR1>
WFMInpre:NR_Pt?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
<NR1> is the number of data points if WFMInpre:PT_Fmt is set to Y. It is the
number of min-max pairs if WFMInpre:PT_Fmt is set to ENV.
WFMINPRE:NR_PT 10000 specifies that 10000 data points will be expected.
WFMINPRE:NR_PT ? might return :WFMINPRE:NR_PT 10000 indicating that
there are 10000 data points in the expected incoming waveform record.
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt
Sets or returns the point format of the incoming waveform data. Regardless of
the argument used, the scale, offset, and so on are interpreted similarly. When
ENV is used, waveform data is interpreted over the min-max pair; when Y is
used, it is interpreted over a single point.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt {ENV|Y}
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt?
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-357
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
ENV specifies that the waveform is transmitted in envelope mode as maximum
and minimum point pairs. Only Y values are explicitly transmitted. Absolute
coordinates are given by:
Xn = XZEro + XINcr (n – PT_Off)
Ynmax = YZEro + YMUlt (ynmax – YOFf)
Ynmin = YZEro + YMUlt (ynmin – YOFf)
Y specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is
transmitted for each point in the waveform record. Only Y values are explicitly
transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given by:
Xn = XZEro + XINcr (n – PT_Off)
Yn = YZEro + YMUlt (yn – YOFf)
Examples
WFMINPRE:PT_FMT ENV sets the incoming waveform data point format to
enveloped.
WFMINPRE:PT_FMT? might return :WFMINPRE:PT_FMT ENV indicating that the
waveform is transmitted as maximum and minimum point pairs.
WFMInpre:PT_Off
The set form of this command is ignored. The query form always returns a 0. This
command is listed for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:PT_Off <NR1>
WFMInpre:PT_Off?
Arguments
Arguments are ignored.
WFMInpre:XINcr
Sets or returns the horizontal interval between incoming waveform points in
units specified by WFMInpre:XUNit.
Group
2-358
Waveform Transfer
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
WFMInpre:XINcr <NR3>
WFMInpre:XINcr?
WFMInpre:XUNit, WFMOutpre:XINcr?
<NR3> is the horizontal interval representation.
WFMINPRE:XINCR 3E-3 sets the interval between incoming waveform points
to 3 ms.
WFMINPRE:XINCR ? might return :WFMINPRE:XINCR 1.0000E-3 indicating
that if WFMInpre:XUNit is set to "s", there is a 1 ms interval between incoming
waveform points.
WFMInpre:XUNit
Sets or returns the horizontal units of the incoming waveform.
Supported units are:
%, /Hz, A, A/A, A/V, A/W, A/dB, A/s, AA, AW, AdB, As, B, Hz, IRE, S/s, V,
V/A, V/V, V/W, V/dB, V/s, VV, VW, VdB, Volts, Vs, W, W/A, W/V, W/W, W/dB,
W/s, WA, WV, WW, WdB, Ws, dB, dB/A, dB/V, dB/W, dB/dB, dBA, dBV, dBW,
dBdB, day, degrees, div, hr, min, ohms, percent, s
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:XUNit <QString>
WFMInpre:XUNit?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
<QString> contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the
horizontal unit of measure for the incoming waveform.
WFMINPRE:XUNIT "HZ" specifies that the horizontal units for the incoming
waveform are hertz.
WFMINPRE:XUNIT? might return :WFMINPRE:XUNIT "s" indicating that the
horizontal units for the incoming waveform are seconds.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-359
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WFMInpre:XZEro
Sets or returns the position value, in XUNits, of the first sample of the incoming
waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:XZEro <NR3>
WFMInpre:XZEro?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
WFMInpre:XINcr, WFMInpre:XUNit, WFMOutpre:XZEro?
<NR3> argument is the floating point value of the position, in XUNits, of the first
sample in the incoming waveform. If XUNits is “s”, <NR3> is the time of the
first sample in the incoming waveform.
WFMINPRE:XZERO 5.7E-6, which indicates the trigger occurred 5.7 µs before the
first sample in the waveform.
WFMINPRE:XZERO? might return :WFMINPRE:XZEro –7.5000E-6 indicating
that the trigger occurs 7.5 µs after the first sample in the waveform.
WFMInpre:YMUlt
Sets or returns the vertical scale factor of the incoming waveform, expressed in
YUNits per waveform data point level. For one byte waveform data, there are 256
data point levels. For two byte waveform data there are 65,536 data point levels.
YMUlt, YOFf, and YZEro are used to convert waveform record values to YUNit
values using the following formula (where dl is the data level; curve_in_dl is a
data point in CURVe):
value_in_units = ((curve_in_dl – YOFf_in_dl) * YMUlt) + YZEro_in_units
NOTE. For a given waveform record, YMUlt, YOFf, and YZEro have to be a
consistent set, otherwise vertical cursor readouts and vertical measurements may
give incorrect results.
2-360
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:YMUlt <NR3>
WFMInpre:YMUlt?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMInpre:YUNit
<NR3> is the vertical scale factor per digitizing level of the incoming waveform
points.
WFMINPRE:YMULT? might return :WFMINPRE:YMULT 40.0000E-3, which (if
YUNit is “V”) indicates that the vertical scale is 40 mV/digitizing level (1V/div
for 8-bit data).
WFMINPRE:YMULT 20E-3 specifies that (if WFMInpre:YUNit is "V" and
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is 1), the vertical scale is 20 mV/digitizing level
(500 mV/div).
WFMInpre:YOFf
Sets or returns the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels.
Variations in this number are analogous to changing the vertical position of the
waveform.
YMUlt, YOFf, and YZEro are used to convert waveform record values to YUNit
values using the following formula (where dl is the data level; curve_in_dl is a
data point in CURVe):
value_in_units = ((curve_in_dl - YOFf_in_dl) * YMUlt) + YZEro_in_units
NOTE. For a given waveform record, YMUlt, YOFf, and YZEro have to be a
consistent set, otherwise vertical cursor readouts and vertical measurements may
give incorrect results.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:YOFf <NR3>
WFMInpre:YOFf?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMInpre:YMUlt, WFMOutpre:YOFf?
<NR3> is the vertical offset in digitizing levels.
WFMINPRE:YOFF 50 specifies that the zero reference point for the incoming
waveform is 50 digitizing levels (2 divisions, for 8-bit data) above the center
of the data range.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-361
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WFMINPRE:YOFF? might return :WFMINPRE:YOFF 25 indicating that the vertical
position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels.
WFMInpre:YUNit
Sets or returns the vertical units of the incoming waveform.
Supported units are: %, /Hz, A, A/A, A/V, A/W, A/dB, A/s, AA, AW, AdB, As,
B, Hz, IRE, S/s, V, V/A, V/V, V/W, V/dB, V/s, VV, VW, VdB, Volts, Vs, W,
W/A, W/V, W/W, W/dB, W/s, WA, WV, WW, WdB, Ws, dB, dB/A, dB/V, dB/W,
dB/dB, dBA, dBV, dBW, dBdB, day, degrees, div, hr, min, ohms, percent, s
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:YUNit <QString>
WFMInpre:YUNit?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
<QString> contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the
vertical unit of measure for the incoming waveform.
WFMINPRE:YUNIT? might return :WFMINPRE:YUNIT "V" indicating that the
vertical units for the incoming waveform are volts.
WFMINPRE:YUNIT "A" specifies that the vertical units for the incoming waveform
are Amperes.
WFMInpre:YZEro
Sets or returns the vertical offset of the incoming waveform in units specified
by WFMInpre:YUNit. Variations in this number are analogous to changing the
vertical offset of the waveform.
YMUlt, YOFf, and YZEro are used to convert waveform record values to YUNit
values using the following formula (where dl is the data level; curve_in_dl is a
data point in CURVe):
value_in_units = ((curve_in_dl - YOFf_in_dl) * YMUlt) + YZEro_in_units
NOTE. For a given waveform record, YMUlt, YOFf, and YZEro have to be a
consistent set, otherwise vertical cursor readouts and vertical measurements may
give incorrect results.
2-362
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:YZEro <NR3>
WFMInpre:YZEro?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
WFMInpre:YUNit, WFMOutpre:YZEro?
<NR3> is the offset in YUNits.
WFMINPRE:YZERO 1.5E+0 specifies that the zero reference point for the
incoming waveform is 1.5 V below the center of the data range (given that
WFMInpre:YUNit is set to V).
WFMINPRE:YZERO? might return :WFMINPRE:YZEro 7.5000E-6 indicating
that the zero reference for the incoming waveform is 7.5 µV below the center of
the data range (given that WFMInpre:YUNit is set to V).
WFMOutpre? (Query Only)
Returns waveform transmission and formatting parameters for the waveform
specified by DATa:SOUrce command. If the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command is not displayed, the oscilloscope returns only the
waveform transmission parameters (BYT_Nr, BIT_Nr, ENCdg, BN_Fmt,
BYT_Or).
For WFMOutpre? queries, first set DATa:RESOlution and DATa:COMPosition
appropriately. For MSO/DPO2000/B math FFT queries, set them to:
DATA:RESOLUTION FULL and DATA:COMPOSITION SINGULAR_YT.
For more information, see: Appendix B: Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B
and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instruments.
(See page B-1.)
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre?
Examples
WFMOUTPRE? ? might return the waveform formatting data as:
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 2;BIT_NR 16;ENCDG ASCII;BN_FMT RI;BYT_OR
MSB;WFID “Ch1, DC coupling, 100.0mV/div, 4.000us/div, 10000
points, Sample mode”;NR_PT 10000;PT_FMT Y;XUNIT “s”;XINCR
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-363
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
4.0000E-9;XZERO - 20.0000E-6;PT_OFF 0;YUNIT “V”;YMULT
15.6250E-6;YOFF :”6.4000E+3;YZERO 0.0000
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
Sets and returns the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms
contain, as specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. Changing the value of
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr also changes the values of WFMInpre:FILTERFreq and
DATa:WIDth.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr <NR1>
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DATa:SOUrce, DATa:WIDth, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
<NR1> is the number of bits per data point and can be 8 or 16.
WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for
outgoing waveforms.
WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR? might return :WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8 indicating that
outgoing waveforms use 8 bits per waveform point.
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
Sets or returns the format of binary data for outgoing waveforms specified by
the DATa:SOUrce command. Changing the value of WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt also
changes the value of DATa:ENCdg.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP}
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt?
Related Commands
2-364
DATa:ENCdg, DATa:SOUrce
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
RI specifies signed integer data point representation.
RP specifies positive integer data point representation.
Examples
WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT RP specifies that outgoing waveform data will be in positive
integer format.
WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT? might return :WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT RI indicating that
the outgoing waveform data is currently in signed integer format.
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
Sets or returns the data width for the outgoing waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command. Changing WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr also changes
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr and DATa:WIDth.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr <NR1>
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DATa:SOUrce, DATa:WIDth, WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
<NR1> is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1 or 2.
WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 1 sets the number of bytes per outgoing waveform data
point to 1, which is the default setting.
WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR? might return :WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 2 indicating that
there are 2 bytes per outgoing waveform data point.
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
Sets or returns which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted first, during
a waveform data transfer, when data points require than one byte. This
specification only has meaning when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr is 2. Changing WFMInpre:FILTERFreq also changes
DATa:ENCdg (if DATa:ENCdg is not ASCIi).
Group
Waveform Transfer
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-365
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or {LSB|MSB}
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or?
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be transmitted first.
MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be transmitted first.
Examples
WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR MSB sets the most significant outgoing byte of waveform
data to be transmitted first.
WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR? might return :WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR LSB indicating that
the least significant data byte will be transmitted first.
WFMOutpre:COMPosition
Controls or indicates the type of data used by the CURVe? query.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:COMPosition
{COMPOSITE_YT|COMPOSITE_ENV|SINGULAR_YT}
WFMOutpre:COMPosition?
Arguments
COMPOSITE_YT uses the sample part of the composite waveform.
COMPOSITE_ENV uses the peak-detect part of the composite waveform.
SINGULAR_YT uses the sample part of the singular waveform.
Examples
WFMOUTPRE:COMPOSITION? might return :WFMOUTPRE:COMPOSITION
SINGULAR_YT indicating that the singular data type is used by the CURVe? query.
WFMOUTPRE:COMPOSITIONCOMPOSITE_YT sets the data type used by the
CURVe? query.
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Sets and queries the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms.
Group
2-366
Waveform Transfer
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
WFMOutpre:ENCdg {ASCii|BINary}
WFMOutpre:ENCdg?
DATa:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, WFMInpre:FILTERFreq,
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
ASCii specifies that the outgoing data is to be in ASCII format. Waveforms
will be sent as <NR1> numbers.
BINary specifies that outgoing data is to be in a binary format whose further
specification is determined by WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr,
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt and WFMInpre:FILTERFreq.
Examples
WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG? might return :WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG BIN indicating that
outgoing waveform data will be sent in binary format.
WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG ASC specifies that the outgoing waveform data will be sent
in ASCII format.
WFMOutpre:FILTERFreq? (Query Only)
Returns the FilterVu low pass filter frequency applied to the LRL waveform record
of the source waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce. If the DATa:RESOlution is
set to FULL, then this is the filter frequency applied to the full resolution (LRL)
waveform. If the DATa:RESOlution is set to REDUced, then this is the filter
frequency applied to the reduced resolution (thumbnail) waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:FILTERFreq?
Examples
WFMOUTPRE:FILTERFREQ? might return :WFMOUTPRE:FILTERFREQ
200000000 indicating that the FilterVu frequency for the outgoing waveform
is 200 MHz.
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? (Query Only)
Returns the number of points for the DATa:SOUrce waveform that will be
transmitted in response to a CURVe? query. The query command will time
out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce
is not turned on.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-367
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Related Commands
Examples
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_Pt
WFMOUTPRE:NR_PT? might return :WFMOUTPRE:NR_PT 10000 indicating that
there are 10000 data points to be sent.
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? (Query Only)
Returns the point format for the outgoing waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce
command. Returned values are either ENV, which indicates envelope mode
format in which the data is returned as a series of min/max pairs, or Y, which
indicates normal waveform points. The query command will time out and an error
will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa:SOUrce
Examples
WFMOUTPRE:PT_FMT? might return :WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt ENV indicating that
the waveform data is a series of min-max pairs.
WFMOutpre:PT_Off? (Query Only)
The set form of this command is ignored. The query form always returns a 0, if
the waveform specified by DATA:SOUrce is on or displayed. If the waveform
is not displayed, the query form generates an error and returns event code 2244.
This command is for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes.
2-368
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DATa:SOUrce
Arguments are ignored.
WFMOUTPRE:PT_OFF? might return WFMOUTPRE:PT_OFF 0 indicating that the
waveform specified by DATA:SOURCE is on or displayed.
WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? (Query Only)
This query is for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes and always
returns LINEAR.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:PT_ORder?
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:SOUrce
WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORDER? returns :WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORDER LINEAR.
WFMOutpre:RECOrdlength? (Query Only)
Returns the record length for the source waveform as specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:RECOrdlength?
Examples
WFMOUTPRE:RECORDLENGTH? might return WFMOUTPRE:RECORDLENGTH 6250
indicating that 6250 is the source waveform record length.
WFMOutpre:WFId? (Query Only)
Returns a string describing several aspects of the acquisition parameters for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The query command will
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-369
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce
is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:WFId?
Related Commands
Returns
DATa:SOUrce
<QString> comprises the following comma-separated fields documented in
the tables below:
Table 2-42: Waveform Suffixes
Examples
2-370
Field
Description
Examples
Source
The source identification string as it appears in
the front-panel scale factor readouts.
“CH1–4”
“Math1
“Ref1–2"
Coupling
A string describing the vertical coupling of the
waveform (the Source1 waveform in the case of
Dual Waveform Math).
“AC coupling”
“DC couplng”
“GND coupling”
Vert Scale
A string containing the vertical scale factor of
the unzoomed waveform. The numeric portion
will always be four digits. The examples cover
all known internal units.
“100.0 mV/div”
“20.00 dB/div”
“45.00 deg/div”
“785.4 mrad/div”
“500.0 μVs/div”
“10.00 kV/s/div”
“200.0 mV/div”
“50.00 unk/div”
Horiz Scale
A string containing the horizontal scale factor of
the unzoomed waveform. The numeric portion
will always be four digits. The examples cover
all known internal units.
“100 ms/div”
“10.00 kHz/div”
Record Length
A string containing the number of waveform
points available in the entire record. The
numeric portion is given as an integer.
“1000 points”
“1000000 points”
Acquisition Mode
A string describing the mode used to acquire
the waveform.
“Sample mode”
“Pk Detect mode”
“Envelope mode”
“Average mode”
WFMOUTPRE:WFID? might return :WFMOUTPRE:WFID "Ch1, DC
coupling,100.0mVolts/div,500.0µs/div, 1000 points, Sample
mode"
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WFMOutpre:XINcr? (Query Only)
Returns the horizontal point spacing in units of WFMOutpre:XUNit for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. This value corresponds to
the sampling interval. The query command will time out and an error will be
generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:XINcr?
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:XUNit?
WFMOUTPRE:XINCR? might return :WFMOUTPRE:XINCR 10.0000E-6
indicating that the horizontal sampling interval is 10 µs/point.
WFMOutpre:XUNit? (Query Only)
Returns the horizontal units for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce
command. The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the
waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:SOUrce
WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT? might return :WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT "HZ" indicating that
the horizontal units for the waveform are in Hertz.
WFMOutpre:XZEro? (Query Only)
Returns the time coordinate of the first point in the outgoing waveform.
This value is in units of WFMOutpre:XUNit?. The query command will time
out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce
is not turned on.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-371
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:XZEro?
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:XUNit?
WFMOUTPRE:XZERO? might return :WFMOUTPRE:XZERO 5.6300E-9 indicating
that the trigger occurred 5.63 ns before the first sample in the waveform record.
WFMOutpre:YMUlt? (Query Only)
Returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level in units specified by
WFMOutpre:YUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
The query command will time out and an error is generated if the waveform
specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
See the description of WFMInpre:YMUlt to see how this scale factor is used to
convert waveform sample values to volts.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:SOUrce, WFMInpre:YMUlt
WFMOUTPRE:YMULT? might return :WFMOUTPRE:YMULT 4.0000E-3 indicating
that the vertical scale for the corresponding waveform is 100 mV/div (for 8-bit
waveform data).
WFMOutpre:YOFf? (Query Only)
Returns the vertical position in digitizing levels for the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command. The query command will time out and an error will be
generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
See the description of WFMInpre:YOFf to see how this position is used to convert
waveform sample values to volts.
Group
2-372
Waveform Transfer
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Examples
WFMOutpre:YOFf?
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
WFMOUTPRE:YOFF? might return :WFMOUTPRE:YOFF -50.0000E+0 indicating
that the position indicator for the waveform was 50 digitizing levels (2 divisions)
below center screen (for 8-bit waveform data).
WFMOutpre:YUNit? (Query Only)
Returns the vertical units for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce
command. The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the
waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:SOUrce
WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT? might return :WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT "dB" indicating that
the vertical units for the waveform are measured in decibels.
WFMOutpre:YZEro? (Query Only)
Returns the vertical offset in units specified by WFMOutpre:YUNit? for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The query command will
time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce
is not turned on.
See the description of WFMInpre:YZEro to see how this offset is used to convert
waveform sample values to volts.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YZEro?
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:YUNit?
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-373
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
WFMOUTPRE:YZERO? might return :WFMOUTPRE:YZERO -100.0000E-3
indicating that vertical offset is set to –100 mV.
ZOOm? (Query Only)
Returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm?
Examples
ZOOM? might return :ZOOM:MODE 1;GRATICULE:SIZE 80;SPLIT
EIGHTYTWENTY;:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE 1;SCALE 400.0000E-12;POSITION
46.8986;FACTOR 50.0000E+3;HORIZONTAL:POSITION 46.8986;SCALE
400.0000E-12
ZOOm{:MODe|:STATE}
Turns Zoom mode on or off. The Zoom mode query returns the current state of
Zoom mode. This command is equivalent to pressing the zoom button located
on the front panel.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm{:MODe|:STATE} {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
ZOOm{:MODe|:STATE}
Arguments
ON turns on Zoom mode.
OFF turns off Zoom mode.
<NR1> = 0 turns off Zoom mode; any other value turns on Zoom mode.
Examples
ZOOM:MODE OFF turns off Zoom mode.
ZOOM:MODE? might return :ZOOM:MODE 1 indicating that Zoom mode is
currently turned on.
2-374
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ZOOm:ZOOM1? (Query Only)
Returns the current horizontal positioning and scaling of the display.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:ZOOM1?
Examples
ZOOM:ZOOM1? might return :ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE
1;SCALE 400.0000E-12;POSITION 46.8986;FACTOR
50.0000E+3;HORIZONTAL:POSITION 46.8986;SCALE 400.0000E-12.
ZOOm:ZOOM1:FACtor? (Query Only)
Returns the zoom factor of a particular zoom box.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:ZOOM1:FACtor?
Returns
<NR1> is the zoom factor of a zoom box.
ZOOm:ZOOM1:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or returns the horizontal position for the specified zoom.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:ZOOM1:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
ZOOm:ZOOM1:HORizontal:POSition?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is a value from 0 to 100.00 and is the percent of the upper window that is
to the left of screen center, when the zoom factor is 1× or greater.
ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50 sets the Zoom1 reference pointer at
50% of acquired waveform.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-375
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION? might return
:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000 indicating that the Zoom1
reference pointer is currently set at 50% of acquired waveform.
ZOOm:ZOOM1:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the zoom horizontal scale for the specified zoom.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:ZOOM1:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
ZOOm:ZOOM1:HORizontal:SCAle?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction and ranges from
1.0E-3 to 5.0.
ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 5 sets the horizontal scale to 5 seconds.
ZOOM:ZOOM2:HORIZONTAL:SCALE? might return
:ZOOM2:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 1, indicating that the horizontal scale is 1 second.
ZOOm:ZOOM1:POSition
Sets or returns the horizontal position for the specified zoom.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:ZOOM1:POSition <NR3>
ZOOm:ZOOM1:POSition?
Arguments
<NR3> is a value from 0 to 100.00 and is the percent of the upper window that is
to the left of screen center, when the zoom factor is 1× or greater.
ZOOm:ZOOM1:SCAle
Sets or returns the zoom horizontal scale for the specified zoom.
Group
2-376
Zoom
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
ZOOm:ZOOM1:SCAle <NR3>
ZOOm:ZOOM1:SCAle?
<NR3> is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction and ranges from
1.0E-3 to 5.0.
ZOOm:ZOOM1:STATE
Sets or returns the specified zoom on or off, where x is the integer 1 representing
the single zoom window.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:ZOOM1:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
ZOOm:ZOOM1:STATE?
Arguments
ON turns Zoom 1 on.
OFF turns Zoom 1 off.
<NR1> = 0 disables the specified zoom; any other value enables the specified
zoom.
Examples
ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE ON turns Zoom1 on.
ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE? might return :ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE 1 indicating that
Zoom1 is on.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
2-377
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
2-378
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Status and Events
The oscilloscope provides a status and event reporting system for the Ethernet,
GPIB (with the TEK-USB-488 Adapter), and USB interfaces. This system
informs you of certain significant events that occur within the oscilloscope.
The oscilloscope status handling system consists of five 8-bit registers and two
queues for each interface. The remaining Status subtopics describe these registers
and components. They also explain how the event handling system operates.
Registers
Overview
The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional groups:
Status Registers contain information about the status of the oscilloscope.
They include the Standard Event Status Register (SESR).
Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events are reported to
the Status Registers and the Event Queue. They include the Device Event
Status Enable Register (DESER), the Event Status Enable Register (ESER),
and the Service Request Enable Register (SRER).
Status Registers
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and the Status Byte Register (SBR)
record certain types of events that may occur while the oscilloscope is in use.
IEEE Std 488.2-1987 defines these registers.
Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event, such as an execution
error or message available. When an event of a given type occurs, the oscilloscope
sets the bit that represents that type of event to a value of one. (You can disable
bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero. See Enable Registers). Reading
the status registers tells you what types of events have occurred.
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR). The SESR records eight types of
events that can occur within the oscilloscope. Use the *ESR? query to read the
SESR register. Reading the register clears the bits of the register so that the
register can accumulate information about new events.
NOTE. TekVISA applications use SESR bit 6 to respond to any of several events,
including some front panel actions.
Figure 3-1: The Standard Event Status Register (SESR)
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
3-1
Status and Events
Table 3-1: SESR Bit Functions
Bit
Function
7 (MSB)
PON
Power On. Shows that the oscilloscope was powered on.
On completion, the diagnostic self tests also set this bit.
6
URQ
User Request. Indicates that an application event has
occurred. *See note.
5
CME
4
EXE
Command Error. Shows that an error occurred while
the oscilloscope was parsing a command or query.
Execution Error. Shows that an error executing a
command or query.
3
DDE
Device Error. Shows that a device error occurred.
2
QYE
Query Error. Either an attempt was made to read the
1
RQC
Request Control. This is not used.
0 (LSB)
OPC
Operation Complete. Shows that the operation
Output Queue when no data was present or pending, or that
data in the Output Queue was lost.
is complete. This bit is set when all pending operations
complete following an *OPC command.
The Status Byte Register (SBR). Records whether output is available in the Output
Queue, whether the oscilloscope requests service, and whether the SESR has
recorded any events.
Use a Serial Poll or the *STB? query to read the contents of the SBR. The bits in
the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR, the Event
Status Enable Register (ESER), and the Output Queue. When you use a Serial
Poll to obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the RQS bit. When you use the *STB? query to
obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the MSS bit. Reading the SBR does not clear the bits.
Figure 3-2: The Status Byte Register (SBR)
Table 3-2: SBR Bit Functions
Bit
7 (MSB)
Function
———— Not used.
6
RQS
Request Service. Obtained from a serial poll. Shows
that the oscilloscope requests service from the GPIB
controller.
6
MSS
Master Status Summary. Obtained from *STB?
query. Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR.
5
ESB
Event Status Bit. Shows that status is enabled and
present in the SESR.
3-2
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Status and Events
Table 3-2: SBR Bit Functions (cont.)
Bit
Function
4
MAV
Message Available. Shows that output is available
in the Output Queue.
2
———— Not used.
———— Not used.
1–0
———— Not used.
3
Enable Registers
DESER, ESER, and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the
Status Registers and the Event Queue. Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a
Status Register (the DESER also acts as a filter to the Event Queue) and can
prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue.
Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it
controls. In order for an event to be reported to a bit in the Status Register, the
corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to one. If the bit in the Enable
Register is set to zero, the event is not recorded.
Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers. The Enable Registers and
the commands used to set them are described below.
The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER). This register controls which
types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event Queue. The bits in the
DESER correspond to those in the SESR.
Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER. Use the
DESE? query to read the DESER.
Figure 3-3: The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER)
The Event Status Enable Register (ESER). This register controls which types of
events are summarized by the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the SBR. Use the *ESE
command to set the bits in the ESER. Use the *ESE? query to read it.
Figure 3-4: The Event Status Enable Register (ESER)
The Service Request Enable Register (SRER). This register controls which bits
in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized by the Master Status
Summary (MSS) bit.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
3-3
Status and Events
Use the *SRE command to set the SRER. Use the *SRE? query to read the
register. The RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte Register is
read with a Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes back to a zero.
Figure 3-5: The Service Request Enable Register (SRER)
*PSC Command
The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on. Sending
*PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows:
DESER 255 (equivalent to a DESe 255 command)
ESER 0 (equivalent to an *ESE 0 command)
SRER 0 (equivalent to an *SRE 0 command)
Sending *PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in nonvolatile
memory through a power cycle.
NOTE. To enable the PON (Power On) event to generate a Service Request, send
*PSC 0, use the DESe and *ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and
ESER, and use the *SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER. Subsequent
power-on cycles will generate a Service Request.
Queues
Output Queue
The oscilloscope stores query responses in the Output Queue and empties this
queue each time it receives a new command or query message after an <EOM>.
The controller must read a query response before it sends the next command (or
query) or it will lose responses to earlier queries.
CAUTION. When a controller sends a query, an <EOM>, and a second query,
the oscilloscope normally clears the first response and outputs the second while
reporting a Query Error (QYE bit in the ESER) to indicate the lost response. A
fast controller, however, may receive a part or all of the first response as well. To
avoid this situation, the controller should always read the response immediately
after sending any terminated query message or send a DCL (Device Clear) before
sending the second query.
Event Queue
3-4
The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 128 events. If more than
128 events stack up in the Event Queue, the 128th event is replaced by event
code 350, "Queue Overflow."
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Status and Events
Read the Event Queue with the EVENT? query (which returns only the event
number), with the EVMSG? query (which returns the event number and a text
description of the event), or with the ALLEV? query (which returns all the event
numbers along with a description of the event). Reading an event removes it
from the queue.
Before reading an event from the Event Queue, you must use the *ESR? query to
read the summary of the event from the SESR. This makes the events summarized
by the *ESR? read available to the EVENT? and EVMSG? queries, and empties
the SESR.
Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous *ESR?
reads but not read from the Event Queue. Events that follow an *ESR? read are
put in the Event Queue but are not available until *ESR? is used again.
Event Handling Sequence
The figure below shows how to use the status and event handling system. In the
explanation that follows, numbers in parentheses refer to numbers in the figure.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
3-5
Status and Events
Figure 3-6: Status and Event Handling Process
When an event occurs, a signal is sent to the DESER (1). If that type of event
is enabled in the DESER (that is, if the bit for that event type is set to 1), the
appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one, and the event is recorded in the Event
Queue (2). If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled (3), then the
ESB bit in the SBR is set to one (4).
When output is sent to the Output Queue, the MAV bit in the SBR is set to one (5).
When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER
is enabled (6), the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is
generated (7).
3-6
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Status and Events
Synchronization Methods
Overview
Although most commands are completed almost immediately after being received
by the oscilloscope, some commands start a process that requires time. For
example, once a single sequence acquisition command is executed, depending
upon the applied signals and trigger settings, it may take an indeterminate amount
of time before the acquisition is complete. Rather than remain idle while the
operation is in process, the oscilloscope will continue processing other commands.
This means that some operations will not be completed in the order that they
were sent.
Sometimes the result of an operation depends on the result of an earlier operation.
A first operation must complete before the next one is processed. The oscilloscope
status and event reporting system is designed to accommodate this process.
The Operation Complete (OPC) bit of the Standard Event Status Register (SESR)
can be programmed to indicate when certain oscilloscope operations have
completed and, by setting the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) to report
OPC in the Event Status Bit (ESB) of the Status Byte Register (SBR) and setting
the Service Request Enable Register (SRER) to generate service request upon a
positive transition of the ESB, a service request (SRQ) interrupt can be generated
when certain operations complete as described in this section.
The following oscilloscope operations can generate an OPC:
:ACQuire:STATE <non-zero nr1> | ON | RUN only when in single sequence
acquisition mode
:CALibrate:FACtory STARt
:CALibrate:FACtory CONTinue
:CALibrate:FACtory PREVious
:HARDCopy
:HARDCopy START
:DIAg:STATE EXECute
:SAVe:IMAGe <file as quoted string>
:SAVe:SETUp <file as quoted string>
:RECAll:SETUp <file as quoted string>
:SAVe:WAVEform <source wwfm>,(<REF1-REF4> | <file as quoted string>
:RECAll:WAVEform <ISF file as quoted string>,<REF1-REF4>
:CH<1-4>:PRObe:DEGAUss EXECute
:CH<1-4>:PRObe:AUTOZero EXECute
TEKSecure
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
3-7
Status and Events
For example, a typical application might involve acquiring a single-sequence
waveform and then taking a measurement on the acquired waveform. You could
use the following command sequence to do this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE
The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time. It may not
finish before the oscilloscope takes an amplitude measurement (see the following
figure). This can result in an incorrect amplitude value.
Figure 3-7: Command Processing Without Using Synchronization
To ensure the oscilloscope completes waveform acquisition before taking the
measurement on the acquired data, you can synchronize the program.
Figure 3-8: Processing Sequence With Synchronization
You can use four different methods to synchronize the operation of the
oscilloscope with your application program: *WAI, BUSY, *OPC, and *OPC?.
The *OPC? query method is the most simple approach.
Using the *WAI Command
3-8
The *WAI command forces completion of previous commands that generate
an OPC message. No commands after the *WAI are processed before the OPC
message(s) are generated.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Status and Events
The same command sequence using the *WAI command for synchronization
looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement */
*WAI
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of the
oscilloscope, but the commands will not be processed by the oscilloscope until
all in-process OPC operations are complete. If the input buffer becomes full,
the controller will be unable to write commands to the buffer. This can cause a
time-out.
Using the BUSY Query
The BUSY? query allows you to find out whether the oscilloscope is busy
processing a command that generates OPC.
The same command sequence, using the BUSY? query for synchronization, looks
like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement */
While BUSY keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the *WAI
command. The BUSY? query helps you avoid time-outs caused by writing too
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
3-9
Status and Events
many commands to the input buffer. The controller is still tied up though, and
the repeated BUSY? query will result in bus traffic.
Using the *OPC Command
If the corresponding status registers are enabled, the *OPC command sets the
OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) when an operation is
complete. You achieve synchronization by using this command with either a
serial poll or service request handler.
Serial Poll Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE
and *ESE commands.
When the operation is complete, the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR) will be enabled and the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the Status Byte Register
will be enabled.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization with
serial polling looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 0
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement.*/
*OPC
While serial poll = 0, keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY.
Service Request Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE
and *ESE commands.
You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in the Service Request
Enable Register (SRER) using the *SRE command. When the operation is
complete, the oscilloscope will generate a Service Request.
3-10
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Status and Events
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization
looks like this
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 32
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement*/
*OPC
The program can now do different tasks such as talk to other devices. The SRQ,
when it comes, interrupts those tasks and returns control to this task.
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This technique is efficient but requires sophisticated programming.
Using the *OPC? Query
The *OPC? query is the most simple synchronization method. It does not require
you to set registers or poll, and it does not change the operation of subsequent
commands or queries.
The *OPC? query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation that generates
an OPC message is complete. A time out could occur if you try to read the output
queue before there is any data in it.
The same command sequence using the *OPC? query for synchronization looks
like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
3-11
Status and Events
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete */
*OPC?
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This is the simplest approach. It requires no status handling or loops. However,
you must set the controller time-out for longer than the acquisition operation.
Messages
Messages
The information contained in the tables below covers all the programming
interface messages the oscilloscope generates in response to commands and
queries.
For most messages, a secondary message from the oscilloscope gives detail about
the cause of the error or the meaning of the message. This message is part of the
message string and is separated from the main message by a semicolon.
Each message is the result of an event. Each type of event sets a specific bit in the
SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER. Thus, each message
is associated with a specific SESR bit. In the message tables, the associated SESR
bit is specified in the table title, with exceptions noted with the error message text.
No Event
The following table shows the messages when the system has no events or status
to report. These have no associated SESR bit.
Table 3-3: No Event Messages
Command Error
Code
Message
0
No events to report; queue empty
1
No events to report; new events pending *ESR?
The following table shows the command error messages generated by improper
syntax. Check that the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules
in the section on command Syntax.
Table 3-4: Command Error Messages (CME Bit 5)
3-12
Code
Message
100
Command error
101
Invalid character
102
Syntax error
103
Invalid separator
104
Data type error
105
GET not allowed
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Status and Events
Table 3-4: Command Error Messages (CME Bit 5) (cont.)
Execution Error
Code
Message
108
Parameter not allowed
109
Missing parameter
110
Command header error
112
Program mnemonic too long
113
Undefined header
120
Numeric data error
121
Invalid character in numeric
123
Exponent too large
124
Too many digits
130
Suffix error
131
Invalid suffix
134
Suffix too long
140
Character data error
141
Invalid character data
144
Character data too long
150
String data error
151
Invalid string data
152
String data too long
160
Block data error
161
Invalid block data
170
Command expression error
171
Invalid expression
The following table lists the execution errors that are detected during execution of
a command.
Table 3-5: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4)
Code
Message
200
Execution error
221
Settings conflict
222
Data out of range
224
Illegal parameter value
241
Hardware missing
250
Mass storage error
251
Missing mass storage
252
Missing media
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
3-13
Status and Events
Table 3-5: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4) (cont.)
3-14
Code
Message
253
Corrupt media
254
Media full
255
Directory full
256
File name not found
257
File name error
258
Media protected
259
File name too long
270
Hardcopy error
271
Hardcopy device not responding
272
Hardcopy is busy
273
Hardcopy aborted
274
Hardcopy configuration error
280
Program error
282
Insufficient network printer information
283
Network printer not responding
284
Network printer server not responding
286
Program runtime error
287
Print server not found
2200
Measurement error, Measurement system error
2201
Measurement error, Zero period
2202
Measurement error, No period, second waveform
2203
Measurement error, No period, second waveform
2204
Measurement error, Low amplitude, second waveform
2205
Measurement error, Low amplitude, second waveform
2206
Measurement error, Invalid gate
2207
Measurement error, Measurement overflow
2208
Measurement error, No backwards Mid Ref crossing
2209
Measurement error, No second Mid Ref crossing
2210
Measurement error, No Mid Ref crossing, second waveform
2211
Measurement error, No backwards Mid Ref crossing
2212
Measurement error, No negative crossing
2213
Measurement error, No positive crossing
2214
Measurement error, No crossing, target waveform
2215
Measurement error, No crossing, second waveform
2216
Measurement error, No crossing, target waveform
2217
Measurement error, Constant waveform
2219
Measurement error, No valid edge - No arm sample
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Status and Events
Table 3-5: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4) (cont.)
Code
Message
2220
Measurement error, No valid edge - No arm cross
2221
Measurement error, No valid edge - No trigger cross
2222
Measurement error, No valid edge - No second cross
2223
Measurement error, Waveform mismatch
2224
Measurement error, WAIT calculating
2225
Measurement error, No waveform to measure
2226
Measurement error, Null Waveform
2227
Measurement error, Positive and Negative Clipping
2228
Measurement error, Positive Clipping
2229
Measurement error, Negative Clipping
2230
Measurement error, High Ref < Low Ref
2231
Measurement error, No statistics available
2233
Requested waveform is temporarily unavailable
2235
Math error, invalid math description
2240
Invalid password
2241
Waveform requested is invalid
2244
Source waveform is not active
2245
Saveref error, selected channel is turned off
2250
Reference error, the reference waveform file is invalid
2253
Reference error, too many points received
2254
Reference error, too few points received
2259
File too big
2270
Alias error
2271
Alias syntax error
2273
Illegal alias label
2276
Alias expansion error
2277
Alias redefinition not allowed
2278
Alias header not found
2285
TekSecure(R) Pass
2286
TekSecure(R) Fail
2500
Setup error, file does not look like a setup file
2501
Setup warning, could not recall all values from external setup
2620
Mask error, too few points received
2760
Mark limit reached
2761
No mark present
2762
Search copy failed
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
3-15
Status and Events
Device Error
The following table lists the device errors that can occur during oscilloscope
operation. These errors may indicate that the oscilloscope needs repair.
Table 3-6: Device Error Messages (DDE Bit 3)
System Event
Code
Message
310
System error
311
Memory error
312
PUD memory lost
314
Save/recall memory lost
The following table lists the system event messages. These messages are
generated whenever certain system conditions occur.
Table 3-7: System Event Messages
Execution Warning
Code
Message
400
Query event
401
Power on (PON bit 7 set)
402
Operation complete (OPC bit 0 set)
403
User request (URQ bit 6 set)
404
Power fail (DDE bit 3 set)
405
Request control
410
Query INTERRUPTED (QYE bit 2 set)
420
Query UNTERMINATED (QYE bit 2 set)
430
Query DEADLOCKED (QYE bit 2 set)
440
Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response (QYE bit 2 set)
468
Knob/Keypad value changed
472
Application variable changed
The following table lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of
command execution. They also notify you of a possible unexpected results.
Table 3-8: Execution Warning Messages (EXE Bit 4)
3-16
Code
Message
528
Parameter out of range
532
Curve data too long, Curve truncated
533
Curve error, Preamble values are inconsistent
540
Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
541
Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude
542
Measurement warning, Unstable histogram
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Status and Events
Table 3-8: Execution Warning Messages (EXE Bit 4) (cont.)
Code
Message
543
Measurement warning, Low resolution
544
Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
545
Measurement warning, Invalid in minmax
546
Measurement warning, Need 3 edges
547
Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative
548
Measurement warning, Clipping positive
549
Measurement warning, Clipping negative
Table 3-9: Execution Warning Messages (EXE Bit 4)
Code
Internal Warning
Message
540
Measurement warning
541
Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude
542
Measurement warning, Unstable histogram
543
Measurement warning, Low resolution
544
Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
545
Measurement warning, Invalid min max
546
Measurement warning, Need 3 edges
547
Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative
548
Measurement warning, Clipping positive
549
Measurement warning, Clipping negative
The following table shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the
oscilloscope.
Table 3-10: Internal Warning Messages
Code
Message
630
Internal warning, 50Ω overload
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
3-17
Status and Events
3-18
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Character Set
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
A-1
Appendix A: Character Set
A-2
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B and
MSO/DPO2000 Series Instruments
An analog channel of an MSO/DPO2000B and MSO/DPO2000 series
instrument has a sample waveform and a peak detect waveform being acquired
simultaneously. This combination waveform is referred to as a “composite”
waveform. In some cases, for example when averaging is turned on, or for math
waveforms, a composite waveform is not available. In these cases, the waveform
is termed “singular”, and is available only in sample mode.
Full Versus Reduced
Resolution Waveforms
The MSO/DPO2000/B series introduces the concept of reduced resolution
waveforms available for curve queries. The MSO/DPO2000/B oscilloscopes
acquire channel data into “full” resolution records that are nominally 1 million
(1M) or 100,000 (100K) points in size (the acquisition record length); these are
termed “full resolution”, or LRL (long record length) waveforms. These LRL
records are “shrunk” (decimated) down to “thumbnail”, “short”, or “reduced
resolution” waveforms; these are what appear on the oscilloscope’s display
screen. During decimation, a low-pass filter operation may be applied to the LRL
sample data that results in a filtered thumbnail waveform. In general, both full
and reduced resolution waveforms can be queried from the oscilloscope. The size
of the reduced resolution waveform varies from 800 to 6250 points, depending
on instrument settings.
Math FFT waveform data is available only in FULL resolution.
For applications which need to query waveform data rapidly for the purpose of
displaying it, reduced resolution waveform data will provide a faster display
update than a full resolution waveform data.
Nominal Versus Actual
Record Length
The MSO/DPO2000/B series also introduces the concept of nominal versus actual
acquisition record length. Like other oscilloscopes, the acquisition record length
can be set using the HORizontal:RECOrdlength command. However, the actual
number of points in the waveform record may differ from the nominal record
length established by the HORizontal:RECOrdlength setting, depending on the
HORizontal:SCAle in effect at the time of the acquisition. The valid values
for setting acquisition record length are 1,000,000 (1M) and 100,000 (100K)
points. Depending on the horizontal scale in effect at the time of the acquisition, a
nominal 1M point record may be comprised of 1.0M or 1.25M (1,250,000) points
and a nominal 100K point record may be comprised of 100K or 125K (125,000)
points. The actual number of points in the waveform record for the source
waveform (specified by the DATa:SOUrce command) may be obtained using the
WFMOutpre:RECOrdlength? query.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
B-1
Appendix B: Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instruments
Composition of Waveform
Data
The MSO/DPO2000/B series introduces the concept of composite waveform data
for analog channels. Sample data is always available for acquired analog channel
waveforms. Composite waveforms are available in SAMPLE acquisition mode
but are not available in AVERAGE acquisition mode. Peak data may be available
depending on the instrument bandwidth, acquisition mode, nominal record length,
and the horizontal scale settings.
Sample waveform data which may be a component of a composite waveform
is referred to as COMPOSITE_YT (vertical units versus time) data.
Peak detect waveform data which may be a component of a composite
waveform is referred to as COMPOSITE_ENV (envelope or peak detect
min/max pairs versus time) data.
Analog channel waveforms acquired in AVERAGE acquisition mode and MATH
waveforms are not composite waveforms and are termed SINGULAR_YT which
indicates that the waveform is a single waveform composed of data points
representing vertical units versus time. The composition of digital waveform
data (:DATa:SOUrce D0 through D15, DIGital) is SINGULAR_YT only.
The following table lists the various waveform data compositions:
Composition
Description
COMPOSITE_YT
(analog channels)
This is sample waveform data in vertical units versus time. Its native
width is 8-bits and is written as 8-bit data in saved ISF waveform
files and reference waveforms. The data can be queried as 1- or
2-byte data in CURVe? queries by setting the data width to 1 or 2.
COMPOSITE_ENV
(analog channels)
This is min/max pair waveform data with the minimum value
preceding the maximum value. Its native width is 8-bits and is
written as 8-bit data in saved ISF waveform files and reference
waveforms. The data can be queried as 1- or 2-byte data in
CURVe? queries by setting the data width to 1 or 2.
SINGULAR_YT
(analog and math
channels)
This is 16-bit waveform data which originates as averaged acquired
waveform data or math data. It is written to saved ISF waveform
files and reference waveforms as 16- bit data. The data can be
queried as 1-or 2- byte data in CURVe? queries by setting the data
width to 1 or 2.
SINGULAR_YT
(digital channels)
This is sample waveform data in binary vertical units (0 or 1) versus
time. Its native width is 8-bits for individual digital channels (D0
through D15) and 32 bits for the digital collection (D0 through D15,
digital representation of CH1 through CH4). The only resolution
available for digital waveform data is FULL.
The available waveform compositions, which can be obtained using the CURVe? or
WAVFrm? queries, can be determined using the DATa:COMPosition:AVAILable?
query. This query returns the available waveform compositions for the last
acquired waveform for the source specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
The data returned by the DATa:COMPosition:AVAILable? query may be one
of the following:
B-2
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instruments
COMPOSITE_YT
COMPOSITE_YT, COMPOSITE_ENV
SINGULAR_YT
The composition of the waveform data to be queried using the
CURVe? or WAVFrm? queries is set using the DATa:COMPosition or
WFMOutpre:COMPosition command. The compositions which can be set are:
COMPOSITE_YT
COMPOSITE_ENV
SINGULAR_YT
If the composition set is not available with the current acquisition and horizontal
settings, no response is returned for the CURVe? or WAVFrm? query and an
event is set.
For example, if COMPOSITE_ENV data is not available and a CURVe? query is
sent with the composition set to COMPOSITE_ENV, no data will be returned and an
error event is set:
> :DATA:COMPOSITION:AVAILABLE?
COMPOSITE_YT
> DATA:COMPOSITION?
COMPOSITE_YT
> DATA:COMPOSITION
COMPOSITE_ENV
> *ESR? 0 > CURVE? {no data returned}
> *ESR?
20
> EVMSG?
221,"Settings conflict; Envelope waveform not available;
CURVE?" >
The composition of the waveform data to be sent to the instrument for transfer
to the reference waveform memory using the CURVe command is set using the
WFMInpre:COMPosition command. The compositions which can be set are:
COMPOSITE_YT
COMPOSITE_ENV
SINGULAR_YT
Filtering of Waveform Data
with FilterVu
The FilterVu feature uses digital signal processing (DSP) techniques to apply low
pass filtering to the acquired waveform data for the analog channels. The FilterVu
feature provides filtering of the displayed waveform so that you can see your
signal without the effects of noise. This is the reduced resolution waveform. A
side effect of filtering the reduced resolution waveform is that the full resolution
waveform may be subjected to filtering to achieve the desired filtering of the
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
B-3
Appendix B: Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instruments
reduced resolution waveform. The filtering frequency of the full resolution
waveform is not under your direct control. It is a function of the horizontal
and acquisition settings and the selected FilterVu frequency. The 3 dB cutoff
frequency for this filtering may be different for the LRL record and the thumbnail
record. The actual filter frequency applied to the acquired (LRL) and displayed
(thumbnail) waveforms are available in the waveform preamble:
WFMOutpre:FILTERFreq?
This query returns the 3 dB low pass filter cutoff frequency for:
The acquired (LRL) waveform when the DATa:RESOlution is set to FULL.
The displayed (thumbnail) waveform when the DATa:RESOlution is set
to REDUced.
When waveforms are sent to the instrument using the CURVe command or recalled
from ISF files, the filtering frequency is obtained from the waveform preamble:
WFMInpre:FILTERFreq
This command sets the 3 dB low pass filter cutoff frequency for the waveform
being transferred to the instrument’s reference waveform memory.
Only FULL resolution waveforms may be sent to the instrument for storage and
display in reference waveform memory.
The filtering of reduced resolution waveforms is controlled using the
FILTERVu:FREQuency command. The available low pass frequencies depends
on the instrument bandwidth and the horizontal settings (scale and record
length) and may be queried for the last acquired waveform, (as specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command) using the FILTERVu:FREQuency:AVAILable? query.
This query returns a comma separated list of available FilterVu frequencies in
decreasing order for the last acquired source waveform . For example, on a
100 MHz bandwidth instrument at a full resolution record length of 1 M points
and a horizontal scale of 20 microseconds per division, the query returns these
values which apply to the reduced resolution (displayed) waveform: 100000000,
75000000, 42000000, 21000000, 11000000, 5500000, and 2200000.
The low pass filter frequency in effect can be queried using the
FILTERVu:FREQuency? query.
FilterVu Controls for the
Displayed Waveform
B-4
The FilterVu feature can be turned on or off using the DISplay:GLITch command
and the display intensity of the glitch capture waveform can be controlled using
the DISplay:INTENSITy:GLITch command.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instruments
Querying Acquisition
Peak Detect Data from the
Instrument
1. Use the DATa:COMPosition:AVAILable? query to determine if peak detect
data (COMPOSITE_ENV) is available. This query returns a list of waveform
data types that are available from the instrument under the current instrument
settings:
COMPOSITE_YT for sample data
COMPOSITE_ENV for envelope or peak detect data
SINGULAR_YT for sample data
2. If COMPOSITE_ENV is available, set the data composition to COMPOSITE_ENV
(:DATa:COMPosition COMPOSITE_ENV). Otherwise, the peak detect data
is not available and cannot be queried from the instrument.
3. CURVe? will now return peak detect data.
Querying Acquisition YT
Sample Data from the
Instrument
Selecting Acquisition
Record Length
The sequence used to query sample data is nearly identical to the one used for
peak detect data. Set the data composition to COMPOSITE_YT or SINGULAR_YT
(based on results of the DATa:COMPosition:AVAILable? query); CURVe? will
now return sample data.
Like other oscilloscopes, the acquisition record length can be set using the
HORizontal:RECOrdlength command. However, the actual number of points
in the acquired waveform record may differ from the nominal record length
established by the HORizontal:RECOrdlength setting, depending on the
HORizontal:SCAle in effect at the time of the acquisition. The allowed values for
setting the acquisition record length are 1,000,000 (1 million) and 100,000 (100
thousand) points. Depending on the horizontal scale in effect at the time of the
acquisition, a nominal 1 million point record may be composed of 1.0 million or
1.25 million points and a nominal 100 thousand point record may be composed of
100 thousand or 125 thousand points. The actual number of points acquired for
the source waveform (specified by the DATa:SOUrce command) may be obtained
using the WFMOutpre:RECOrdlength? query.
For reduced resolution waveforms, the actual record length depends on the
FilterVu frequency in effect in addition to the horizontal settings. The reduced
resolution record lengths vary with the FilterVu frequency.
High Resolution and Envelope acquisition modes are not supported in
MSO/DPO2000/B series instruments.
For the digital waveforms (D0 through D15), the actual record length may differ
from the nominal record length established by the HORizontal:RECOrdlength
setting, depending on the HORizontal:SCAle in effect at the time of the
acquisition and whether digital waveforms are selected from one or both of the
digital pods (whether digital channels are turned on for D0 through D7, and for D8
through D15). For faster horizontal scales, the actual record length may be half
of the nominal record length when digital waveforms from both digital pods are
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
B-5
Appendix B: Waveform Data in MSO/DPO2000B and MSO/DPO2000 Series Instruments
turned on. Use the WFMOutpre:RECOrdlength? query to determine the actual
record length for digital waveforms.
Extensions to the DATA
Commands
Like the MSO/DPO4000/B series, the MSO/DPO2000/B series provides the
DATa:WIDth command that allows you to specify the data word width (in
bytes) used when querying data from the instrument or when sending data to
the instrument with the CURVe command. The following are the extensions to
data commands:
DATa:RESOlution
DATa:COMPosition:AVAILable?
DATa:COMPosition
WFMOutpre Parameters
The WFMOutpre? parameters correspond to the source waveform specified by
the DATa:SOUrce command. The following are the extensions to Waveform
Outpre commands:
WFMOutpre:COMPosition
WFMOutpre:FILTERFreq?
WFMOutpre:RECOrdlength?
WFMInpre Parameters
The WFMInpre? parameters correspond to the destination reference waveform
specified by the DATa:DESTination command. The following are the extensions
to Waveform Inpre commands:
WFMInpre:FILTERFreq
WFMInpre:COMPosition
FilterVu Frequency Control
Commands
The following are the FilterVu commands:
FILTERVu:FREQuency
FILTERVu:FREQuency:AVAILable?
DISplay:GLITch
DISplay:INTENSITy:GLITch
B-6
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Appendix C: Reserved Words
This is a list of reserved words for your instrument. Capital letters identify the
required minimum spelling.
*CAL
*CLS
*DDT
*ESE
*ESR
*IDN
*LRN
*OPC
*PSC
*PUD
*RCL
*RST
*SAV
*SRE
*STB
*TRG
*TST
*WAI
1
1CH
7
8
9
A
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
ABORt
ABOrt
ABSolute
AC
ACKMISS
ACQ
ACQLENGTH
ACQuire
ACTIVeprinter
ADD
ADDR10
ADDR7
ADDRANDDATA
ADDRess
ADDress
ALIas
ALIas[
ALL
ALLEv
ALLFields
ALLLines
ALTERNATE
ALWAYS
AMPlitude
AND
ANY
APPKey
AREa
ASCII
ASCIi
ASCii
ASSIgn
ATRIGger
AUTO
AUTOSet
AUTOZero
AUX
AUXOut
AUXin
AVAILable
AVErage
Auto
B
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BACKLight
BACKWards
BANdwidth
BASe
BDIFFBP
BINary
BITOrder
BITRate
BIT_Nr
BLAckmanharris
BM
BMP
BN_Fmt
BOTh
BOX
BTRIGger
BURst
BUS
BUSY
BY
BYPass
BYT_Nr
BYT_Or
CALibrate
CAN
CANH
CANL
CARD
CARea
CATalog
CH
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CHannel
CHecksum
CLAss
CLEAR
CLEARMenu
CLEARSNapshot
CLEar
CLOCK
CLOCk
CM10BY15
CM13BY18
CM15BY21
CM18BY24
CM6BY8
CM7BY10
CM9BY13
CMEan
COLUMN
COMMAND
COMPOSITE_ENV
COMPOSITE_YT
COMPosition
CONDition
CONFigure
CONTROl
CONTinue
COPy
COUNt
COUPling
CPU
CR
CRC
CRCHeader
CRCTrailer
CREATE
CRMs
CROSSHair
CURSor
CURSors
CURVe
CURrent
CUSTom
CWD
CYCLEcount
D
D0
D1
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DATA
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
C-1
Appendix C: Reserved Words
DATABits
DATE
DATEPrint
DATa
DAll
DB
DC
DECimal
DEFLT
DEFault
DEFine
DEGAUss
DEGrees
DELEte
DELIMiter
DELTa
DELTatime
DELay
DELayed
DELete
DELta
DESE
DESKew
DESTination
DHCPbootp
DIAg
DIFFerential
DIGItal
DIGital
DIGtal
DIR
DIRection
DISabled
DISplay
DISplaymode
DNS
DOMAINname
DPOModels
DRAFT
DUAL
DUmp
DYNAMic
E
ECL
EDGE
EDGe
EEPROM
EITher
ENAble
ENCdg
END
ENET
ENGLish
C-2
ENV
ENVelope
EOF
EOFTYPE
EQUal
EQual
ERROR
ERRTYPE
ERRlog
ERRor
ETHERnet
EVEN
EVENT
EVENTS
EVENTtable
EVMsg
EVQty
EXECute
EXT
EXTended
EXTernal
FACtor
FACtory
FAIL
FALL
FALSe
FALling
FASTPHOTO
FASTer
FAStest
FFT
FIELD
FIFty
FILEFormat
FILESystem
FILTERFreq
FILTERVu
FINE
FIRst
FIVEdivs
FLAg
FOCUS
FOLder
FORCEDRange
FORCe
FORMAt
FORMat
FORWards
FPAnel
FRACTional
FRAMEID
FRAMEType
FRAMETypeid
FRAMEtype
FRAMING
FRAme
FREE
FREESpace
FRENch
FREQuency
FULL
FULl
FUNCtion
GAIN
GATEWay
GATIng
GATing
GENeralcall
GERMan
GLITch
GND
GPIBUsb
GRAticule
GRId
HAGAKIPC
HAGAKIPCARD
HALFgrat
HAMming
HANning
HARDCopy
HBArs
HD1080I50
HD1080I60
HD1080P24
HD1080P25
HD1080PSF24
HD480P60
HD720P60
HDtv
HEADER
HEADer
HEIght
HERtz
HEXadecimal
HFRej
HIGH
HIGHLimit
HIRes
HIStogram
HIVALue
HOLDTime
HOLDoff
HORZ
HORizontal
HPOS
HSmode
HTTPPort
I2C
ID
IDANDDATA
IDFORmat
IDLETime
IDLEtime
IDPrint
IDentifier
IMAGESize
IMAGe
IMAge
IMMed
IMPedance
IN
IN11BY17
IN2P5BY3P25
IN4BY6
IN8BY10
INDBits
INDICators
INDIvidual
INDependent
INFInite
INIT
INKSaver
INPut
INTENSITy
INTERLAced
INTERNal
INVERTed
INVert
INVerted
INrange
IO
IPADDress
ISCLOCKed
ITALian
JAPAnese
KOREan
L
L2
L4
LABEL
LABel
LANGuage
LANdscape
LARge
LAYout
LESSEQual
LESSLimit
LESSThan
LESSthan
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Appendix C: Reserved Words
LETTER
LEVel
LF
LFRej
LIN
LINE
LINEAr
LINEPeriod
LIST
LOCk
LOG
LOGIC
LOGIc
LOGic
LOOP
LOW
LOWLimit
LOWerthreshold
LSB
MAG
MAIN
MAIn
MAIn]
MARK
MARKSINCOLumn
MATH
MATH1
MATHVAR
MATH[1]
MAXSamplerate
MAXimum
MEAN
MEAS
MEASUrement
MEDium
MEG
MESSage
METHod
MID
MID2
MINImum
MINMax
MISO
MISOMOSI
MIXed
MKDir
MM100BY150
MM54BY86
MODE
MODe
MOREEQual
MORELimit
MOREThan
MOREthan
MOSI
MSB
NAME
NAMe]
NANd
NEGative
NEWpass
NEXT
NEXt
NO
NOCARE
NOISErej
NONE
NONe
NOPARity
NORMal
NOTCOMPuted
NR1
NRMAL
NR_Pt
NTIMES
NTIMes
NTSc
NULL
NULLFRDynamic
NULLFRStatic
NULl
NUMACq
NUMAVg
NUMENTries
NUMERic
NUMEnv
NUMHORZ
NUMVERT
OCCURS
ODD
OFF
OFFSet
ON
ONCE
ONFAIL
OPTion
OUT
OUTrange
OVERLoad
OWNer
PACKET
PAL
PAPERSize
PAPERType
PARallel
PARity
PASS
PASSWord
PATtern
PAYLength
PAYLoad
PERCent
PERIod
PERSistence
PERcent
PHAse
PHOTO
PictBridge
PING
PK2Pk
PLAIN
PNG
POLARity
POLar
POLarity
PORTRait
PORTUguese
POSITION
POSition
POSitive
POVershoot
POWerupstatus
PPULSECount
PRESS
PREVIEW
PREViewstate
PREVious
PRINTQual
PRINTer
PRODDELta
PRODUCT
PRODUCTID
PROGressive
PRObe
PT_Fmt
PT_ORder
PT_Off
PULSEWIDth
PULSEWidth
PULSe
PULse
PWIdth
QUALifier
RADIUS
RATDELta
RATE15K
RATE1M
RATE20K
RATE25K
RATE35K
RATE50K
RATE800K
RATIO
RDELta
READ
READFile
RECAll
RECOrdlength
RECTX
RECTY
RECTangular
REDUced
REF
REF1
REF2
REFLevel
REM
REMote
REName
REPEATstart
RESET
RESOlution
RESUlt
RESistance
RESults
RI
RIBinary
RISEFall
RISe
RISing
RMDir
RMS
ROLL100MM
ROLL127MM
ROLL210MM
ROLL89MM
ROM
RP
RPBinary
RS232
RS232C
RUN
RUNSTop
RUNT
RUNt
RUSSian
RWINClude
RX
RXDATA
RXENDPacket
RXPARity
RXSTArt
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
C-3
Appendix C: Reserved Words
SAMPLERate
SAMPLEpoint
SAMple
SAVe
SCAN
SCAle
SCLK
SCREEN
SCREen
SDATA
SEARCH
SEARCHtotrigger
SECAM
SEConds
SELect
SELected
SEQuence
SERIALnumber
SERnumber
SET
SETHold
SETLevel
SETTime
SETUP
SETUp
SEVENTYFive
SHOW
SIGnal
SIMPlifiedchinese
SINGULAR_YT
SIZe
SLEEP
SLEWRate
SLOWer
SLOpe
SMAll
SNAPShot
SNAp
SOF
SOURCE
SOURCE2
SOURCE[1]
C-4
SOUrce
SOUrce2
SPANish
SPC
SPECTral
SPI
SPREADSheet
SPace
SRIbinary
SRPbinary
SS
STANDard
STANdard
START
STARTofframe
STARTup
STARTupnosync
STARt
STARtbyte
STATE
STATE]
STATIstics
STATUS
STATe
STATic
STATus
STDdev
STOP
STOPAfter
STRing
STYle
STandard
SUBNETMask
SYNC
SYNCField
SYNCFrame
SYNCInterval
TEKSecure
TEMPerature
TERmination
TESTnumber
THDELta
THETA
THREshold
THReshold
TIFf
TIME
TIMe
TOTAL
TOTal
TOTaluptime
TRACk
TRADitionalchinese
TRANsition
TRAnsition
TRIGger
TRIGgertosearch
TRUe
TTL
TURN
TWEnty
TWOfifty
TX
TXDATA
TXENDPacket
TXPARity
TXRX
TXSTArt
TYPE
TYPe
Than
UNDo
UNEQual
UNIts
UNLock
UPPerthreshold
USBDevice
USBTMC
USBTmc
USE
USER
V1X
V2X
VALue
VAR
VBArs
VDELTa
VENDORID
VERBose
VERT
VERTical
VIDeo
VOLts
WAKEup
WAVEform
WAVFrm
WEIghting
WFId
WFMInpre
WFMOutpre
WHEn
WIDth
WINdow
WRITE
WRITEFile
X
XDELta
XFF
XINcr
XUNit
XY
XZEro
Y
YDELta
YES
YMUlt
YOFf
YT
YUNIts
YUNit
YUNits
YZEro
ZOOM
ZOOm
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Appendix D: Application Module-enabled Commands
This table lists the commands that become available with installation of an
application module.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
D-1
Appendix D: Application Module-enabled Commands
Application Module
Commands
DPO2AUTO
Automotive Serial Triggering and Analysis Module. Enables triggering on packet-level information on CAN
and LIN buses as well as analytical tools such as digital views of the signal, bus views, packet decoding,
search tools, and packet decode tables with time-stamp information.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate
BUS:B<x>:CAN:PRObe
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate
BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat
BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLARity
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce
BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
D-2
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Appendix D: Application Module-enabled Commands
Application Module
Commands
DPO2COMP
Computer Serial Triggering and Analysis Module. Enables triggering on packet-level information on
RS-232/422/485/UART buses as well as analytical tools such as digital views of the signal, bus views,
packet decoding, search tools, and packet decode tables with time-stamp information.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:SOUrce
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:VALue
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:SIZe
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:VALue
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
D-3
Appendix D: Application Module-enabled Commands
Application Module
Commands
DPO2EMBD
Embedded Serial Triggering and Analysis Module. Enables triggering on packet-level information on I2C
and SPI buses as well as analytical tools such as digital views of the signal, bus views, packet decoding,
search tools, and packet decode tables with time-stamp information.
BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:RWINClude
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:DATA|:SDATA}:SOUrce
BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:POLARity
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:POLARity
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:SOUrce
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:POLARity
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:SOUrce
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA:SIZe
BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING
BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:POLARity
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MISO|:IN}:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:IN|:MISO}:VALue
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:MOSI}:VALue
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
D-4
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence
Examples
The following are some example command sequences that show a variety of
different searches and triggers. The commands in these sequences are not
order-dependent.
To use these examples, connect channel 1, channel 2, channel 3 and channel 4
(if available) to the probe compensation signal located on the right hand side
of the front panel.
The search and trigger command group sections contain more information on
general search and trigger concepts.
Example 1: Single Threshold Edge Search
Goal: Search the channel 2 waveform and place a mark at each instance where it
crosses below a threshold of 1.4 volts.
Command
Comment
*RST
Resets the oscilloscope. Wait for the reset to complete
(approximately 3 seconds).
:SELect:CH2 1
Turns the CH2 waveform on.
:AUTOSet EXECute
Autosets the displayed waveform CH2. Wait for the autoset to
complete (approximately 3 seconds).
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TYPe EDGE
Specifies that this will be an edge search (a mark will be placed
when the source waveform passes through a specified threshold
level in the specified direction).
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce CH2
Specifies the CH2 waveform as the source waveform.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH2 TTL
Specifies 1.4 volts as the threshold level.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe FALL
Specifies the falling edge as the direction.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:STATE 1
Turns the search on.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TOTal?
Returns 4, indicating that CH2 fell below the 1.4 volt threshold 4
times.
Example 2: Single Threshold Edge Trigger
Goal: Trigger on the channel 2 waveform when the waveform crosses below a
threshold of 1.4 volts.
Command
Comment
*RST
Resets the oscilloscope. Wait for the reset to complete (approximately
3 seconds).
:SELect:CH2 1
Turns the CH2 waveform on.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
E-1
Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence Examples
Command
Comment
:TRIGger:A:TYPe EDGE
Specifies that this will be an edge trigger (trigger will occur when the
source waveform passes through a specified threshold level in the
specified direction).
:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce CH2
Specifies the CH2 waveform as the source waveform.
:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH2 1.4
Specifies 1.4 volts as the threshold level.
:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe FALL
Specifies as falling edge as the direction.
:TRIGger:STATE?
Should return TRIGGER, not AUTO.
Example 3: Dual Threshold Runt Search
Goal: Search the channel 3 waveform for negative runt pulses and place a mark at
each instance when the waveform drops below an upper threshold of 1.4 volts, but
does not cross a lower threshold of -2 volts before re-crossing the upper threshold.
The pulse width must be less than 600 microseconds.
Command
Comment
*RST
Resets the oscilloscope. Wait for the reset to complete
(approximately 3 seconds).
:SELect:CH3 1
Turns the CH3 waveform on.
:AUTOSet EXECute
Autosets the displayed waveform CH3. Wait for the autoset to
complete (approximately 3 seconds).
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TYPe RUNT
Specifies that this will be a runt search (a mark will be placed on
a pulse amplitude that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a
second threshold before re-crossing the first).
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce CH3
Specifies to use channel 3 as the source waveform.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH3 -2
Specifies to use -2 volts as the lower threshold.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold: CH3 1.4
Specifies to use 1.4 volts as the upper threshold.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity NEGative
Specifies to search for when the runt polarity is negative.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth 600E-6
Specifies a pulse width of 600E-6 seconds.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn LESSthan
Specifies to search for when the pulse width is less than
600E-6 seconds.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:STATE 1
Turns the search on.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TOTal?
Returns 3, indicating that 3 total negative runt pulses were less than
600E-6 seconds wide
Example 4: Single Threshold Logic Search on Three Waveforms
Goal: Search the channel 1, 2 and 3 waveforms and place a mark at each instance
when either channel 1 is above 1.4 volts, channel 2 is above 1.5 volts, or channel
3 is above 1.3 volts.
E-2
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence Examples
Command
Comment
*RST
Resets the oscilloscope. Wait for the reset to complete
(approximately 3 seconds).
:SELect:CH1 1
Turns the CH1 waveform on.
:SELect:CH2 1
Turns the CH2 waveform on.
:SELect:CH3 1
Turns the CH3 waveform on.
:AUTOSet EXECute
Autosets the displayed waveforms CH1, CH2 and CH3. Wait
for the autoset to complete (approximately 3 seconds).
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TYPe LOGIc
Specifies that this will be a logic search (a mark will be placed
when all channels transition to the specified state).
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH1 HIGH
Specifies the Boolean logic criteria for channel 1; in this case,
high.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH2 HIGH
Specifies the Boolean logic criteria for channel 2; in this case,
high.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH3 HIGH
Specifies the Boolean logic criteria for channel 3; in this case,
high.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH1 1.4
Specifies to use 1.4 volts as the threshold for CH1.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH2 1.5
Specifies to use 1.5 volts as the threshold for CH2.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH3 1.3
Specifies to use 1.3 volts as the threshold for CH3.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn TRUE
Specifies the condition for generating a logic pattern search;
in this case, true.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion OR
Specifies the logic operator for the logic search; in this case,
OR.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:STATE 1
Turns the search on.
:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TOTal?
Returns 3 or 4, indicating 3 or 4 times when one of channels
1, 2 or 3 became high.
Note: Depending upon the number of transitions displayed,
you may get 3 or 4 search marks for this example. If you get
3 search marks, try adjusting the horizontal position until you
see 4 search marks.
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
E-3
Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence Examples
E-4
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Index
A
ACQuire:MAXSamplerate?, 2-59
ACQuire:MODe, 2-59
ACQuire:NUMACq?, 2-60
ACQuire:NUMAVg, 2-61
ACQuire:STATE, 2-61
ACQuire:STOPAfter, 2-63
ACQuire?, 2-59
Acquisition Command Group, 2-11
Alias Command Group, 2-12
ALIas, 2-63
ALIas:CATalog?, 2-64
ALIas:DEFine, 2-64
ALIas:DELEte, 2-65
ALIas:DELEte:ALL, 2-65
ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe], 2-66
ALIas[:STATE], 2-66
ALLEv?, 2-67
AUTOSet, 2-67
AUTOSet:ENAble, 2-68
AUXin:PRObe, 2-68
AUXin:PRObe:AUTOZero, 2-69
AUXin:PRObe:COMMAND, 2-69
AUXin:PRObe:DEGAUss, 2-70
AUXin:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE?, 2-70
AUXin:PRObe:FORCEDRange, 2-70
AUXin:PRObe:GAIN, 2-71
AUXin:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?, 2-71
AUXin:PRObe:ID:TYPE?, 2-71
AUXin:PRObe:RESistance?, 2-71
AUXin:PRObe:SIGnal, 2-72
AUXin:PRObe:UNIts?, 2-72
AUXin?, 2-68
B
BUS, 2-73
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate, 2-73
BUS:B<x>:CAN:PRObe, 2-73
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint, 2-74
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce, 2-74
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMAt, 2-75
BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:RWINClude, 2-75
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce, 2-76
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:DATA|:SDATA}:SOUrce, 2-76
BUS:B<x>:LABel, 2-77
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate, 2-77
BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat, 2-77
BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLARity, 2-78
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint, 2-78
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce, 2-79
BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard, 2-79
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>:SOUrce, 2-80
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:EDGE, 2-80
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:ISCLOCKed, 2-81
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCK:SOUrce, 2-81
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:WIDth, 2-81
BUS:B<x>:POSition, 2-82
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate, 2-82
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits, 2-83
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter, 2-83
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode, 2-83
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity, 2-84
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity, 2-84
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:SOUrce, 2-85
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:SOUrce, 2-85
BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder, 2-86
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA:SIZe, 2-88
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:POLARity, 2-87
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:SOUrce, 2-87
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:
POLARity, 2-88
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:SOUrce, 2-88
BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING, 2-89
BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime, 2-89
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:POLARity, 2-86
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce, 2-86
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:POLARity, 2-90
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce, 2-90
BUS:B<x>:STATE, 2-91
BUS:B<x>:TYPE, 2-91
BUS:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-92
BUS:THReshold:CH<x>, 2-92
BUS:THReshold:D<x>, 2-93
BUS:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-93
BUSY?, 2-94
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Index-1
Index
C
*CAL?, 2-95
CALibrate:FACtory, 2-95
CALibrate:FACtory:STATus?, 2-96
CALibrate:INTERNal, 2-96
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt, 2-96
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?, 2-97
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory?, 2-98
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?, 2-98
CALibrate:RESults?, 2-97
CALibrate:TEMPerature?, 2-98
Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group, 2-16
CH<x>:BANdwidth, 2-99
CH<x>:COUPling, 2-99
CH<x>:DESKew, 2-100
CH<x>:IMPedance, 2-100
CH<x>:INVert, 2-101
CH<x>:LABel, 2-101
CH<x>:OFFSet, 2-102
CH<x>:POSition, 2-102
CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero, 2-103
CH<x>:PRObe:COMMAND, 2-104
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss, 2-104
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE?, 2-104
CH<x>:PRObe:FORCEDRange, 2-105
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN, 2-105
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?, 2-106
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPE?, 2-107
CH<x>:PRObe:ID?, 2-106
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?, 2-107
CH<x>:PRObe:SIGnal, 2-107
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?, 2-108
CH<x>:PRObe?, 2-103
CH<x>:SCAle, 2-108
CH<x>:TERmination, 2-109
CH<x>:VOLts, 2-109
CH<x>:YUNits, 2-110
CH<x>?, 2-99
CLEARMenu, 2-110
*CLS, 2-110
Command Groups, 2-11
Cursor Command Group, 2-17
CURSor:FUNCtion, 2-111
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?, 2-112
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>, 2-113
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts, 2-113
CURSor:HBArs:USE, 2-114
Index-2
CURSor:HBArs?, 2-112
CURSor:MODe, 2-114
CURSor:VBArs:ALTERNATE<x>?, 2-115
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?, 2-116
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>?, 2-116
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>, 2-117
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts, 2-117
CURSor:VBArs:USE, 2-118
CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa?, 2-118
CURSor:VBArs?, 2-115
CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:DELta?, 2-119
CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:POSITION<x>?, 2-119
CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:UNIts?, 2-119
CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:DELta?, 2-120
CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:POSITION<x>?, 2-120
CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:UNIts?, 2-120
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:DELta?, 2-120
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:POSITION<x>?, 2-121
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:UNIts?, 2-121
CURSor:XY:RATIO:DELta?, 2-121
CURSor:XY:RATIO:POSITION<x>?, 2-121
CURSor:XY:RATIO:UNIts?, 2-122
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:DELta?, 2-122
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:POSITION<x>, 2-122
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:UNIts?, 2-122
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:DELta?, 2-123
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:POSITION<x>, 2-123
CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:UNIts?, 2-123
CURSor?, 2-111
CURVe, 2-123
D
D<x>, 2-145
D<x>:LABel, 2-145
D<x>:POSition, 2-145
D<x>:THREshold, 2-146
DATa, 2-125
DATa:COMPosition, 2-126
DATa:COMPosition:AVAILable?, 2-126
DATa:DESTination, 2-127
DATa:ENCdg, 2-127
DATa:RESOlution, 2-129
DATa:SOUrce, 2-129
DATa:STARt, 2-131
DATa:STOP, 2-132
DATa:WIDth, 2-133
DATE, 2-133
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Index
*DDT, 2-134
DESE, 2-135
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion, 2-135
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes, 2-136
DIAg:LOOP:STOP, 2-136
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?, 2-137
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?, 2-137
DIAg:SELect, 2-138
DIAg:SELect:<function>, 2-138
DIAg:STATE, 2-139
Display Command Group, 2-18
DISplay:CLOCk, 2-139
DISplay:DIGital:HEIght, 2-140
DISplay:FORMat, 2-140
DISplay:GLITch, 2-141
DISplay:GRAticule, 2-141
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight, 2-142
DISplay:INTENSITy:GLITch, 2-143
DISplay:INTENSITy:GRAticule, 2-143
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform, 2-143
DISplay:INTENSITy?, 2-142
DISplay:PERSistence, 2-144
DISplay?, 2-139
E
*ESE, 2-146
*ESR?, 2-147
Ethernet Command Group, 2-19
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp, 2-147
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress, 2-148
ETHERnet:DOMAINname, 2-148
ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress?, 2-149
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress, 2-149
ETHERnet:HTTPPort, 2-149
ETHERnet:IPADDress, 2-150
ETHERnet:NAME, 2-150
ETHERnet:PASSWord, 2-151
ETHERnet:PING, 2-151
ETHERnet:PING:STATUS?, 2-151
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask, 2-152
EVENT?, 2-152
EVMsg?, 2-153
EVQty?, 2-153
F
File System Command Group, 2-20
FILESystem, 2-155
FILESystem:CWD, 2-155
FILESystem:DELEte, 2-156
FILESystem:DIR?, 2-156
FILESystem:FORMat, 2-157
FILESystem:FREESpace?, 2-157
FILESystem:MKDir, 2-158
FILESystem:READFile, 2-158
FILESystem:REName, 2-159
FILESystem:RMDir, 2-159
FILESystem:WRITEFile, 2-160
FILTERVu:FREQuency, 2-160
FILTERVu:FREQuency:AVAILable?, 2-161
FPAnel:PRESS, 2-161
FPAnel:TURN, 2-163
G
GPIBUsb:ID?, 2-164
H
Hard copy Command Group, 2-22
HARDCopy, 2-164
HARDCopy:INKSaver, 2-165
HARDCopy:PREVIEW, 2-165
HEADer, 2-166
Horizontal Command Group, 2-23
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?, 2-167
HORizontal:DELay:MODe, 2-167
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe, 2-168
HORizontal:DIGital:RECOrdlength:MAIN?, 2-168
HORizontal:DIGital:SAMPLERate:MAIN?, 2-168
HORizontal:POSition, 2-169
HORizontal:PREViewstate?, 2-169
HORizontal:RECOrdlength, 2-169
HORizontal:RESOlution, 2-170
HORizontal:SAMPLERate, 2-170
HORizontal:SCAle, 2-170
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition, 2-171
HORizontal?, 2-166
I
ID?, 2-171
*IDN?, 2-172
FACtory, 2-154
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Index-3
Index
L
LANGuage, 2-172
LOCk, 2-172
*LRN?, 2-173
M
Mark Command Group, 2-23
MARK, 2-174
MARK:CREATE, 2-174
MARK:DELEte, 2-175
MARK:FREE?, 2-175
MARK:SELected:END?, 2-176
MARK:SELected:FOCUS?, 2-176
MARK:SELected:MARKSINCOLumn?, 2-176
MARK:SELected:OWNer?, 2-176
MARK:SELected:SOURCE?, 2-177
MARK:SELected:STARt?, 2-177
MARK:SELected:STATe?, 2-177
MARK:SELected:ZOOm:POSition?, 2-177
MARK:TOTal?, 2-178
Math Command Group, 2-25
MATH[1]:DEFine, 2-179
MATH[1]:HORizontal:POSition, 2-180
MATH[1]:HORizontal:SCAle, 2-180
MATH[1]:HORizontal:UNIts, 2-181
MATH[1]:LABel, 2-178
MATH[1]:SPECTral:GATing:INDICators, 2-181
MATH[1]:SPECTral:GATing:INDICators:
END?, 2-181
MATH[1]:SPECTral:GATing:INDICators:
STARt?, 2-182
MATH[1]:SPECTral:MAG, 2-182
MATH[1]:SPECTral:NYQUISTFreq?, 2-182
MATH[1]:SPECTral:WINdow, 2-183
MATH[1]:TYPe, 2-183
MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition, 2-184
MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle, 2-184
MATH[1]:VERTical:UNIts?, 2-185
MATH[1]?, 2-178
Measurement Command Group, 2-26
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot, 2-186
MEASUrement:GATing, 2-186
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIRection, 2-188
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE<x>, 2-188
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?, 2-187
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>, 2-190
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce1, 2-189
Index-4
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce2, 2-190
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe, 2-191
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?, 2-193
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?, 2-194
MEASUrement:IMMed?, 2-187
MEASUrement:INDICators:HORZ<x>?, 2-195
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMHORZ?, 2-195
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMVERT?, 2-196
MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE, 2-196
MEASUrement:INDICators:VERT<x>?, 2-197
MEASUrement:INDICators?, 2-195
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?, 2-197
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIRection, 2-198
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>, 2-199
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?, 2-198
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?, 2-199
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?, 2-200
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?, 2-200
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1], 2-200
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>, 2-201
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2, 2-201
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE, 2-202
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?, 2-203
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe, 2-203
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?, 2-206
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?, 2-206
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?, 2-197
MEASUrement:METHod, 2-207
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH, 2-208
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW, 2-208
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID, 2-209
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID<x>, 2-210
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2, 2-210
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, 2-211
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH, 2-211
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW, 2-212
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID, 2-213
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x>, 2-214
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2, 2-213
MEASUrement:REFLevel?, 2-207
MEASUrement:SNAPShot, 2-214
MEASUrement?, 2-185
MESSage, 2-215
MESSage:BOX, 2-215
MESSage:CLEAR, 2-216
MESSage:SHOW, 2-216
MESSage:STATE, 2-219
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Index
Miscellaneous Command Group, 2-29
N
NEWpass, 2-219
O
*OPC, 2-220
P
PASSWord, 2-221
PICTBridge:DATEPrint, 2-221
PICTBridge:DEFault, 2-222
PICTBridge:IDPrint, 2-222
PICTBridge:IMAGESize, 2-223
PICTBridge:PAPERSize, 2-224
PICTBridge:PAPERType, 2-225
PICTBridge:PRINTQual, 2-226
*PSC, 2-226
*PUD, 2-227
R
*RCL, 2-227
RECAll:SETUp, 2-228
RECAll:WAVEform, 2-228
REF<x>:DATE?, 2-229
REF<x>:HORizontal:DELay:TIMe, 2-230
REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle, 2-230
REF<x>:LABel, 2-230
REF<x>:POSition, 2-231
REF<x>:SCAle, 2-231
REF<x>:TIMe?, 2-231
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition, 2-232
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle, 2-232
REF<x>?, 2-229
REM, 2-233
*RST, 2-234
S
*SAV, 2-234
Save and Recall Command Group, 2-31
SAVe:ASSIgn:TYPe, 2-235
SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS<x>, 2-235
SAVe:IMAGe, 2-236
SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat, 2-236
SAVe:IMAGe:LAYout, 2-237
SAVe:SETUp, 2-237
SAVe:WAVEform, 2-238
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, 2-239
SAVe:WAVEform:GATIng, 2-240
SAVe:WAVEform:SPREADSheet:RESOlution, 2-240
Search Commands Group, 2-33
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy, 2-244
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:STATE, 2-244
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL?, 2-244
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:CONDition, 2-247
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:DATa:DIRection, 2-247
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:DATa:QUALifier, 2-248
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:DATa:SIZe, 2-249
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:DATa:VALue, 2-249
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:FRAMEtype, 2-250
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe, 2-250
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue, 2-251
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
ADDRess:MODe, 2-251
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
ADDRess:TYPe, 2-251
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
ADDRess:VALue, 2-252
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
CONDition, 2-252
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
DATa:DIRection, 2-253
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
DATa:SIZe, 2-253
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
DATa:VALue, 2-254
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:
CONDition, 2-254
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:
DATa:HIVALue, 2-255
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:
DATa:QUALifier, 2-255
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:
DATa:SIZe, 2-256
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Index-5
Index
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:
DATa:VALue, 2-257
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:
ERRTYPE, 2-257
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:
IDentifier:VALue, 2-258
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
PARallel:VALue, 2-258
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
RS232C:CONDition, 2-259
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe, 2-259
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue, 2-260
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
RS232C:TX:DATa:SIZe, 2-260
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
RS232C:TX:DATa:VALue, 2-260
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:
CONDition, 2-261
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:
DATa:SIZe, 2-262
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:
DATa{:MISO|:IN}:VALue, 2-261
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:
DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}:VALue, 2-262
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SOUrce, 2-262
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS?, 2-245
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:
SLOpe, 2-263
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:
SOUrce, 2-263
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel, 2-264
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
CH<x>, 2-264
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
MATH, 2-264
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
REF<x>, 2-265
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
FUNCtion, 2-265
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:
CH<x>, 2-265
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:
CLOCk:EDGE, 2-266
Index-6
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:
CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-266
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:
D<x>, 2-267
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:
MATH, 2-267
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:
REF<x>, 2-268
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
INPut:CH<x>, 2-268
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
INPut:D<x>, 2-268
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
INPut:MATH, 2-269
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
INPut:REF<x>, 2-269
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
WHEn, 2-270
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
WHEn:LESSLimit, 2-270
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
WHEn:MORELimit, 2-271
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:CH<x>, 2-271
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:MATH, 2-271
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:REF<x>, 2-272
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-272
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:MATH, 2-273
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:REF<x>, 2-273
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
POLarity, 2-273
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
SOUrce, 2-274
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
WHEn, 2-274
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
WIDth, 2-275
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
POLarity, 2-275
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
SOUrce, 2-276
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Index
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
WHEn, 2-276
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
WIDth, 2-277
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
CLOCk:EDGE, 2-277
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-277
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
CLOCk:THReshold, 2-278
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:
SOUrce, 2-278
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:
THReshold, 2-279
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
HOLDTime, 2-279
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
SETTime, 2-279
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
THReshold:CH<x>, 2-280
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
THReshold:REF<x>, 2-281
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
THReshold{:MATH|:MATH1}, 2-280
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe, 2-283
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:
CH<x>, 2-283
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:
MATH, 2-284
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:
REF<x>, 2-284
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:
RISEFall}:DELTatime, 2-281
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:
RISEFall}:POLarity, 2-281
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:
RISEFall}:SOUrce, 2-282
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:
RISEFall}:WHEn, 2-282
SEARCH?, 2-241
SELect, 2-284
SELect:BUS<x>, 2-285
SELect:CH<x>, 2-285
SELect:CONTROl, 2-286
SELect:D<x>, 2-286
SELect:MATH[1], 2-287
SELect:REF<x>, 2-288
SET?, 2-288
SETUP<x>:DATE?, 2-289
SETUP<x>:LABEL, 2-290
SETUP<x>:TIME?, 2-290
*SRE, 2-290
Status and Error Command Group, 2-37
*STB?, 2-291
T
TEKSecure, 2-291
TIME, 2-292
TOTaluptime?, 2-293
*TRG, 2-293
Trigger Command Group, 2-38
TRIGger, 2-294
TRIGger:A, 2-294
TRIGger:A:BUS, 2-295
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition, 2-296
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection, 2-297
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier, 2-297
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe, 2-298
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue, 2-298
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype, 2-299
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:
MODe, 2-299
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:
VALue, 2-300
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe, 2-300
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe, 2-301
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue, 2-301
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition, 2-302
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection, 2-303
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe, 2-303
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue, 2-304
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition, 2-304
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue, 2-305
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier, 2-305
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe, 2-306
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue, 2-306
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE, 2-307
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue, 2-308
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:VALue, 2-308
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition, 2-308
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:
SIZe, 2-309
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:
VALue, 2-309
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Index-7
Index
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:
SIZe, 2-310
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:
VALue, 2-310
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition, 2-311
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe, 2-312
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:IN|:MISO}:
VALue, 2-311
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:MOSI}:
VALue, 2-312
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce, 2-312
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling, 2-313
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe, 2-314
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce, 2-314
TRIGger:A:EDGE?, 2-313
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe, 2-315
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?, 2-315
TRIGger:A:LEVel, 2-316
TRIGger:A:LEVel:AUXin, 2-316
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>, 2-317
TRIGger:A:LEVel:D<x>, 2-317
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss, 2-318
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion, 2-319
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>, 2-320
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE, 2-320
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-321
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:D<x>, 2-321
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?, 2-320
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:DELTatime, 2-322
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:D<x>, 2-322
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn, 2-323
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:
LESSLimit, 2-324
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:
MORELimit, 2-324
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?, 2-322
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:
(CH<x>|D<x>), 2-325
TRIGger:A:LOGIc?, 2-318
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-325
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold{:EXT|:AUX}, 2-326
TRIGger:A:MODe, 2-326
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss, 2-327
TRIGger:A:PULse?, 2-327
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity, 2-328
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce, 2-328
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn, 2-329
Index-8
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth, 2-330
TRIGger:A:PULSEWIDth?, 2-328
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity, 2-330
TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce, 2-331
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn, 2-331
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth, 2-332
TRIGger:A:RUNT?, 2-330
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE, 2-333
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-334
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold, 2-334
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk?, 2-333
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce, 2-335
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold, 2-336
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa?, 2-335
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime, 2-337
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime, 2-337
TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:CH<x>, 2-337
TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:D<x>, 2-338
TRIGger:A:SETHold?, 2-333
TRIGger:A:TYPe, 2-341
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-342
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLDoff:FIELD, 2-343
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE, 2-343
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity, 2-344
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce, 2-344
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard, 2-345
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?, 2-342
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}, 2-345
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:
DELTatime, 2-339
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity, 2-339
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce, 2-340
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn, 2-340
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}?, 2-338
TRIGger:EXTernal:PRObe, 2-346
TRIGger:EXTernal:YUNIts?, 2-347
TRIGger:EXTernal?, 2-346
TRIGger:FREQuency?, 2-347
TRIGger:STATE?, 2-347
*TST?, 2-348
U
UNLock, 2-348
USBDevice:CONFigure, 2-349
USBTMC, 2-349
USBTMC:PRODUCTID:DECimal?, 2-349
USBTMC:PRODUCTID:HEXadecimal?, 2-350
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Index
USBTMC:SERIALnumber?, 2-350
USBTMC:VENDORID:DECimal?, 2-350
USBTMC:VENDORID:HEXadecimal?, 2-350
V
VERBose, 2-351
Vertical Command Group, 2-47
W
*WAI, 2-352
Waveform Transfer Command Group, 2-50
WAVFrm?, 2-352
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr, 2-353
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt, 2-354
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, 2-354
WFMInpre:BYT_Or, 2-355
WFMInpre:COMPosition, 2-355
WFMInpre:ENCdg, 2-356
WFMInpre:FILTERFreq, 2-356
WFMInpre:NR_Pt, 2-357
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt, 2-357
WFMInpre:PT_Off, 2-358
WFMInpre:XINcr, 2-358
WFMInpre:XUNit, 2-359
WFMInpre:XZEro, 2-360
WFMInpre:YMUlt, 2-360
WFMInpre:YOFf, 2-361
WFMInpre:YUNit, 2-362
WFMInpre:YZEro, 2-362
WFMInpre?, 2-353
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, 2-364
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, 2-364
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, 2-365
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or, 2-365
WFMOutpre:COMPosition, 2-366
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, 2-366
WFMOutpre:FILTERFreq?, 2-367
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?, 2-367
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?, 2-368
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?, 2-368
WFMOutpre:PT_ORder?, 2-369
WFMOutpre:RECOrdlength?, 2-369
WFMOutpre:WFId?, 2-369
WFMOutpre:XINcr?, 2-371
WFMOutpre:XUNit?, 2-371
WFMOutpre:XZEro?, 2-371
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?, 2-372
WFMOutpre:YOFf?, 2-372
WFMOutpre:YUNit?, 2-373
WFMOutpre:YZEro?, 2-373
WFMOutpre?, 2-363
Z
Zoom Command Group, 2-57
ZOOm:ZOOM1:FACtor?, 2-375
ZOOm:ZOOM1:HORizontal:POSition, 2-375
ZOOm:ZOOM1:HORizontal:SCAle, 2-376
ZOOm:ZOOM1:POSition, 2-376
ZOOm:ZOOM1:SCAle, 2-376
ZOOm:ZOOM1:STATE, 2-377
ZOOm:ZOOM1?, 2-375
ZOOm?, 2-374
ZOOm{:MODe|:STATE}, 2-374
MSO2000B, DPO2000B, MSO2000 and DPO2000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual
Index-9
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement